FANUC Machining Center

*
FANUC Series 0 * Mate-MODEL D

FANUC Series 0 -MODEL D
For Machining Center System
USERS MANUAL
B-64304EN-2/01
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as impossible.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by or in the main body.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the
safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions
in this section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions
are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable
to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool
builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program
to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become
fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ................s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
PROGRAMMING .............................................................................s-6
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING........s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ...............s-11
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the
Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use
the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

1
WARNING
Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first
checking the operation of the machine. Before
starting a production run, ensure that the machine
is operating correctly by performing a trial run
using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating
the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece
mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation
of the machine may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
Before operating the machine, thoroughly check
the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified
data may result in the machine behaving
user.
Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate
for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended
operation. Refer to the manual provided with the
machine to determine the maximum allowable
feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed,
it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing
damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or
injury to the user.
When using a tool compensation function,
thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified
data may result in the machine behaving
user.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are
factory-set. Usually, there is not need to change
them. When, however, there is not alternative other
than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine
itself, or injury to the user.
6 Immediately after switching on the power, do not
touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the
position display or alarm screen appears on the
CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated
to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC
unit in other than its normal state. Starting the
machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
7 The Users Manual and programming manual
supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machine's functions, including
any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to
another. Therefore, some functions described in
the manuals may not actually be available for a
particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
8 Some functions may have been implemented at
the request of the machine-tool builder. When
using such functions, refer to the manual supplied
by the machine-tool builder for details of their use
and any related cautions.
CAUTION
The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very
precise fabrication technology. Some pixels may
not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is
not a defect.
s-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are
stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is
turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however,
or it may prove necessary to delete all data from
nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and
assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup all
vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe
place.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to
programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the
supplied Users Manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly,
the machine may behave unexpectedly as a result
of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear
interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement
between the start and end points), the tool path
must be carefully confirmed before performing
programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the user.
Function involving a rotation axis
When programming normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the
speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming
may result in the rotation axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes
the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the
latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is
likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not
convert the measurement units of data such as the
workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore,
determine which measurement units are being
used. Attempting to perform an operation with
invalid data specified may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
user.
s-6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed
control approaches the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system, the spindle speed may become
excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to
specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying
the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual
reference position return as required. Stroke check
is not possible before manual reference position
return is performed. Note that when stroke check is
disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke
limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to
the user.
7 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in
incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may
behave unexpectedly.
8 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular
interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned
cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Refer to the descriptions of the respective
functions for details.
9 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the
torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a
move command will be executed without
performing a skip.
10 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary
considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
11 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate
system or a reference position return command is
issued in compensation function mode,
compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in
the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands,
therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.
s-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of
machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied Users Manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine
the current position of the tool and workpiece, and
ensure that the movement axis, direction, and
feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect
operation of the machine may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual
reference position return as required.
If the machine is operated without first performing
manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before
manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may
Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a
large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the
tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling
may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause
injury to the user.
Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the
specification in a macro variable) during threading,
rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be
predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the
operator.
Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation
when the machine is operating under the control of
a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the
user.
s-8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
6 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror
imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Before attempting to operate the machine
under the control of a program, confirm the
coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a
program without making allowances for any shift in
the workpiece coordinate system, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing
injury to the operator.
7 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu
switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is
possible to specify operations not supported by the
machine operator's panel, such as mode change,
override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are
operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to
the user.
8 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently
running program. As a result, the servo axes are
stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to
function for reasons such as an MDI panel
problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the
RESET key to ensure security.
9 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during
programmed operation of the machine, the tool
path may vary when the machine is restarted.
Before restarting the machine after manual
intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
10 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block
functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating
the machine in this case.
s-9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
11 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation
of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the
dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the
programmed feed rate.
12 Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in
MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a
command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a
command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in
automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius
compensation mode, pay particular attention to the
tool path when automatic operation is subsequently
resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the
corresponding functions for details.
13 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the
machining program is edited (modification,
insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave
unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the
control of that program. Basically, do not modify,
insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
s-10
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries,
keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who
have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked
and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents
of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while
external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage
alarm is displayed on the machine operator's panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed,
replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section Method of replacing battery
in the Users Manual (Common to T/M series) for
details of the battery replacement procedure.
s-11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries,
keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who
have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to
and
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to
preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage
alarm is displayed on the machine operator's panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed,
replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will
be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series
Maintenance Manual for details of the battery
replacement procedure.
s-12
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is
necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked
and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit
hazard.
s-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-64304EN-2/01
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-6
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................. s-11
I. GENERAL
1
GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC MACHINE TOOL ................... 7

NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL.......................................................... 8
NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA ...................................................... 8
II. PROGRAMMING
1
GENERAL ............................................................................................. 11
1.1
TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM................................. 12
PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ..................................... 13
INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .............................................................. 18

3.1
3.2
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION ........................................... 24

4.1
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) ................................................ 19

THREADING (G33) ..................................................................................... 22
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) ......................................... 25
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ..................................... 28

5.1
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING............................................................... 29

5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.10
5.1.11
5.1.12
5.1.13
5.1.14
5.1.15
5.2
High-Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)..................................................................34

Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (G74) ........................................................................36
Fine Boring Cycle (G76)........................................................................................43
Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling (G81) .......................................................................45
Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle (G82) ..........................................................47
Peck Drilling Cycle (G83)......................................................................................49
Small-Hole Peck Drilling Cycle (G83) ..................................................................51
Tapping Cycle (G84)..............................................................................................57
Boring Cycle (G85) ................................................................................................60
Boring Cycle (G86) ................................................................................................62
Back Boring Cycle (G87).......................................................................................64
Boring Cycle (G88) ................................................................................................67
Boring Cycle (G89) ................................................................................................69
Canned Cycle Cancel for Drilling (G80)................................................................71
Example for Using Canned Cycles for Drilling .....................................................72
RIGID TAPPING .......................................................................................... 74

5.2.1
Rigid Tapping (G84) ..............................................................................................75

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
Left-Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74)...............................................................79

Peck Rigid Tapping Cycle (G84 or G74) ...............................................................83
Canned Cycle Cancel (G80)...................................................................................86
Override during Rigid Tapping ..............................................................................87
5.2.5.1
5.2.5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Extraction override....................................................................................... 87
Override signal............................................................................................. 89
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AND CORNER R ............................................. 90

INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION........................................................ 94
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)..................................... 97
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)..................... 101
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
B-64304EN-2/01
Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75)...............................................................................103

Direct Constant-Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77)..................................107
Continuous-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78)..................................................111
Intermittent-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79)..................................................115
COMPENSATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 118

6.1
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)................................ 119

6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Overview ..............................................................................................................119
G53, G28, and G30 Commands in Tool Length Compensation Mode ................125
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION SHIFT TYPES ................................... 127

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37) ............................ 137
TOOL OFFSET (G45 - G48)...................................................................... 141
OVERVIEW OF CUTTER COMPENSATION (G40-G42).......................... 146
DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION ................................................ 153
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
Overview ..............................................................................................................153
Tool Movement in Start-up ..................................................................................157
Tool Movement in Offset Mode...........................................................................163
Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel...............................................................184
Prevention of Overcutting Due to Cutter Compensation......................................192
Interference Check ...............................................................................................196
6.6.6.1
6.6.6.2
6.6.6.3
6.6.7
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to occur ............... 200

Interference check alarm function.............................................................. 200
Interference check avoidance function....................................................... 202
Cutter Compensation for Input from MDI ...........................................................208
CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G39) ........................................ 210

TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION
VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ....... 212
SCALING (G50, G51) ................................................................................ 215
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69)..................................... 224
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1).......................... 231
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) ............................... 236
MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 10/11 PROGRAM FORMAT 238
AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS............................................................ 239

8.1
ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81 (G80.4, G81.4)) ............................ 240

8.1.1
Electronic Gear Box .............................................................................................240
c-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-64304EN-2/01
III. OPERATION
1
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA................................................... 253

1.1
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY

1.1.1
1.1.2
................................... 254
Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ........................................255

Tool Length Measurement ...................................................................................258
APPENDIX
A
PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 263
A.1
A.2
A.3
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS........................................................... 264

DATA TYPE............................................................................................... 311
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES......................................... 312
DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C.................................................. 314

B.1
SETTING UNIT.......................................................................................... 315

B.1.1
B.1.2
B.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET.................................................................... 316

B.2.1
B.2.2
B.3
Differences in Specifications................................................................................328
Differences in Diagnosis Display .........................................................................328
SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................... 329

B.10.1
B.10.2
B.11
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL......................................................................... 328

B.9.1
B.9.2
B.10
LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................................. 326

B.8.1
B.8.2
B.9
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................... 325

B.7.1
B.7.2
B.8
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 322

B.6.1
B.6.2
B.7
SKIP FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 320

B.5.1
B.5.2
B.6
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 319

B.4.1
B.4.2
B.5
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 318

B.3.1
B.3.2
B.4
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 330

B.11.1
B.11.2
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.12
TOOL FUNCTIONS ................................................................................... 331

B.12.1
B.12.2
B.13
STORED STROKE CHECK....................................................................... 357

B.26.1
B.26.2
B.27
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .............................................................. 356

B.25.1
B.25.2
B.26
EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................... 355

B.24.1
B.24.2
B.25
PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................... 350

B.23.1
B.23.2
B.24
MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 349

B.22.1
B.22.2
B.23
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................ 348

B.21.1
B.21.2
B.22
ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 347

B.20.1
B.20.2
B.21
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 342

B.19.1
B.19.2
B.20
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 341

B.18.1
B.18.2
B.19
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL /AI CONTOUR CONTROL............ 338

B.17.1
B.17.2
B.18
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ....................................... 337

B.16.1
B.16.2
B.17
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................335
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................... 336

B.15.1
B.15.2
B.16
CUSTOM MACRO..................................................................................... 333

B.14.1
B.14.2
B.14.3
B.15
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY.......................................................... 332

B.13.1
B.13.2
B.14
B-64304EN-2/01
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............................................ 359

B.27.1
B.27.2
c-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-64304EN-2/01
B.28
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN

ERASURE FUNCTION .............................................................................. 360
B.28.1
B.28.2
B.29
RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 361

B.29.1
B.29.2
B.30
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ........................................................ 376

B.37.1
B.37.2
B.38
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................................................... 375

B.36.1
B.36.2
B.37
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING............................................................. 373

B.35.1
B.35.2
B.36
CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION .... 367

B.34.1
B.34.2
B.35
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER .............................................................. 366

B.33.1
B.33.2
B.34
DATA SERVER FUNCTION ...................................................................... 365

B.32.1
B.32.2
B.33
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 363

B.31.1
B.31.2
B.32
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF......................................................... 362

B.30.1
B.30.2
B.31
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING ............. 377

B.38.1
B.38.2
c-5
I. GENERAL
GENERAL
B-64304EN-2/01
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
This manual consists of the following parts:
About this manual

I.
GENERAL
Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related
manuals, and notes for reading this manual.
II.
PROGRAMMING
Describes each function: Format used to program functions in the
NC language, characteristics, and restrictions.
III. OPERATION
Describes the manual operation and automatic operation of a
machine, procedures for inputting and outputting data, and
procedures for editing a program.
APPENDIX
Lists parameters, valid data ranges, and alarms.
NOTE
1 This manual describes the functions that can
operate in the M series path control type. For
other functions not specific to the M series , refer to
the User's Manual (Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System) (B-64304EN).
2 Some functions described in this manual may not
be applied to some products. For detail, refer to the
DESCRIPTIONS manual (B-64302EN).
3 This manual does not detail the parameters not
mentioned in the text. For details of those
parameters, refer to the parameter manual
(B-64310EN).
Parameters are used to set functions and
operating conditions of a CNC machine tool, and
frequently-used values in advance. Usually, the
machine tool builder factory-sets parameters so
that the user can use the machine tool easily.
4 This manual describes not only basic functions but
also optional functions. Look up the options
incorporated into your system in the manual written
by the machine tool builder.
-3-
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
B-64304EN-2/01
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name
Abbreviation
FANUC Series 0i -MD
0i-MD
Series 0i-MD
FANUC Series 0i Mate -MD
0i Mate-MD
Series 0i Mate-MD
Special symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
- IP
Indicates a combination of axes such as X_ Y_ Z_
In the underlined position following each address, a numeric value
such as a coordinate value is placed (used in PROGRAMMING.).
-;
Indicates the end of a block. It actually corresponds to the ISO code
LF or EIA code CR.
-4-
B-64304EN-2/01
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
Related manuals of Series 0i -D,Series 0i Mate -D

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i -D,Series 0i
Mate -D. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name
DESCRIPTIONS
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
USERS MANUAL
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USERS MANUAL (For Lathe System)
USERS MANUAL (For Machining Center System)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARAMETER MANUAL
START-UP MANUAL
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATORS MANUAL
C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL
PMC
PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATORS MANUAL
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
OPERATORS MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System)
OPERATORS MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions)
OPERATORS MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE 0i OPERATORS MANUAL
TURN MATE i OPERATORS MANUAL
-5-
Specification
number
B-64302EN
B-64303EN
B-64303EN-1
B-64304EN
B-64304EN-1
B-64304EN-2
B-64305EN
B-64310EN
B-64304EN-3
B-64303EN-2
B-64304EN-5
B-64303EN-3
B-64393EN
B-64404EN
B-64414EN
B-63874EN
B-63874EN-2
B-63874EN-1
B-64434EN
B-64254EN
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
B-64304EN-2/01
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR i/i series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR
i/i series
Table 2 Related manuals
Manual name
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series
DESCRIPTIONS
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series
DESCRIPTIONS
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i/i series,
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS
series PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i/i series,
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series
PARAMETER MANUAL
Specification
number
B-65262EN
B-65272EN
B-65302EN
B-65312EN
B-65282EN
B-65322EN
B-65285EN
B-65325EN
B-65270EN
B-65280EN
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i

series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
-6-
1.1
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
B-64304EN-2/01
GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC MACHINE

TOOL
When machining the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare
the program, then operate the CNC machine by using the program.
(1) First, prepare the program from a part drawing to operate the
CNC machine tool.
How to prepare the program is described in the Part II,
Programming.
(2) The program is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the
workpieces and tools on the machine, and operate the tools
according to the programming. Finally, execute the machining
actually.
How to operate the CNC system is described in the Part III,
Operation.
Part
program
Part
drawing
CNC
PART II, "PROGRAMMING"
Machine Tool
PART III, "OPERATION"
Before the actual programming, make the machining plan for how to
machine the part.
Machining plan
1. Determination of workpieces machining range
2. Method of mounting workpieces on the machine tool
3. Machining sequence in every cutting process
4. Cutting tools and cutting conditions
Decide the cutting method in every cutting process.
Cutting process
Cutting procedure
1. Cutting method :
Rough
Semi
Finish
2. Cutting tools
3. Cutting conditions :
Feedrate
Cutting depth
4. Tool path
-7-
1
End face
cutting
2
Outer
diameter
cutting
3
Grooving
1.GENERAL
1.2
GENERAL
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

CAUTION
1 The function of an CNC machine tool system
depends not only on the CNC, but on the
combination of the machine tool, its magnetic
cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the operator's
panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function,
programming, and operation relating to all
combinations. This manual generally describes these
from the stand-point of the CNC. So, for details on a
particular CNC machine tool, refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder, which should take
precedence over this manual.
2 In the header field of each page of this manual, a
chapter title is indicated so that the reader can
reference necessary information easily.
By finding a desired title first, the reader can
reference necessary parts only.
3 This manual describes as many reasonable variations
in equipment usage as possible. It cannot address
every combination of features, options and
commands that should not be attempted.
If a particular combination of operations is not
described, it should not be attempted.
1.3
NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA

CAUTION
Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc.
are stored in the CNC unit internal non-volatile
memory. In general, these contents are not lost by
the switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is
possible that a state can occur where precious data
stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a
failure restoration. In order to restore rapidly when
this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that
you create a copy of the various kinds of data
beforehand.
-8-
II. PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections:
1.1 TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM .........12
- 11 -
1.GENERAL
1.1
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM
Explanation
- Machining using the end of cutter - Tool length compensation function
Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The
tools have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the
program in accordance with the tools.
Therefore, the length of each tool used should be measured in advance.
By setting the difference between the length of the standard tool and
the length of each tool in the CNC (See Chapter Setting and
Displaying Data in Users Manual (Common to Lathe System /
Machining Center System)), machining can be performed without
altering the program even when the tool is changed. This function is
called tool length compensation (See Chapter, Compensation
Function in this manual).
H1
H3
H2
H4
Standard
tool
Workpiece
- Machining using the side of cutter - Cutter compensation function

Cutter path using cutter compensation
Machined part figure
Workpiece
Tool
Because a cutter has a radius, the center of the cutter path goes around
the workpiece with the cutter radius deviated.
If radius of cutters are stored in the CNC (See Chapter Setting and
Displaying Data in Users Manual (Common to Lathe System /
Machining Center System)), the tool can be moved by cutter radius
apart from the machining part figure. This function is called cutter
compensation (See Chapter, Compensation Function in this
manual).
- 12 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
2.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION)
PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION)
A number following address G determines the meaning of the
command for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type
One-shot G code
Modal G code
Meaning
The G code is effective only in the block in which it
is specified.
The G code is effective until another G code of the
same group is specified.
(Example)
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01 X_ ;
Z_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00 Z_ ; G00 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G01 X_ ;
:
- 13 -
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION)
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
When the clear state (parameter CLR (No. 3402#6)) is set at

power-up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states
described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with
as indicated in Table 2.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set
at power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by parameter
G23 (No. 3402#7). However, G22 and G23 remain
unchanged when the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting parameter G01
(No. 3402#0).
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting parameter G91
(No. 3402#3).
When G code system B or C is used in the lathe system,
setting parameter G91 (No. 3402#3) determines which code,
either G90 or G91, is effective.
(6) In the machining center system, the user can select G17,
G18, or G19 by setting parameters G18 and G19 (No.
3402#1 and #2).
G codes in group 00 other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G
codes.
When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G
code that has no corresponding option is specified, alarm PS0010
occurs.
Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G
code belongs to a different group. If multiple G codes that belong
to the same group are specified in the same block, only the last G
code specified is valid.
If a G code belonging to group 01 is specified in a canned cycle
for drilling, the canned cycle for drilling is cancelled. This means
that the same state set by specifying G80 is set. Note that the G
codes in group 01 are not affected by a G code specifying a
canned cycle for drilling.
G codes are indicated by group.
The group of G60 is switched according to the setting of the
parameter MDL (No. 5431#0). (When the MDL bit is set to 0,
the 00 group is selected. When the MDL bit is set to 1, the 01
group is selected.)
- 14 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
(G FUNCTION)
Table 2 G code list

G code
G00
G01
G02
G03
G04
G05.1
G05.4
G07.1 (G107)
G09
G10
G11
G15
G16
G17
G18
G19
G20
G21
G22
G23
G27
G28
G29
G30
G31
G33
G37
G39
G40
G41
G42
G40.1
G41.1
G42.1
G43
G44
G45
G46
G47
G48
G49
G50
G51
G50.1
G51.1
G52
G53
Group
01
00
17
02
06
04
00
01
00
07
19
08
00
08
11
22
00
Function
Positioning (rapid traverse)
Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
Dwell, Exact stop
AI advanced preview control / AI contour control
HRV3 on/off
Cylindrical interpolation
Exact stop
Programmable data input
Programmable data input mode cancel
Polar coordinates command cancel
Polar coordinates command
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
XpYp plane selection
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
ZpXp plane selection
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
YpZp plane selection
Input in inch
Input in mm
Stored stroke check function on
Stored stroke check function off
Reference position return check
Automatic return to reference position
Movement from reference position
2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
Skip function
Threading
Automatic tool length measurement
Cutter compensation : corner circular interpolation
Cutter compensation : cancel
Cutter compensation : left
Cutter compensation : right
Normal direction control cancel mode
Normal direction control on : left
Normal direction control on : right
Tool length compensation +
Tool length compensation Tool offset : increase
Tool offset : decrease
Tool offset : double increase
Tool offset : double decrease
Tool length compensation cancel
Scaling cancel
Scaling
Programmable mirror image cancel
Programmable mirror image
Local coordinate system setting
Machine coordinate system setting
- 15 -
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION)
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Table 2 G code list

G code
G54
G54.1
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G60
G61
G62
G63
G64
G65
G66
G67
G68
G69
G73
G74
G75
G76
G77
G78
G79
G80
G80.4
G81.4
G81
G82
G83
G84
G84.2
G84.3
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
G90
G91
G91.1
G92
G92.1
G93
G94
G95
G96
G97
Group
14
00
15
00
12
16
09
01
09
01
09
34
09
03
00
05
13
Function
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
Additional workpiece coordinate system selection
Single direction positioning
Exact stop mode
Automatic corner override
Tapping mode
Cutting mode
Macro call
Macro modal call
Macro modal call cancel
Coordinate system rotation mode on
Coordinate system rotation mode off
Peck drilling cycle
Left-handed tapping cycle
Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Fine boring cycle
Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Canned cycle cancel
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
Peck drilling cycle
Tapping cycle
Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Back boring cycle
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Absolute programming
Incremental programming
Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
Workpiece coordinate system preset
Inverse time feed
Feed per minute
Feed per revolution
Constant surface speed control
Constant surface speed control cancel
- 16 -
(G FUNCTION)
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Table 2 G code list

G code
G98
G99
G160
G161
Group
10
20
Function
Canned cycle : return to initial level
Canned cycle : return to R point level
In-feed control cancel (for grinding machine)
In-feed control (for grinding machine)
- 17 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
Chapter 3, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTION", consists of the
following sections:
3.1 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) ...........................19
3.2 THREADING (G33)...................................................................22
- 18 -
B-64304EN-2/01
3.1
PROGRAMMING
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60)

For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final
positioning from one direction is available.
Overrun
Start point
Start point
End point
Temporary stop
Format
G60 IP_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an
end point, and for an incremental programming, the
distance the tool moves.
Explanation
An overrun and a positioning direction are set by the parameter No.
5440. Even when a commanded positioning direction coincides with
that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point.
G60, which is a one-shot G-code, can be used as a modal G-code in
group 01 by setting 1 to the bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431.
This setting can eliminate specifying a G60 command for every block.
Other specifications are the same as those for a one-shot G60
command. When a one-shot G code is specified in the single direction
positioning mode, the one-shot G command is effective like G codes
in group 01.
(Example)
When one-shot G60 commands are used.
G90;
G60 X0Y0;
G60 X100;
G60 Y100;
G04 X10;
G00 X0Y0;
When modal G60 command is used.
Single direction positioning mode start
G90G60;
X0Y0;
X100;
Y100;
G04X10;
Single direction positioning mode cancel
G00X0 Y0;
- 19 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Overview of operation
In the case of positioning of non-linear interpolation type (bit

1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 0)
As shown below, single direction positioning is performed
independently along each axis.
X
Overrun distance in the Z-axis direction

Overrun distance in the
X-axis direction
Programmed end point

Z
Programmed start point
In the case of positioning of linear interpolation type (bit 1

(LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1)
Positioning of interpolation type is performed until the tool once
stops before or after a specified end point. Then, the tool is
positioned independently along each axis until the end point is
reached.
X
Overrun distance in the Z-axis direction
Overrun distance in the

X-axis direction
Programmed end point

Z
Programmed start point
Limitation
Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for

which no overrun distance is set in parameter No. 5440.
Single direction positioning is not performed along an axis for
which travel distance 0 is specified.
The mirror image function is not applied in a parameter-set
direction. Even in the mirror image mode, the direction of single
direction positioning remains unchanged. If positioning of linear
interpolation type is used, and the state of mirror image when a
single direction positioning block is looked ahead differs from
the state of mirror image when the execution of the block is
started, an alarm is issued. When switching mirror image in the
middle of a program, disable looking ahead by specifying a
non-buffering M code. Then, switch mirror image when there is
no look-ahead block.
- 20 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
In the cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1), single direction

positioning cannot be used.
When specifying single direction positioning on a machine that
uses arbitrary angular axis control, first position the angular axis
then specify the positioning of the Cartesian axis. If the reverse
specification order is used, or the angular axis and Cartesian axis
are specified in the same block, an incorrect positioning direction
can result.
In positioning at a restart position by program restart function,
single direction positioning is not performed.
During canned cycle for drilling, no single direction positioning
is effected in drilling axis.
The single direction positioning does not apply to the shift
motion in the canned cycles of G76 and G87.
- 21 -
3.2
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
THREADING (G33)
Straight threads with a constant lead can be cut. The position coder
mounted on the spindle reads the spindle speed in real-time. The read
spindle speed is converted to the feedrate per minute to feed the tool.
Format
Z
G33IP_ F_ ;
F : Long axis direction lead
Workpiece
X
Explanation
In general, threading is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since threading starts
when the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1-turn
signal, threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the
workpiece is unchanged for repeated threading. Note that the spindle
speed must remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting.
If not, incorrect thread lead will occur.
In general, the lag of the servo system, etc. will produce somewhat
incorrect leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To
compensate for this, a threading length somewhat longer than required
should be specified.
Table 3.2 (a) lists the ranges for specifying the thread lead.
Table 3.2 (a) Ranges of lead sizes that can be specified
Least
command
Command value range of the lead
increment
Metric input
Inch input
0.001 mm
0.0001 mm
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
- 22 -
F1 to F50000 (0.01 to 500.00mm)

F1 to F50000 (0.01 to 500.00mm)
F1 to F99999 (0.0001 to 9.9999inch)
F1 to F99999 (0.0001 to 9.9999inch)
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
NOTE
1 The spindle speed is limited as follows :
1 spindle speed (Maximum feedrate) / (Thread
lead)
Spindle speed : min-1
Thread lead : mm or inch
Maximum feedrate : mm/min or inch/min ; maximum
command-specified feedrate for feed-per-minute
mode or maximum feedrate that is determined
based on mechanical restrictions including those
related to motors, whichever is smaller
2 Cutting feedrate override is not applied to the
converted feedrate in all machining process from
rough cutting to finish cutting. The feedrate is fixed
at 100%
3 The converted feedrate is limited by the upper
feedrate specified.
4 Feed hold is disabled during threading. Pressing the
feed hold key during threading causes the machine
to stop at the end point of the next block after
threading (that is, after the G33 mode is terminated)
Example
Threading at a pitch of 1.5mm
G33 Z10. F1.5;
- 23 -
4. COORDINATE VALUE AND

DIMENSION
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

Chapter 4, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists
of the following sections:
4.1 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) ...................25
- 24 -
B-64304EN-2/01
4.1
PROGRAMMING
4.COORDINATE VALUE AND

DIMENSION
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16)

The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates
(radius and angle).
The plus direction of the angle is counterclockwise of the selected
plane first axis + direction, and the minus direction is clockwise.
Both radius and angle can be commanded in either absolute or
incremental programming (G90, G91).
Format
Gxx Gyy G16;
G00 IP_ ;
:
:
G15;
Starting the polar coordinate

command (polar coordinate mode)
Polar coordinate command
Canceling the polar coordinate
command (polar coordinate mode)
G16 : Polar coordinate command

G15 : Polar coordinate command cancel
Gxx : Plane selection of the polar coordinate command
(G17, G18 or G19)
Gyy : Center selection of the polar coordinate command
(G90 or G91)
G90 specifies the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as the origin of the polar coordinate system,
from which a radius is measured.
G91 specifies the current position as the origin of the
polar coordinate system, from which a radius is
measured.
IP_ : Specifying the addresses of axes constituting the
plane selected for the polar coordinate system, and
their values
First axis : radius of polar coordinate
Second axis : angle of polar coordinate
- 25 -
4. COORDINATE VALUE AND

DIMENSION
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar
coordinate system
Specify the radius (the distance between the origin and the point) to be
programmed with an absolute programming. The origin of the
workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar
coordinate system.
When a local coordinate system (G52) is used, the origin of the local
coordinate system becomes the center of the polar coordinates.
Command position
Command position
Radius
Angle
Actual position
When the angle is specified with an

absolute command
Radius
Actual position
Angle

incremental command
- Setting the current position as the origin of the polar coordinate system
Specify the radius (the distance between the current position and the
point) to be programmed with an incremental programming. The
current position is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system.
Command position
Command position
Angle
Radius
Radius Angle
Actual position
Actual position
absolute command

incremental command
Example
Bolt hole circle
Y
- The origin of the workpiece coordinate
system is set as the origin of the polar
coordinate system.
- The XY plane is selected.
150
30
270
100mm
- 26 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
4.COORDINATE VALUE AND

DIMENSION
- Specifying angles and a radius with absolute programmings

N1 G17 G90 G16 ;
Specifying the polar coordinate command and

selecting the XY plane
Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as the origin of the polar coordinate
system
N2 G81 X100.0 Y30.0 Z-20.0 R-5.0 F200.0 ;
Specifying a distance of 100 mm and an angle
of 30 degrees
N3 Y150.0 ;
of 150 degrees
N4 Y270.0 ;
of 270 degrees
N5 G15 G80 ;
Canceling the polar coordinate command
- Specifying angles with incremental programmings and a radius with absolute

programmings
N1 G17 G90 G16;
Specifying the polar coordinate command and

selecting the XY plane
Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as the origin of the polar coordinate
system
N2 G81 X100.0 Y30.0 Z-20.0 R-5.0 F200.0 ;
of 30 degrees
N3 G91 Y120.0 ;
of +120 degrees
N4 Y120.0 ;
of +120 degrees
N5 G15 G80 ;
Canceling the polar coordinate command
Limitation
- Specifying a radius in the polar coordinate mode
In the polar coordinate mode, specify a radius for circular
interpolation or helical interpolation (G02, G03) with R.
- Axes that are not considered part of a polar coordinate command in the polar
coordinate mode
Axes specified for the following commands are not considered part of
the polar coordinate command:
Dwell (G04)
Programmable data input (G10)
Local coordinate system setting (G52)
Workpiece coordinate system setting (G92)
Machine coordinate system setting (G53)
Stored stroke check (G22)
Coordinate system rotation (G68)
Scaling (G51)
- Optional chamfering and corner R

Optional chamfering and corner R cannot be specified in polar
coordinate mode.
- 27 -
5. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING
Chapter 5, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING",
consists of the following sections:
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING .........................................29

RIGID TAPPING........................................................................74
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AND CORNER R .......................90
INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION.................................94
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)..............97
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE
(FOR GRINDING MACHINE) ................................................101
- 28 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1
5.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING
Overview
Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create
programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently-used machining
operation can be specified in a single block with a G function; without
canned cycles, normally more than one block is required. In addition,
the use of canned cycles can shorten the program to save memory.
Table 5.1 (a) lists canned cycles for drilling.
Table 5.1 (a) Canned cycles for drilling
Drilling
Operation at the
Retraction
G code
(-Z direction) bottom of a hole (+Z direction)
G73
Intermittent
feed
G74
Feed
G76
Feed
G80
G81
Feed
G82
Feed
G83
Intermittent
feed
G84
Feed
G85
G86
Feed
Feed
G87
Feed
G88
Feed
G89
Feed
Application
High-speed
Rapid traverse peck drilling
cycle
Dwell
Left-hand
Feed
Spindle CW
tapping cycle
Oriented spindle
Fine boring
Rapid traverse
stop
cycle
Cancel
Drilling cycle,
Rapid traverse spot drilling
cycle
Drilling cycle,
Dwell
Rapid traverse counter boring
cycle
Peck drilling
Rapid traverse
cycle
Dwell
Feed
Tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
Feed
Boring cycle
Spindle stop
Rapid traverse Boring cycle
Back boring
Spindle CW
Rapid traverse
cycle
Dwell
Manual
Boring cycle
Spindle stop
Dwell
Feed
Boring cycle
-
Explanation
A canned cycle for drilling consists of a sequence of six operations.
Operation 1 .........Positioning of axes X and Y (including also
another axis)
Operation 2 .........Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 .........Hole machining
Operation 4 .........Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 ...........Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 ...........Rapid traverse up to the initial point
- 29 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2
Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Operation 4
Fig. 5.1 (a)
Rapid traverse
Feed
Operation sequence of canned cycle for drilling
- Positioning plane
The positioning plane is determined by plane selection code G17, G18,
or G19.
The positioning axis is an axis other than the drilling axis.
- Drilling axis
Although canned cycles for drilling include tapping and boring cycles
as well as drilling cycles, in this chapter, only the term drilling will be
used to refer to operations implemented with canned cycles.
The drilling axis is a basic axis (X, Y, or Z) not used to define the
positioning plane, or any axis parallel to that basic axis.
The axis (basic axis or parallel axis) used as the drilling axis is
determined according to the axis address for the drilling axis specified
in the same block as G codes G73 to G89.
If no axis address is specified for the drilling axis, the basic axis is
assumed to be the drilling axis.
Table 5.1 (b)
G code
G17
G18
G19
Positioning plane and drilling axis

Positioning plane
Drilling axis
Xp-Yp plane
Zp-Xp plane
Yp-Zp plane
Xp: X axis or an axis parallel to the X axis

Yp: Y axis or an axis parallel to the Y axis
Zp: Z axis or an axis parallel to the Z axis
- 30 -
Zp
Yp
Xp
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Example
Assume that the U, V and W axes be parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes
respectively. This condition is specified by parameter No. 1022.
G17 G81 Z_ _ : The Z axis is used for drilling.
G17 G81 W_ _ : The W axis is used for drilling.
G18 G81 Y_ _ : The Y axis is used for drilling.
G18 G81 V_ _ : The V axis is used for drilling.
G19 G81 X_ _ : The X axis is used for drilling.
G19 G81 U_ _ : The U axis is used for drilling.
G17 to G19 may be specified in a block in which any of G73 to
G89 is not specified.
CAUTION
Switch the drilling axis after canceling a canned
cycle for drilling.
NOTE
A parameter FXY (No. 5101 #0) can be set to the Z
axis always used as the drilling axis. When
FXY=0, the Z axis is always the drilling axis.
- Travel distance along the drilling axis G90/G91
The travel distance along the drilling axis varies for G90 and G91 as
follows:
G90 (Absolute programming)
G91 (Incremental programming)
Point R
Z=0
Point Z
Fig. 5.1 (b)
Point R
Z
Point Z
Absolute programming and incremental programming
- Drilling mode
G73, G74, G76, and G81 to G89 are modal G codes and remain in
effect until canceled. When in effect, the current state is the drilling
mode.
Once drilling data is specified in the drilling mode, the data is retained
until modified or canceled.
Specify all necessary drilling data at the beginning of canned cycles;
when canned cycles are being performed, specify data modifications
only.
- 31 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Return point level G98/G99

When the tool reaches the bottom of a hole, the tool may be returned
to point R or to the initial level. These operations are specified with
G98 and G99. The following illustrates how the tool moves when
G98 or G99 is specified. Generally, G99 is used for the first drilling
operation and G98 is used for the last drilling operation.
The initial level does not change even when drilling is performed in
the G99 mode.
G98 (Return to initial level)
G99 (Return to point R level)
Initial level
Point R level
Fig. 5.1 (c)
Initial level and point R level
- Repeat
To repeat drilling for equally-spaced holes, specify the number of
repeats in K_.
K is effective only within the block where it is specified.
Specify the first hole position in incremental programming (G91).
If it is specified in absolute programming (G90), drilling is repeated at
the same position.
Number of repeats K
The maximum command value = 9999
If K0 is specified, drilling data is stored, but drilling is not performed.
NOTE
For K, specify an integer of 0 or 1 to 9999.
- Single block
If a drilling cycle is performed in a single block, the control unit stops
at each of the end points of operations 1, 2, and 6 in Figure 5.1 (a).
This means that three starts are made to make a single hole. At the end
points of operations 1 and 2, the feed hold lamp turns on and the
control unit stops. If the repetitive count is not exhausted at the end
point of operation 6, the control unit stops in the feed hold mode, and
otherwise, stops in the single block stop mode. Note that G87 does not
cause a stop at point R in G87. G88 causes a stop at point Z after a
dwell.
- 32 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Cancel
To cancel a canned cycle, use G80 or a group 01 G code.
Group 01 G codes
G00 : Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 : Linear interpolation
G02 : Circular interpolation or helical interpolation (CW)
G03 : Circular interpolation or helical interpolation (CCW)
G60 : Single directional positioning (if bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No.
5431 is "1")
- Symbols in figures+
Subsequent sections explain the individual canned cycles. Figures in
these Explanation use the following symbols:
OSS
Positioning (rapid traverse G00)

Cutting feed (linear interpolation G01)
Manual feed
Oriented spindle stop
(The spindle stops at a fixed rotation position)
Shift (rapid traverse G00)
Dwell
- 33 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.1
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
High-Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)

This cycle performs high-speed peck drilling.
It performs
intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips
from the hole.
Format
G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
Q_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole
The distance from the initial level to point R level
Depth of cut for each cutting feed
Cutting feedrate
Number of repeats (if required)
G73 (G98)
G73 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
The high-speed peck drilling cycle performs intermittent feeding
along the Z-axis. When this cycle is used, chips can be removed
from the hole easily, and a smaller value can be set for retraction.
This allows, drilling to be performed efficiently. Set the clearance, d,
in parameter 5114.
The tool is retracted in rapid traverse.
- Spindle rotation
Before specifying G73, rotate the spindle using an auxiliary function
(M code).
- 34 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
- Auxiliary function
When the G73 code and an M code are specified in the same block,
the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning operation.
When K is used to specify the number of repeats, the M code is
executed for the first hole only; for the second and subsequent holes,
the M code is not executed.
- Tool length compensation

When a tool length compensation (G43, G44, or G49) is specified in
the canned cycle for drilling, the offset is applied after the time of
positioning to point R.
Limitation
- Axis switching
Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle for drilling
must be canceled.
- Drilling
In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling
is not performed.
-Q
Specify Q in blocks that perform drilling. If they are specified in a
block that does not perform drilling, they cannot be stored as modal
data.
- Cancel
Do not specify a G code of the 01 group (G00 to G03) and G73 in a
single block. Otherwise, G73 will be canceled.
- Tool offset
In the canned cycle mode for drilling, tool offsets are ignored.
Example
M3 S2000 ;
Cause the spindle to start rotating.
G90 G99 G73 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. Q15. F120. ;
Position, drill hole 1, then return to point R.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
Position, drill hole 6, then return to the initial level.
G80 G28 G91 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Return to the reference position
M5 ;
Cause the spindle to stop rotating.
- 35 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.2
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (G74)

This cycle performs left-handed tapping. In the left-handed tapping
cycle, when the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle
rotates clockwise.
Format
G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
P_
Q_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Dwell time
Depth of cut for each cutting feed (bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 = "1")
: Cutting feedrate
: Number of repeats (if required)
G74 (G98)
G74 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Spindle
CCW
Point Z
Spindle CW
Point R
Spindle
CCW
P
Point R level
Point Z
Spindle CW
Explanation
- Operations
Tapping is performed by turning the spindle counterclockwise.
When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is rotated
clockwise for retraction. This creates a reverse thread.
CAUTION
Feedrate overrides are ignored during left-handed
tapping. A feed hold does not stop the machine
until the return operation is completed.
- 36 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
- Spindle rotation
Before specifying G74, use an auxiliary function (M code) to rotate
the spindle counterclockwise.
If drilling is continuously performed with a small value specified for
the distance between the hole position and point R level or between
the initial level and point R level, the normal spindle speed may not be
reached at the start of hole cutting operation. In this case, insert a
dwell before each drilling operation with G04 to delay the operation,
without specifying the number of repeats for K. For some machines,
the above note may not be considered. Refer to the manual provided
- Q command
After setting bit 6 (PCT) of parameter No. 5104 to 1, add address Q to
the ordinary tapping cycle command format and specify the depth of
cut for each tapping.
In the peck tapping cycle, the tool is retracted to point R for each
tapping. In the high-speed peck tapping cycle, the tool is retracted
by the retraction distance specified for parameter No. 5213 in advance.
Which operation is to be performed can be selected by setting bit 5
(PCP) of parameter No. 5200.
Operation
First, ordinary tapping cycle operation is explained as basic operation.
Before specifying a tapping cycle, rotate the spindle using an auxiliary
function.
1. When a command to position the tool to a hole position,
positioning is performed.
2. When point R is specified, positioning to point R is performed.
3. Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole in cutting feed.
4. When a dwell time (P) is specified, the tool dwells.
5. Auxiliary function M05 (spindle stop) is output and the machine
enters the FIN wait state.
6. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M04 (reverse spindle
rotation) is output and the machine enters the FIN wait state.
7. When FIN is returned, the tap is removed until point R is reached
in cutting feed.
8. When a dwell time (P) is specified, the tool dwells.
9. Auxiliary function M05 (spindle stop) is output and the machine
10. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M03 (forward spindle
rotation) is output, and the machine enters the FIN wait state.
11. When FIN is returned, the tool returns to the initial point in rapid
traverse when return to the initial level is specified.
When the repetitive count is specified, operation is repeated from step
1.
- 37 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Tapping
<1> Positioning to a hole
<2> Positioning to point R
<1> Positioning to the next hole

<11> Positioning to the initial point
Point R level
<8> Dwell
<3> Tapping to the bottom of the hole
<9> Output of auxiliary function M05

<7> Return to point R
<4> Dwell
Hole bottom level

Workpiece
Peck tapping cycle

When bit 6 (PCT) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1 and bit 5 (PCP) of
parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, the peck tapping cycle is used.
Step 3 of the tapping cycle operation described above changes as
follows:
3-1. The tool cuts the workpiece by the depth of cut q specified by
address Q.
3-2. Auxiliary function M05 (spindle stop) is output, and the machine
3-3. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M04 (reverse spindle
3-4. When FIN is returned, the tool is retracted to point R in cutting
feed.
3-6. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M03 (forward spindle
3-7. When FIN is returned, the tool moves to the position the
clearance d (parameter No. 5213) apart from the previous cutting
point in cutting feed (approach).
3-1. The tool cuts the workpiece by the clearance d (parameter No.
5213) + depth of cut q (specified by address Q).
Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole by repeating the above
steps.
When a dwell time (P) is specified, the tool dwells only when it
reaches at the bottom of the hole and reaches point R last.
- 38 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
q:
Depth of cut
d:
Clearance

<7> Approach
<1> Tapping
Point R level
<4> Retraction
d
<1> Tapping
<4> Retraction <7> Approach
q
d
<1> Tapping

Repeated until the bottom of the hole is reached.
Workpiece
Hole bottom level
High-speed peck tapping cycle

When bit 6 (PCT) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1 and bit 5 (PCP) of
parameter No. 5200 is set to 0, the high-speed peck tapping cycle is
used.
Step 3 of the tapping cycle operation described above changes as
follows:
3-1. The tool cuts the workpiece by the depth of cut q specified by
address Q.
3-3. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M04 (reverse spindle
3-4. When FIN is returned, the tool is retracted by the retraction
distance d specified by parameter No. 5213 in cutting feed.
3-6. When FIN is returned, auxiliary function M03 (forward spindle
3-1. When FIN is returned, the tool cuts the workpiece by the
retraction distance d (parameter No. 5213) + depth of cut q
(specified by address Q).
Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole by repeating the above
steps.
- 39 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
When a dwell time (P) is specified, the tool dwells only when it
reaches at the bottom of the hole and reaches point R.
q:
Depth of cut
d:
Retraction distance
Point R level
<1> Tapping
<4> Retraction
<1> Tapping
<4> Retraction
<1> Tapping

Repeated until the bottom of the hole is reached.
Workpiece
Hole bottom level
Notes
1.
The depth of cut specified by address Q is stored as a modal

value until the canned cycle mode is canceled.
In both examples 1 and 2 below, address Q is not specified in the
N20 block, but the peck tapping cycle is performed because the
value specified by address Q is valid as a modal value. If this
operation is not suitable, specify G80 to cancel the canned cycle
mode as shown in N15 in example 3 or specify Q0 in the tapping
block as shown in N20 in example 4.
Example 1
N10 G84 X100. Y150. Z-100. Q20. ;
N20 X150. Y200 ; The peck tapping cycle is also performed
in this block.
N30 G80 ;
Example 2
N10 G83 X100. Y150. Z-100. Q20. ;
N20 G84 Z-100. ; The peck tapping cycle is also performed in
this block.
N30 G80 ;
- 40 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Example 3
N10 G83 X100. Y150. Z-100. Q20. ;
N15 G80 ; The canned cycle mode is canceled.
N20 G84 Z-100. ;
N30 G80 ;
Example 4
N10 G83 X100. Y150. Z-100. Q20. ;
N20 G84 Z-100. Q0 ; Q0 is added.
N30 G80 ;
2.
The unit for the reference axis that is set by parameter No. 1031,
not the unit for the drilling axis is used as the unit of Q. Any
sign is ignored.
When the G74 command and an M code are specified in the same
block, the M code is executed at the time of the first positioning
operation. When K is used to specify the number of repeats, the M
code is executed for the first hole only; for the second and subsequent
holes, the M code is not executed.

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-P
Specify P in blocks that perform drilling. If it is specified in a block
that does not perform drilling, it cannot be stored as modal data.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
- 41 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
M4 S100 ;
G90 G99 G74 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. F120. ;
Position, tapping hole 1, then return to point R.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
Position, tapping hole 6, then return to the initial
level.
M5 ;
- 42 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.3
PROGRAMMING
Fine Boring Cycle (G76)

The fine boring cycle bores a hole precisely. When the bottom of the
hole has been reached, the spindle stops, and the tool is moved away
from the machined surface of the workpiece and retracted.
Format
G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
Q_
P_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Shift amount at the bottom of a hole
Dwell time at the bottom of a hole
Cutting feedrate
G76 (G98)
G76 (G99)
Spindle CW
Initial level
Spindle orientation
Tool
Spindle CW
Point R
P
OSS
Point R level
Point R
Point Z
P
OSS
Point Z
Shift amount q
Explanation
- Operations
When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is stopped
at the fixed rotation position, and the tool is moved in the direction
opposite to the tool nose and retracted. This ensures that the
machined surface is not damaged and enables precise and efficient
boring to be performed.
- Spindle rotation
Before specifying G76, use a Auxiliary function (M code) to rotate the
spindle.
- 43 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any additional axes,
drilling is not performed.
- P/Q
Be sure to specify a positive value in Q. If Q is specified with a
negative value, the sign is ignored. Set the direction of shift in the
parameter (No.5148).
Specify P and Q in a block that performs drilling. If they are
specified in a block that does not perform drilling, they are not stored
as modal data.
CAUTION
Q (shift at the bottom of a hole) is a modal value
retained within canned cycles for drilling. It must
be specified carefully because it is also used as the
depth of cut for G73 and G83.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S500 ;
G90 G99 G76 X300. Y-250.
Position, bore hole 1, then return to point R.
Z-150. R-120. Q5.
Orient at the bottom of the hole, then shift by 5
mm.
P1000 F120. ;
Stop at the bottom of the hole for 1 s.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
M5 ;
- 44 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.4
PROGRAMMING
Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling (G81)

This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to
the bottom of the hole. The tool is then retracted from the bottom of
the hole in rapid traverse.
Format
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feedrate
G81 (G98)
G81 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, rapid traverse is performed
to point R.
Drilling is performed from point R to point Z.
The tool is then retracted in rapid traverse.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
code is performed for the first hole only; for the second and
subsequent holes, the M code is not executed.

- 45 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S2000 ;
G90 G99 G81 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
M5 ;
- 46 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.5
PROGRAMMING
Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle (G82)

This cycle is used for normal drilling.
Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. At the bottom, a
dwell is performed, then the tool is retracted in rapid traverse.
This cycle is used to drill holes more accurately with respect to depth.
Format
G82 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
P_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feed rate
G82 (G98)
G82 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
to point R.
Drilling is then performed from point R to point Z.
When the bottom of the hole has been reached, a dwell is performed.
The tool is then retracted in rapid traverse.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- 47 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-P
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S2000 ;
G90 G99 G82 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. P1000 F120. ;
Position, drill hole 1, and dwell for 1 s at the
bottom of the hole, then return to point R.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
M5 ;
- 48 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.6
PROGRAMMING
Peck Drilling Cycle (G83)

This cycle performs peck drilling.
It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while
removing shavings from the hole.
Format
G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
Q_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Depth of cut for each cutting feed
Cutting feedrate
G83 (G98)
G83 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
q
d
q
d
q
Point Z
Point R level
q
d
q
q
d
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
Q represents the depth of cut for each cutting feed. It must always be
specified as an incremental value.
In the second and subsequent cutting feeds, rapid traverse is
performed up to a d point just before where the last drilling ended, and
cutting feed is performed again. d is set in parameter (No.5115).
Be sure to specify a positive value in Q. Negative values are
ignored.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- 49 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-Q
Specify Q in blocks that perform drilling. If they are specified in a
block that does not perform drilling, they cannot be stored as modal
data.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S2000 ;
G90 G99 G83 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. Q15. F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
M5 ;
- 50 -
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.7
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Small-Hole Peck Drilling Cycle (G83)

An arbor with the overload torque detection function is used to retract
the tool when the overload torque detection signal (skip signal) is
detected during drilling. Drilling is resumed after the spindle speed
and cutting feedrate are changed. These steps are repeated in this peck
drilling cycle.
The mode for the smallhole peck drilling cycle is selected when the
M code in parameter 5163 is specified. The cycle can be started by
specifying G83 in this mode. This mode is canceled when G80 is
specified or when a reset occurs.
NOTE
When using the small-hole peck drilling cycle, set
bit 4 (SPK) of parameter No. 8132 to "1".
- 51 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Format
G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
Q_
F_
I_
K_
P_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Distance from point R to the bottom of the hole
Distance from the initial level to point R
Depth of each cut
Cutting feedrate
Forward or backward traveling speed (same format
as F above)
(If this is omitted, the values in parameters
No.5172 and No.5173 are assumed as defaults.)
: Number of times the operation is repeated (if
required)
: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
(If this is omitted, P0 is assumed as the default.)
G83 (G98)
G83 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R level
Point R
Overload torque
Point Z
Dwell
q:
Overload torque
Point Z
Dwell
Initial clearance when the tool is retracted to point R and the clearance from the
bottom of the hole in the second or subsequent drilling (parameter 5174)
Depth of each cut
Path along which the tool travels at the rapid traverse rate
Path along which the tool travels at the programmed cutting
feedrate
Path along which the tool travels at the forward or backward rate during the
) cycle specified with parameters
- 52 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Explanations
- Component operations of the cycle
*
*
*
Repeated until
point Z is reached
*
*
X- and Y-axis positioning

Positioning at point R along the Z-axis
Cutting along the Z-axis (first time, depth of cut Q, incremental)
Retracting
(bottom of hole minimum clearance , incremental)
Retraction
(bottom of hole + to point R, absolute)
Forwarding
(point R to point with hole bottom + clearance , absolute)
Cutting
(second and subsequent times, cut of depth Q + , incremental)
Dwell
Return to point R along the Z-axis (or initial point) = end of
cycle
Acceleration/deceleration during advancing and retraction is

controlled according to the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time
constant.
When retraction is performed, the position is checked at point R.
- Specifying an M code
When the M code in parameter 5163 is specified, the system enters the
mode for the smallhole peck drilling cycle.
This M code does not wait for FIN. Care must be taken when this M
code is specified with another M code in the same block.
(Example) M03 M
; Waits for FIN.
M
M03 ; Does not wait for FIN.
- Specifying a G code
When G83 is specified in the mode for the small-hole peck drilling
cycle, the cycle is started.
This continuousstate G code remains unchanged until another canned
cycle is specified or until the G code for canceling the canned cycle is
specified. This eliminates the need for specifying drilling data in each
block when identical drilling is repeated.
- Signal indicating that the cycle is in progress

In this cycle, the signal indicating that the smallhole peck drilling
cycle is in progress is output after the tool is positioned at the hole
position along the axes not used for drilling. Signal output continues
during positioning to point R along the drilling axis and terminates
upon a return to point R or the initial level. For details, refer to the
manual of the machine tool builder.
- 53 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Overload torque detection signal

A skip signal is used as the overload torque detection signal. The skip
signal is effective while the tool is advancing or drilling and the tool
tip is between points R and Z. (The signal causes a retraction). For
details, refer to the manual of the machine tool builder.
NOTE
When receiving overload torque detect signal while the
tool is advancing, the tool will be retracted (clearance
and to the point R), then advanced to the same target
point as previous advancing.
- Changing the drilling conditions

In a single G83 cycle, drilling conditions are changed for each drilling
operation (advance drilling retraction). Bits 1 and 2 of
parameter OLS, NOL No. 5160 can be specified to suppress the
change in drilling conditions.
1
Changing the cutting feedrate

The cutting feedrate programmed with the F code is changed for
each of the second and subsequent drilling operations. In
parameters No.5166 and No.5167, specify the respective rates of
change applied when the skip signal is detected and when it is
not detected in the previous drilling operation.
Cutting feedrate = F
<First drilling> =1.0

<Second or subsequent drilling> =100, where is the rate
of change for each drilling operation
When the skip signal is detected during the previous drilling
operation: =b1% (parameter No.5166)
When the skip signal is not detected during the previous drilling
operation: =b2% (parameter No.5167)
If the rate of change in cutting feedrate becomes smaller than the
rate specified in parameter 5168, the cutting feedrate is not
changed.
The cutting feedrate can be increased up to the maximum cutting
feedrate.
2
Changing the spindle speed

The spindle speed programmed with the S code is changed for
each of the second and subsequent advances. In parameters 5164
and 5165, specify the rates of change applied when the skip
signal is detected and when it is not detected in the previous
drilling operation.
Spindle speed = S
- 54 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
<First drilling> =1.0

<Second or subsequent drilling> =100, where is the rate
of change for each drilling operation
When the skip signal is detected during the previous drilling
operation: =d1% (parameter No.5164)
When the skip signal is not detected during the previous drilling
operation: =d2% (parameter No.5165)
When the cutting feedrate reaches the minimum rate, the spindle
speed is not changed. The spindle speed can be increased up to a
value corresponding to the maximum value of S analog data.
- Advance and retraction

Advancing and retraction of the tool are not executed in the same
manner as rapid-traverse positioning. Like cutting feed, the two
operations are carried out as interpolated operations. Note that the tool
life management function excludes advancing and retraction from the
calculation of the tool life.
- Specifying address I
The forward or backward traveling speed can be specified with
address I in the same format as address F, as shown below:
G83 I1000 ; (without decimal point)
G83 I1000. ; (with decimal point)
Both commands indicate a speed of 1000 mm/min.
Address I specified with G83 in the continuous-state mode continues
to be valid until G80 is specified or until a reset occurs.
NOTE
If address I is not specified and parameter No.5172 (for
backward) or No.5173 (for forward) is set to 0, the
forward or backward travel speed is same as the cutting
feedrate specified by F.
- Functions that can be specified

In this canned cycle mode, the following functions can be specified:
Hole position on the X-axis, Y-axis, and additional axis
Operation and branch by custom macro
Subprogram (hole position group, etc.) calling
Switching between absolute and incremental modes
Coordinate system rotation
Scaling (This command will not affect depth of cut Q or small

clearance .)
Dry run
Feed hold
- Single block
When single-block operation is enabled, drilling is stopped after each
retraction. Also, a single block stop is performed by setting parameter
SBC (No.5105 bit 0)
- 55 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Feedrate override
The feedrate override function works during cutting, retraction, and
advancing in the cycle.
- Custom macro interface

The number of retractions made during cutting and the number of
retractions made in response to the overload signal received during
cutting can be output to custom macro common variables (#100 to
#149) specified in parameters No.5170 and No.5171. Parameters
No.5170 and No.5171 can specify variable numbers within the range
of #100 to #149.
Parameter No.5170: Specifies the number of the common variable to
which the number of retractions made during
cutting is output.
Parameter No.5171: Specifies the number of the common variable to
which the number of retractions made in
response to the overload signal received during
cutting is output.
NOTE
The numbers of retraction output to common
variables are cleared by G83 while small-hole peck
drilling cycle mode.
Limitation
- Subprogram call
In the canned cycle mode, specify the subprogram call command
M98P_ in an independent block.
Example
M03 S_ ; Cause the spindle to start rotating.
M
;
Specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode.
G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ;
Specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle.
X_ Y_ ; Drills at another position.
:
:
G80 ;
Cancels the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode.
- 56 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.8
PROGRAMMING
Tapping Cycle (G84)

This cycle performs tapping.
In this tapping cycle, when the bottom of the hole has been reached,
the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction.
Format
G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
P_
Q_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Dwell time
Depth of cut for each cutting feed (bit 6 (PCT) of
parameter No. 5104 = "1")
: Cutting feedrate
: Number of repents (if required)
G84 (G98)
G84 (G99)
Initial level
Spindle
CW
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Spindle CCW
Spindle
CW
P
Point R level
Point Z
Spindle CCW
Explanation
- Operations
Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise. When the
bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is rotated in the
reverse direction for retraction. This operation creates threads.
CAUTION
Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping. A
feed hold does not stop the machine until the return
operation is completed.
- 57 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- Q command
See Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (G74) above.
operation. When the K is used to specify number of repeats, the M

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-P
- Cancel
- 58 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Example
M3 S100 ;
G90 G99 G84 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. P300 F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
Position, drill hole 6, then return to the initial
level.
M5 ;
- 59 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.9
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Boring Cycle (G85)

This cycle is used to bore a hole.
Format
G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feed rate
G85 (G98)
G85 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
After positioning along the X- and Y- axes, rapid traverse is
performed to point R.
When point Z has been reached, cutting feed is performed to return to
point R.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.

- 60 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S100 ;
G90 G99 G85 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
Position, drill hole 6, then return to the
initial level.
M5 ;
- 61 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.10
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Boring Cycle (G86)

Format
G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feed rate
G86 (G98)
G86 (G99)
Spindle CW
Initial level
Spindle CW
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Spindle stop
Point R level
Point Z
Spindle stop
Explanation
- Operations
to point R.
When the spindle is stopped at the bottom of the hole, the tool is
retracted in rapid traverse.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- 62 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S2000 ;
G90 G99 G86 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
level.
M5 ;
- 63 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.11
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Back Boring Cycle (G87)

This cycle performs accurate boring.
Format
G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
Q_
P_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

The distance from the initial level to point R
Shift amount at the bottom of a hole
Cutting feed rate
G87 (G98)
Spindle orientation
Tool
G87 (G99)
q
OSS
Spindle CW
Initial
level
Not used
OSS
Point Z
P
Spindle CW
Shift amount q
Point R
Explanation
After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, the spindle is stopped at
the fixed rotation position. The tool is moved in the direction
opposite to the tool nose, positioning (rapid traverse) is performed to
the bottom of the hole (point R).
The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool nose and the spindle
is rotated clockwise. Boring is performed in the positive direction
along the Z-axis until point Z is reached.
At point Z, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position again,
the tool is shifted in the direction opposite to the tool nose, then the
tool is returned to the initial level. The tool is then shifted in the
direction of the tool nose and the spindle is rotated clockwise to
proceed to the next block operation.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- 64 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any additional axes,
drilling is not performed.
- P/Q
Be sure to specify a positive value in Q. If Q is specified with a
negative value, the sign is ignored. Set the direction of shift in the
parameter (No. 5148).
as modal data.
CAUTION
Q (shift at the bottom of a hole) is a modal value
retained in canned cycles for drilling. It must be
specified carefully because it is also used as the
depth of cut for G73 and G83.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
- 65 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
M3 S500 ;
G90 G87 X300. Y-250.
Z-150. R-120. Q5.
P1000 F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
G80 G28 G91 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
M5 ;
- 66 -

Position, bore hole 1.
Orient at the initial level, then shift by 5 mm.
Stop at point Z for 1 s.
Position, drill hole 2.
Position, drill hole 6
Return to the reference position
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.12
PROGRAMMING
Boring Cycle (G88)

Format
G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
P_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feed rate
G88 (G98)
G88 (G99)
Spindle CW
Initial level
Spindle CW
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
P
Spindle stop
after dwell
Spindle stop
after dwell
Explanation
- Operations
to point R. Boring is performed from point R to point Z.
When boring is completed, a dwell is performed at the bottom of the
hole, then the spindle is stopped and enters the hold state. At this
time, you can switch to the manual mode and move the tool manually.
Any manual operations are available; it is desirable to finally retract
the tool from the hole for safety, though.
At the restart of machining in the DNC operation or memory mode,
the tool returns to the initial level or point R level according to G98 or
G99 and the spindle rotates clockwise. Then, operation is restarted
according to the programmed commands in the next block.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.
- 67 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-P
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S2000 ;
G90 G99 G88 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-100. P1000 F120. ;
Position, drill hole 1, return to point R then stop
at the bottom of the hole for 1 s.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
level.
M5 ;
- 68 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.13
PROGRAMMING
Boring Cycle (G89)

Format
G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_
Z_
R_
P_
F_
K_
:
:
:
:
:
:
Hole position data

Cutting feed rate
G89 (G98)
G89 (G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Point Z
Point R level
Point Z
Explanation
- Operations
This cycle is almost the same as G85. The difference is that this
cycle performs a dwell at the bottom of the hole.
- Spindle rotation
the spindle.

- 69 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Limitation
- Axis switching
must be canceled.
- Drilling
is not performed.
-P
- Cancel
- Tool offset
Example
M3 S100 ;
G90 G99 G89 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. P1000 F120. ;
Position, drill hole 1, return to point R then stop
at the bottom of the hole for 1 s.
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
level.
M5 ;
- 70 -
B-64304EN-2/01
5.1.14
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Canned Cycle Cancel for Drilling (G80)

G80 cancels canned cycles for drilling.
Format
G80 ;
Explanation
All canned cycles for drilling are canceled to perform normal
operation. Point R and point Z are cleared.
Other drilling data is also canceled (cleared).
Example
M3 S100 ;
G90 G99 G88 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. F120. ;
Y-550. ;
Y-750. ;
X1000. ;
Y-550. ;
G98 Y-750. ;
level.
G80 G28 G91 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Return to the reference position, canned cycle
cancel
M5 ;
- 71 -
PROGRAMMING
5.1.15
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example for Using Canned Cycles for Drilling
Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.11, +190.0 is set in offset No.15, and +150.0 is set in offset No.31
Program example
;
N001
G92 X0 Y0 Z0;
N002
G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6;
N003
G43 Z0 H11;
N004
S30 M3;
N005
G99 G81 X400.0 Y-350.0 Z-153.0 R-97.0 F120;
N006
Y-550.0;
N007
G98 Y-750.0;
N008
G99 X1200.0;
N009
Y-550.0;
N010
G98 Y-350.0;
N011
G00 X0 Y0 M5;
N012
G49 Z250.0 T15 M6;
N013
G43 Z0 H15;
N014
S20 M3;
N015
G99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0 Z-130.0 R-97.0 P300 F70;
N016
G98 Y-650.0;
N017
G99 X1050.0;
N018
G98 Y-450.0;
N019
G00 X0 Y0 M5;
N020
G49 Z250.0 T31 M6;
N021
G43 Z0 H31;
N022
S10 M3;
N023
G85 G99 X800.0 Y-350.0 Z-153.0 R47.0 F50;
N024
G91 Y-200.0 K2;
N025
G28 X0 Y0 M5;
N026
G49 Z0;
N027
M0;
- 72 -
Coordinate setting at reference position

Tool change
Initial level, tool length compensation
Spindle start
Positioning, then #1 drilling
Positioning, then #2 drilling and point R level return
Positioning, then #3 drilling and initial level return
Positioning, then #6 drilling and initial level return
Reference position return, spindle stop
Tool length compensation cancel, tool change
Spindle start
Positioning, then #7 drilling, point R level return
Positioning, then #8 drilling, initial level return
Positioning, then #10 drilling, initial level return
Tool length compensation cancel, tool change
Spindle start
Positioning, then #12, 13 drilling, point R level return
Program stop
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Program using tool length offset and canned cycles

Reference position
350
#1
100
#10
#7 200
100
#12
#2
100
#8
#6
#11
#5
#9
200
100
#13
#3
#4
X
400
150
#1 to 6
#7 to 10
#11 to 13
Z
250
250
150
Drilling of a 10 mm diameter hole

Drilling of a 20 mm diameter hole
Boring of a 95 mm diameter hole (depth 50 mm)
Retract position
250
Initial level
X
50
50
30
20
T 11
200
Fig. 5.1.15 (a)
T 15
190
T 31
150
Example for using canned cycles for drilling
- 73 -
PROGRAMMING
5.2
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
RIGID TAPPING
The tapping cycle (G84) and left-handed tapping cycle (G74) may be
performed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode.
In standard mode, the spindle is rotated and stopped along with a
movement along the tapping axis using auxiliary functions M03
(rotating the spindle clockwise), M04 (rotating the spindle
counterclockwise), and M05 (stopping the spindle) to perform
tapping.
In rigid mode, tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor
as if it were a servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping
axis and spindle.
When tapping is performed in rigid mode, the spindle rotates one turn
every time a certain feed (thread lead) which takes place along the
tapping axis. This operation does not vary even during acceleration
or deceleration.
Rigid mode eliminates the need to use a floating tap required in the
standard tapping mode, thus allowing faster and more precise tapping.
- 74 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.2.1
PROGRAMMING
Rigid Tapping (G84)

When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a
servo motor, a tapping cycle can be speed up.
Format
G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;
X_ Y_ : Hole position data
Z_
: The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole and the
position of the bottom of the hole
R_
: The distance from the initial level to point R level
P_
: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole and at point R when a return
is made
F_
: Cutting feedrate
K_
G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ ;
(Series 10/11 format)
L_

G84 (G98)
G84 (G99)
Spindle stop
Spindle stop
Initial level
Operation 1
Operation 6
Spindle
P
stop
Point R level
Operation 2
Spindle CW
Point R
Operation 3
Spindle CW
P
Point R
Point R level
Operation 5
P
Spindle stop
Spindle stop
Point Z
Operation 4
Spindle CCW
P
Spindle stop
Point Z
Spindle CCW
Explanation
to point R.
Tapping is performed from point R to point Z. When tapping is
completed, the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed. The
spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction, the tool is retracted to
point R, then the spindle is stopped. Rapid traverse to initial level is
then performed.
While tapping is being performed, the feedrate override and spindle
override are assumed to be 100%. Feedrate override can be enabled
by setting, however.
- 75 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Rigid mode
Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods:
Specify M29 S***** before a tapping command.
Specify M29 S***** in a block which contains a tapping command.
Specify G84 for rigid tapping (parameter G84 No. 5200 #0 set to 1).
- Thread lead
In feed-per-minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the
expression, feedrate spindle speed. In feed-per-revolution mode,
the thread lead equals the feedrate speed.

If a tool length compensation (G43, G44, or G49) is specified in the
canned cycle, the offset is applied at the time of positioning to point
R.
- Series 10/11 format command

Rigid tapping can be performed using Series 10/11 format commands.
The rigid tapping sequence (including data transfer to and from the
PMC), Limitation, and the like are the same as described in this
chapter.
- Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

Linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration can be applied.
- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is invalid.
- Override
Various types of override functions are invalid. The following
override functions can be enabled by setting corresponding
parameters:
Extraction override
Override signal
See Override during Rigid Tapping below for details.
- Dry run
Dry run can be executed also in G84 (G74). When dry run is
executed at the feedrate for the drilling axis in G84 (G74), tapping is
performed according to the feedrate. Note that the spindle speed
becomes faster at a higher dry run feedrate.
- Machine lock
Machine lock can be executed also in G84 (G74).
When G84 (G74) is executed in the machine lock state, the tool does
not move along the drilling axis. Therefore, the spindle does not also
rotate.
- 76 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
- Reset
When a reset is performed during rigid tapping, the rigid tapping
mode is canceled and the spindle motor enters the normal mode.
Note that the G84 (G74) mode is not canceled in this case when bit 6
(CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set.
- Interlock
Interlock can also be applied in G84 (G74).
- Feed hold and single block

When bit 6 (FHD) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0, feed hold and
single block are invalid in the G84 (G74) mode. When this bit is set
to 1, they are valid.
- Backlash compensation
In the rigid tapping mode, backlash compensation is applied to
compensate the lost motion when the spindle rotates clockwise or
counterclockwise. Set the amount of backlash in parameters Nos.
5321 to 5324.
Along the drilling axis, backlash compensation has been applied.
Limitation
- Axis switching
Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be
canceled. If the drilling axis is changed in rigid mode, alarm PS0206
is issued.
- S command
If a speed higher than the maximum speed for the gear being used
is specified, alarm PS0200 is issued.
When the rigid tapping canned cycle is cancelled, the S command
used for rigid tapping is cleared to S0.
- Distribution amount for the spindle

The maximum distribution amount is as follows (displayed on
diagnosis display No. 451):
For a serial spindle: 32,767 pulses per 8 ms

This amount is changed according to the gear ratio setting for the
position coder or rigid tapping command. If a setting is made to
exceed the upper limit, alarm PS0202 is issued.
- F command
If a value exceeding the upper limit of cutting feedrate is specified,
alarm PS0011 is issued.
- 77 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Unit of F command
Metric input
G94
1 mm/min
G95
0.01 mm/rev
Inch input
Remarks
Decimal point programming

allowed
Decimal point programming
0.0001 inch/rev
allowed
0.01 inch/min
- M29
If an S command and axis movement are specified between M29 and
G84, alarm PS0203 is issued. If M29 is specified in a tapping cycle,
-P
Specify P in a block that performs drilling. If P is specified in a
non-drilling block, it is not stored as modal data.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
In the canned cycle mode, tool offsets are ignored.
- Program restart
A program cannot be restarted during rigid tapping.
- Subprogram call
Example
Z-axis feedrate 1000 mm/min
Spindle speed
1000 min-1
Thread lead
1.0 mm
<Programming of feed per minute>
G94;
G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z-100.0 R-20.0 F1000 ;
Specify a feed-per-minute command.

Positioning
Rigid mode specification
Rigid tapping
<Programming of feed per revolution>

G95 ;
G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z-100.0 R-20.0 F1.0 ;
- 78 -
Specify a feed-per-revolution command.

Positioning
Rigid tapping
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.2.2
PROGRAMMING
Left-Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74)

When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a
servo motor, tapping cycles can be speed up.
Format
G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;
Z_
: The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole and the
position of the bottom of the hole
R_
P_
: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole and at point R when return is
made.
F_
: Cutting feedrate
K_
G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ ;
(Series 10/11 format)
L_

G74 (G98)
G74 (G99)
Spindle stop
Spindle stop
Initial level
Operation 1
Operation 2
Spindle CCW
Operation 6
Spindle
P
stop
Point R level
Point R
P
Point R
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
P
Spindle stop
Spindle stop
Spindle CCW
Point Z
Operation 4
Spindle CW
P
Spindle stop
Point Z
Spindle CW
Explanation
to point R.
Tapping is performed from point R to point Z. When tapping is
completed, the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed. The
spindle is then rotated in the normal direction, the tool is retracted to
point R, then the spindle is stopped. Rapid traverse to initial level is
then performed.
While tapping is being performed, the feedrate override and spindle
override are assumed to be 100%. Feedrate override can be enabled
by setting, however.
- 79 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Rigid mode
Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods:
Specify M29 S***** before a tapping command.
Specify M29 S***** in a block which contains a tapping

command.
Specify G74 for rigid tapping. (parameter G84 (No. 5200#0) set
to1).
- Thread lead
In feed-per-minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the
expression, feedrate spindle speed. In feed-per-revolution mode,
the thread lead equals the feedrate.

If a tool length compensation (G43, G44, or G49) is specified in the
canned cycle, the offset is applied at the time of positioning to point
R.
- Series 10/11 format command

Rigid tapping can be performed using Series 15 format commands.
The rigid tapping sequence (including data transfer to and from the
PMC), Limitation, and the like are the same as described in this
chapter.


- Override
parameters:
Extraction override
Override signal
- Dry run
- Machine lock
rotate.
- 80 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Reset
- Interlock

5321 to 5324.
Limitation
- Axis switching
is issued.
- S command
Specifying a rotation speed exceeding the maximum speed for the
gear used causes alarm PS0200.

- F command
Specifying a value that exceeds the upper limit of cutting feedrate
causes alarm PS0011.
- Unit of F command
Metric input
G94
G95
1 mm/min
0.01 mm/rev
- 81 -
Inch input
Remarks
0.01 inch/min Decimal point programming allowed

0.0001 inch/rev Decimal point programming allowed
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- M29
Specifying an S command or axis movement between M29 and G84
Then, specifying M29 in the tapping cycle causes alarm PS0204.
-P
Specify P in a block that performs drilling. If P is specified in a
non-drilling block, it is not stored as modal data.
- Cancel
- Tool offset
- Subprogram call
Example
Z-axis feedrate 1000 mm/min
Spindle speed
1000 min-1
Thread lead
1.0 mm
<Programming for feed per minute>
G94 ;
G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G74 Z-100.0 R-20.0 F1000 ;
Specify a feed-per-minute command.

Positioning
Rigid tapping
<Programming for feed per revolution>

G95 ;
G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G74 Z-100.0 R-20.0 F1.0 ;
- 82 -
Specify a feed-per-revolution command.

Positioning
Rigid tapping
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.2.3
PROGRAMMING
Peck Rigid Tapping Cycle (G84 or G74)

Tapping a deep hole in rigid tapping mode may be difficult due to
chips sticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance. In such
cases, the peck rigid tapping cycle is useful.
In this cycle, cutting is performed several times until the bottom of the
hole is reached.
Two peck tapping cycles are available:
High-speed peck tapping cycle and standard peck tapping cycle.
These cycles are selected using the PCP bit (bit 5) of parameter 5200.
Format
G84 (or G74) X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ;
Z_
: The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole and
the position of the bottom of the hole
R_
P_
: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole and at point R when
a return is made
Q_
: Depth of cut for each cutting feed
F_
: The cutting feedrate
K_
G84.2 (or G84.3) X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ L_ ;

(Series 1 format)
L_
G84, G74 (G98)
High-speed peck tapping cycle
(Parameter
PCP(No.5200#5)=0)
<1> The tool operates at a
normal cutting feedrate.
The normal time constant
is used.
<2> Retraction can be
overridden.
The retraction time
constant is used.
G84, G74 (G99)
d = retraction distance
Initial level
Point R
q
Point R level
<1>
<2>
Point R level
Point R
<1>
Point Z
Peck tapping cycle (Parameter

PCP(No.5200#5)=1)
<1> The tool operates at a
normal cutting feedrate.
The normal time constant is
used.
overridden.
The retraction time constant
is used.
overridden.
The normal time constant is
used.
<2>
Point Z
d = cutting start distance

Initial level
Point R
q
<1>
Point R level
<3>
Point R
q
<2> d
<1>
Point R level
<3>
<2> d
d
Point Z
- 83 -
Point Z
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
- High-speed peck tapping cycle
to point R. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth
of cut for each cutting feed), then the tool is retracted by distance d.
The DOV bit (bit 4) of parameter 5200 specifies whether retraction
can be overridden or not. When point Z has been reached, the
spindle is stopped, then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction.
Set the retraction distance, d, in parameter 5213.
- Peck tapping cycle

to point R level. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q
(depth of cut for each cutting feed), then a return is performed to point
R. The DOV bit (bit 4) of parameter 5200 specifies whether the
retraction can be overridden or not. The moving of cutting feedrate
F is performed from point R to a position distance d from the end
point of the last cutting, which is where cutting is restarted. For this
moving of cutting feedrate F, the specification of the DOV bit (bit 4)
of parameter 5200 is also valid. When point Z has been reached, the
spindle is stopped, then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction.
Set d (distance to the point at which cutting is started) in parameter
5213.


- Override
parameters:
Extraction override
Override signal
- Dry run
- Machine lock
rotate.
- 84 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Reset
- Interlock

5321 to 5324.
Limitation
- Axis switching
is issued.
- S command
Specifying a rotation speed exceeding the maximum speed for the
gear used causes alarm PS0200.

- F command
Specifying a value that exceeds the upper limit of cutting feedrate
- Unit of F command
Metric input
G94
G95
1 mm/min
0.01 mm/rev
- 85 -
Inch input
Remarks
0.01 inch/min Decimal point programming allowed

0.0001 inch/rev Decimal point programming allowed
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- M29
Specifying an S command or axis movement between M29 and G84
Then, specifying M29 in the tapping cycle causes alarm PS0204.
- P/Q
as modal data.
When Q0 is specified, the peck rigid tapping cycle is not performed.
- Cancel
Do not specify a group 01 G code (G00 to G03) and G84 in the same
block. If they are specified together, G84 is canceled.
- Tool offset
- Subprogram call
- d (parameter No.5213)
Perform operation in the peck tapping cycle within point R. That is,
set a value which does not exceed point R for d (parameter No. 5213).
5.2.4
Canned Cycle Cancel (G80)

The rigid tapping canned cycle is canceled. For how to cancel this
cycle, see the Subsection 5.1.14, "Canned Cycle Cancel for Drilling
(G80)."
NOTE
When the rigid tapping canned cycle is cancelled,
the S value used for rigid tapping is also cleared
(as if S0 is specified).
Accordingly, the S command specified for rigid
tapping cannot be used in a subsequent part of the
program after the cancellation of the rigid tapping
canned cycle.
After canceling the rigid tapping canned cycle,
specify a new S command as required.
- 86 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.2.5
PROGRAMMING
Override during Rigid Tapping

parameters:
Extraction override
Override signal
5.2.5.1
Extraction override
For extraction override, the fixed override set in the parameter or
override specified in a program can be enabled at extraction (including
retraction during peck drilling/high-speed peck drilling).
Explanation
- Specifying the override in the parameter
Set bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 to 1 and set the override in
parameter No. 5211.
An override from 0% to 200% in 1% steps can be set. Bit 3 (OVU)
of parameter No. 5201 can be set to 1 to set an override from 0% to
2000% in 10% steps.
- Specifying the override in a program

Set bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 and bit 4 (OV3) of parameter
No. 5201 to 1. The spindle speed at extraction can be specified in
the program.
Specify the spindle speed at extraction using address "J" in the block
in which rigid tapping is specified.
Example) To specify 1000 min-1 for S at cutting and 2000 min-1 for S
at extraction
.
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z-100. F1000. J2000 ;
.
The difference in the spindle speed is converted to the actual override
by the following calculation.
Therefore, the spindle speed at extraction may not be the same as that
specified at address "J". If the override does not fall in the range
between 100% and 200%, it is assumed to be 100%.
Override (%) =
Spindle speed at extraction (specified at J )

Spindle speed (specified at S )
100
Bit 6 (OVE) of parameter No. 5202 can be set to 1 to extend the

override value to 100% to 2000%. If the specified override value is
outside the range between 100% and 2000%, it is assumed to be
100%.
- 87 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
The override to be applied is determined according to the setting of

parameters and that in the command as shown in the table below.
When bit 6 (OVE) of parameter No. 5202 is set to 0
Parameter setting
Command
DOV = 1
OV3 = 1
Within the range between Command in the

100% to 200%
program
Outside the range between
100%
100% to 200%
No spindle speed at extraction specified at address "J"
Parameter No. 5211
Spindle speed at extraction
specified at address "J"
OV3 = 0
Parameter
No. 5211
DOV = 0
100%
When bit 6 (OVE) of parameter No. 5202 is set to 1

Parameter setting
Command
DOV = 1
OV3 = 1
Within the range between Command in the

100% to 2000%
program
Outside the range between
100%
100% to 2000%
No spindle speed at extraction specified at address "J"
Parameter No. 5211
Spindle speed at extraction
specified at address "J"
OV3 = 0
Parameter
No. 5211
DOV = 0
100%
NOTE
1 Do not use a decimal point in the value specified at address "J".
If a decimal point is used, the value is assumed as follows:
Example) When the increment system for the reference axis is IS-B
When pocket calculator type decimal point programming is not used
The specified value is converted to the value for which the least
input increment is considered.
"J200." is assumed to be 200000 min-1.
When pocket calculator type decimal point programming is used
The specified value is converted to the value obtained by rounding
down to an integer.
"J200." is assumed to be 200 min-1.
2 Do not use a minus sign in the value specified at address "J".
If a minus sign is used, a value outside the range is assumed to be
specified.
3 The maximum override is obtained using the following equation so that
the spindle speed to which override at extraction is applied do not
exceed the maximum used gear speed (specified in parameters Nos.
5241 to 5243). For this reason, the obtained value is not the same as
the maximum spindle speed depending on the override.
Maximum override (%) =
Maximum spindle speed (specified in parameters )

100
4 When a value is specified at address "J" for specifying the spindle speed
at extraction in the rigid tapping mode, it is valid until the canned cycle is
canceled.
- 88 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.2.5.2
PROGRAMMING
Override signal
By setting bit 4 (OVS) of parameter No. 5203 to 1, override can be
applied to cutting/extraction operation during rigid tapping as follows:
Applying override using the feedrate override signal
Canceling override using the override cancel signal

There are the following relationships between this function and
override to each operation:
At cutting
When the override cancel signal is set to 0
Value specified by the override signal
100%
At extraction
Value specified by the override signal
When the override cancel signal is set to 1 and extraction
override is disabled
100%
When the override cancel signal is set to 1 and extraction
override is enabled
Value specified for extraction override
NOTE
1 The maximum override is obtained using the following equation so
that the spindle speed to which override is applied do not exceed the
maximum used gear speed (specified in parameters Nos. 5241 to
5243). For this reason, the obtained value is not the same as the
maximum spindle speed depending on the override.
Maximum override (%) =
Maximum spindle speed (specified in parameters )

100
2 Since override operation differs depending on the machine in use,

refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
- 89 -
PROGRAMMING
5.3
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AND CORNER R
Overview
Chamfering and corner R blocks can be inserted automatically
between the following:
Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
Format
, C_
, R_
Chamfering
Corner R
Explanation
When the above specification is added to the end of a block that
specifies linear interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02 or
G03), a chamfering or corner R block is inserted.
Blocks specifying chamfering and corner R can be specified
consecutively.
- Chamfering
After C, specify the distance from the hypothetical corner intersection
to the start and end points. The hypothetical corner point is the
corner point that would exist if chamfering were not performed.
<1>
<2>
G91 G01 X100.0 ,C10.0 ;

X100.0 Y100.0 ;
Inserted chamfering block

C
C
Hypothetical corner intersection
- Corner R
After R, specify the radius for corner R.
<1>
<2>
G91 G01 X100.0 ,R10.0 ;

X100.0 Y100.0 ;
Center of a circle with radius R
- 90 -
Inserted corner R
block
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
N001 G92 G90 X0 Y0 ;
N002 G00 X10.0 Y10.0 ;
N003 G01 X50.0 F10.0 ,C5.0 ;
N004 Y25.0 ,R8.0 ;
N005 G03 X80.0 Y50.0 R30.0 ,R8.0 ;
N006 G01 X50.0 ,R8.0 ;
N007 Y70.0 ,C5.0 ;
N008 X10.0 ,C5.0 ;
N009 Y10.0 ;
N010 G00 X0 Y0 ;
N011 M0;
Y
N008
70.0
N007
60.0
N006
50.0
40.0
N009
N005
30.0
20.0
N004
10.0
N010
N011
N003
N002
0 N001
10.0
20.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
70.0
80.0
Limitation
- Invalid specification
Chamfering (,C) or corner R (,R) specified in a block other than a
linear interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02 or G03) block
is ignored.
- Next block
A block specifying chamfering or corner R must be followed by a
block that specifies a move command using linear interpolation (G01)
or circular interpolation (G02 or G03). If the next block does not
contain these specifications, alarm PS0051 is issued.
Between these blocks, however, only one block specifying G04
(dwell) can be inserted. The dwell is executed after execution of the
inserted chamfering or corner R block.
- 91 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Exceeding the move range

If the inserted chamfering or corner R block causes the tool to go
beyond the original interpolation move range, alarm PS0055 is issued.
G91 G01 X30.0 ;
G03 X7.5 Y16.0 R37.0 ,C28.0 ;
G03 X67.0 Y-27.0 R55.0 ;
The tool path without

chamfering is indicated
with a solid line.
Chamfering block to be inserted
Fig 5.3 (a) Exceeding the move range
- Plane selection
A chamfering or corner R block is inserted only for a command to
move the tool within the same plane.
Example:
When the U-axis is set as an axis parallel to the basic X-axis (by
setting parameter No. 1022 to 5), the following program
performs chamfering between cutting feed along the U-axis and
that along the Y-axis:
G17 U0 Y0
G00 U100.0 Y100.0
G01 U200.0 F100 ,C30.0
Y200.0
The following program causes alarm PS0055, however.
(Because chamfering is specified in the block to move the tool
along the X-axis, which is not on the selected plane)
G17 U0 Y0
G00 U100.0 Y100.0
G01 X200.0 F100 ,C30.0
Y200.0
The following program also causes alarm PS0055. (Because
the block next to the chamfering command moves the tool along
the X-axis, which is not on the selected plane)
G17 U0 Y0
G00 U100.0 Y100.0
G01 Y200.0 F100 ,C30.0
X200.0
If a plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) is specified in the
block next to the block in which chamfering or corner R is specified,
- 92 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
- Travel distance 0
When two linear interpolation operations are performed, the
chamfering or corner R block is regarded as having a travel distance
of zero if the angle between the two straight lines is within 1.
When linear interpolation and circular interpolation operations are
performed, the corner R block is regarded as having a travel distance
of zero if the angle between the straight line and the tangent to the arc
at the intersection is within 1. When two circular interpolation
operations are performed, the corner R block is regarded as having a
travel distance of zero if the angle between the tangents to the arcs at
the intersection is within 1.
- Single block operation

When the block in which chamfering or corner R is specified is
executed in the single block mode, operation continues to the end
point of the inserted chamfering or corner R block and the machine
stops in the feed hold mode at the end point. When bit 0 (SBC) of
parameter No. 5105 is set to 1, the machine stops in the feed hold
mode also at the start point of the inserted chamfering or corner R
block.
- Unusable G codes
The following G codes are unusable in the same block as for
chamfering or corner R commands or with a block for chamfering or
corner R inputs that define continuous figures.
G codes (except G04) in group 00
G68 in group 16
- Threading
If ,C or ,R is specified in a threading command block, the alarm
PS0050 is issued.
NOTE
When ",C" and ",R" are specified in the same
block, the address specified last is valid.
- 93 -
PROGRAMMING
5.4
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION

By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one
rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can
be indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped
or clamped .
NOTE
To enable the index table indexing function, reset
bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to "0" and set bit 3
(IXC) of parameter No. 8132 to "1".
Explanation
- Indexing position
Specify an indexing position with address A, B, or C (set to bit 0 of
parameter ROTx No.1006).
The indexing position is specified by either of the following
(depending on bit 4 of parameter G90 No.5500):
1. Absolute value only (Bit 4 (G90) of parameter No.5500 =1)
2. Absolute or incremental value depending on the specified G
code: G90 or G91 (Bit 4 (G90) of parameter No.5500 =0)
A positive value indicates an indexing position in the
counterclockwise direction. A negative value indicates an indexing
position in the clockwise direction.
The minimum indexing angle of the index table is the value set to
parameter 5512. Only multiples of the least input increment can be
specified as the indexing angle. If any value that is not a multiple is
specified, an alarm PS1561 occurs. Decimal fractions can also be
entered. When a decimal fraction is entered, the 1's digit corresponds
to degree units.
Value specified for rotation from A to B

(case 2 described above)
G90 B-45.0 ; or
G91 B-105.0;
+60
0
-45
B
- 94 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Direction and value of rotation

The direction of rotation and angular displacement are determined by
either of the following two methods. Refer to the manual written by
the machine tool builder to find out which method is applied.
1. Using the auxiliary function specified in parameter No. 5511
(Address) (Indexing position) (Auxiliary function); Rotation in
the negative direction (Address) (Indexing position); Rotation in
the positive direction (No auxiliary functions are specified.)
An angular displacement greater than 360 is rounded down to
the corresponding angular displacement within 360 when bit 2
of parameter ABS No. 5500 specifies this option.
For example, when G90 B400.0 (auxiliary function); is specified
at a position of 0 , the table is rotated by 40 in the negative
direction.
2. Using no auxiliary functions
By setting to bits 2, 3, and 4 of parameter ABS, INC,G90
No.5500, operation can be selected from the following two
options.
Select the operation by referring to the manual written by the
machine tool builder.
(1) Rotating in the direction in which an angular displacement
becomes shortest
This is valid only in absolute programming. A specified
angular displacement greater than 360 is rounded down to
the corresponding angular displacement within 360 when
bit 2 of parameter ABS No.5500 specifies this option.
For example, when G90 B400.0; is specified at a position of
0, the table is rotated by 40 in the positive direction.
(2) Rotating in the specified direction
In the absolute programming, the value set in bit 2 of
parameter ABS No.5500 determines whether an angular
displacement greater than 360 is rounded down to the
corresponding angular displacement within 360.
In the incremental programming, the angular displacement
is not rounded down. For example, when G90 B720.0; is
specified at a position of 0, the table is rotated twice in the
positive direction, when the angular displacement is not
rounded down.
- Feedrate
The table is always rotated around the indexing axis in the rapid
traverse mode.
Dry runs cannot be executed for the indexing axis.
WARNING
If a reset is made during indexing of the index
table, a reference position return must be made
before each time the index table is indexed
subsequently.
- 95 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
1 If an index table indexing axis and another
controlled axis are specified in the same block
either alarm PS1564 is issued or the command is
executed, depending on bit 6 (SIM) of parameter
No. 5500 and bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502.
2 The waiting state which waits for completion of
clamping or unclamping of the index table is
indicated on diagnosis display No.12.
3 The auxiliary function specifying a negative
direction is processed in the CNC.
The relevant M code signal and completion signal
are sent between the CNC and the machine.
4 If a reset is made while waiting for completion of
clamping or unclamping, the clamp or unclamp
signal is cleared and the CNC exits the completion
wait state.
- Indexing function and other functions
Table 5.4 (a)
Item
Relative position display
Absolute position display
Movement in the machine
coordinate system (G53)
2nd auxiliary function (B code)
Operations while moving the
indexing axis
Index indexing function and other functions

Explanation
This value is rounded down when bit 1 of parameter REL No.5500 specifies this option.
This value is rounded down when bit 2 of parameter ABS No.5500 specifies this option.
Impossible to move
Impossible to specify
Possible with any address other than B that of the indexing axis.
Unless otherwise processed by the machine, feed hold, interlock and emergency stop
can be executed. Machine lock can be executed after indexing is completed.
Disabled
SERVO OFF signal
The indexing axis is usually in the servo-off state.
Incremental commands for
The workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system must always agree
indexing the index table
with each other on the indexing axis (the workpiece zero point offset value is zero.).
Manual operation is disabled in the JOG, INC, or HANDLE mode.
A manual reference position return can be made. If the axis selection signal is set to
Operations for indexing the
zero during manual reference position return, movement is stopped and the clamp
index table
command is not executed.
This function cannot be used on an axis on which the pole position detection function is
Pole position detection function
used.
- 96 -
B-64304EN-2/01
5.5
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
Overview
Each time the switch on the machine operator's panel is input when
the machine is at a table swing end point, the machine makes a cut by
a constant amount along the programmed profile on the specified YZ
plane. This makes it possible to perform grinding and cutting in a
timely manner and facilitating the grinding of a workpiece with a
profile.
X=a
External
signal input
(2)
(3)
A
(1)B(4)
D
Y
X
X=0
Sensor placement
For example, it is possible to machine a workpiece with a profile

programmed with linear interpolation, circular interpolation, and
linear interpolation on the YZ plane, such as that shown in the figure
above.
A sensor is placed at a X = 0 position so that the switch on the
machine operator's panel is input when the sensor detects the grinding
wheel. When the program is started at point A, the machine is first
placed in the state in which it waits for the input of the switch on the
machine operator's panel. Then, when the sensor detects the grinding
wheel, the switch on the machine operator's panel is input, and the
machine makes a cut by the constant amount along the programmed
profile on the specified YZ plane and moves to point B (operation (1)).
The machine is then placed in the state in which it waits for the input
of the switch on the machine operator's panel again, and performs a
grinding operation along the X-axis. It grinds from point B to point C
(operation (2)) and grinds back from point C to point B (operation (3)).
When the machine returns to point B, the sensor detects the grinding
wheel again, and the switch on the machine operator's panel is input,
so that the machine makes a cut by the amount of and moves to
point D (operation (4)). At point D, the machine performs a grinding
operation along the X-axis.
Afterwards, each time the switch on the machine operator's panel is
input, the machine makes a cut by the amount of along the profile
program, so that the workpiece is machined to a profile such as that
shown in the figure above.
- 97 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
In-feed control function is optional function.
Format
G161 R_ ;
Profile program
G160 ;
Explanation
- G161 R_
This specifies an operation mode and the start of a profile program.
A dept of cut can be specified with R.
- Profile program
Program the profile of a workpiece on the YZ plane, using linear
interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02, G03).
Multiple-block commands are possible.
When a profile program is started, the machine is placed in the state in
which it waits for the input of the switch on the machine operator's
panel. When the switch on the machine operator's panel is input in this
state, the machine makes a cut by the amount of cut specified with R.
Later, until the end point of the program, the machine makes a cut
each time the switch on the machine operator's panel is input. If the
final depth of cut is less than R, the remaining travel distance is
assumed the depth of cut.
The feedrate is the one specified in the program with an F code. As in
normal linear interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02, G03),
override can be applied.
- G160
This specifies the cancellation of an operation mode (end of a profile
program).
Limitation
- G161 R_
If no value is specified with R or if the value specified with R is
negative, alarm PS0230 is issued.
- Profile program
In a profile program, do not issue move commands other than those
for linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03).
- 98 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
CAUTION
If a move command other than those for linear
interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02,
G03) is issued in a profile program, an unexpected
movement may result.
- Grinding operation
In this operation mode, a grinding operation that causes the machine
to move to and from the grinding wheel cannot be specified in an NC
program. Perform such an operation in another way.
- Block overlap
In this operation mode, block overlap is disabled.
- Switch on the machine operator's panel

The switch on the machine operator's panel is disabled when it is input
before a profile program is started. Input the switch on the machine
operator's panel after the start of a profile program. Also, even if the
switch on the machine operator's panel is input during a cut, this is not
accepted in the next cut. It is necessary to input the switch again after
the end of the cut, when the machine is in the state in which it waits
for the input of the switch on the machine operator's panel.
Example
O0001 ;
:
N0 G161 R10.0 ;
N1 G91 G01 Z-70.0 F100 ;
N2 G19 G02 Z-80.0 R67.0 ;
N3 G01 Z-70.0 ;
N4 G160 ;
:
70.0
80.0
70.0
N2
N1
N3
Y
R=67.000
The program above causes the machine to move by 10.000 along the
machining profile in the figure above each time the switch on the
machine operator's panel is input.
= Travel distance at each input of the switch on the machine
operator's panel.
The feedrate is the one specified in the program with an F code.
- 99 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Note
NOTE
If manual intervention is performed during in-feed
control, the tool path after the manual intervention
can be switched by setting the manual absolute
switch to on or off as in normal linear/circular
interpolation. When the manual absolute switch is
on, the machine returns to the programmed path
for an absolute command or for an incremental
command with bit 1 (ABS) of parameter No. 7001
being 1.
- 100 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.6
PROGRAMMING
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)

With the canned grinding cycle, repetitive machining operations that
are specific to grinding and are usually specified using several blocks
can be specified using one block including a G function. So, a
program can be created simply. At the same time, the size of a
program can be reduced, and the memory can be used more efficiently.
Four types of canned grinding cycles are available:
Plunge grinding cycle (G75)

Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle (G77)
Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle (G78)
Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle (G79)
In the descriptions below, an axis used for cutting with a grinding

wheel and an axis used for grinding with a grinding wheel are referred
to as follows:
Axis used for cutting with a grinding wheel: Cutting axis
Axis used for grinding with a grinding wheel: Grinding axis
Axis on which to make a dresser cut:
Dressing axis
During execution of a canned grinding cycle, the following functions
cannot be used:
Programmable mirror image

Scaling
One-digit F code feed
Tool length compensation
For a depth of cut on a cutting axis and a distance of grinding on a

grinding axis, the incremental system (parameter No. 1013) for the
reference axis (parameter No. 1031) is used. If 0 is set in parameter
No. 1031 (reference axis), the incremental system for the first axis is
used.
- 101 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
WARNING
The G codes for canned grinding cycles G75, G77,
G78, and G79 are G codes of group 01. A G code
for cancellation such as G80 used for a canned
cycle for drilling is unavailable. By specifying a G
code of group 00 other than G04, modal information
such as a depth of cut is cleared but no canned
grinding cycle can be canceled. To cancel a canned
grinding cycle, a G code of group 01 other than
G75, G77, G78, and G79 needs to be specified. So,
when switching to another axis move command
from canned grinding cycles, for example, be sure
to specify a G code of group 01 such as G00 or G01
to cancel the canned grinding cycle. If another axis
move command is specified without canceling the
canned grinding cycle, an unpredictable operation
can result because of continued cycle operation.
NOTE
1 If the G code for a canned grinding cycle (G75,
G77, G78, or G79) is specified, the canned grinding
cycle is executed according to the values of I, J, K,
, R, F, and P preserved as modal data while the
cycle is valid, even if a block specified later
specifies none of G75, G77, G78, and G79.
Example:
G75 I_ J_ K_ _ R_ F_ P_ ;
; The canned grinding cycle is executed even
if an empty block is specified.
%
2 When switching from a canned cycle for drilling to a
canned grinding cycle, specify G80 to cancel the
canned cycle for drilling.
3 When switching from a canned grinding cycle to
another axis move command, cancel the canned
cycle according to the warning above.
- 102 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.6.1
PROGRAMMING
Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75)

A plunge grinding cycle can be executed.
Format
G75 I_ J_ K_ _ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I_
J_
K_
_
R_
F_
P_
L_
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
First depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)

Second depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)
Total depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)
Grinding range (The grinding direction depends on the sign.)
Feedrate for I and J
Feedrate for
Dwell time
Grinding-wheel wear compensation number (during continuous
dressing only)
G75
I
J
<1> (R)
<3> (F)
<2> P
<4> (R)
<6> (F)
<5> P
NOTE
is an arbitrary axis address on the grinding axis
as determined with parameter No. 5176.
- 103 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
A plunge grinding cycle consists of a sequence of six operations.
Operations <1> to <6> are repeated until the depth of cut reaches the
total depth of cut specified with address K. For a single block,
operations <1> to <6> are executed with a single cycle start.
- Operation sequence in a cycle

<1> Cutting with a grinding wheel
Makes a cut in the Y-axis direction with cutting feed by the amount
specified as the first depth of cut I. The feedrate is the one specified
with R.
<2> Dwell
Performs a dwell for the time specified with P.
<3> Grinding
Causes the machine to move with cutting feed by the amount specified
with . The grinding axis is specified with parameter No. 5176. The
feedrate is the one specified with F. If L is specified when the
continuous dressing function is enabled, dressing is performed with
the cutting axis and the dressing axis. The dressing axis is specified
with parameter No. 5180.

specified as the second depth of cut J. The feedrate is the one specified
with R.
<5> Dwell
<6> Grinding (return direction)

Feeds the machine at the feedrate specified with F in the opposite
direction by the amount specified with . If L is specified when the
the cutting axis and the dressing axis.
- Continuous dressing
If the continuous dressing function is enabled, the grinding-wheel cut
and the dresser cut are continuously compensated for according to the
dressing amount specified with L during the execution of grinding.
That is, continuous dressing is performed in each grinding operation
in the sequence of operations in the cycle, resulting in simultaneous
3-axis interpolation with compensation in the cutting axis direction
and compensation in the dressing axis direction simultaneous with
movement along the grinding axis. At this time, the travel distance
(compensation) along the cutting axis is equal to the specified dressing
amount, and the travel distance along the dressing axis is equal to
double the specified dressing amount (diameter).
For the dressing amount, specify an offset number (grinding-wheel
wear compensation number) with address L. Up to 400 offset numbers
(L1 to L400) can be specified. Establish correspondence between
compensation amounts and offset numbers, and set it in offset memory
in advance, using the MDI panel.
- 104 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
No compensation operation is performed in the following cases:

The continuous dressing function is disabled.
L is not specified.
L0 is specified.
Dressing axis
a: Amount of dressing
Dresser
Cutting axis
2a
Grinding wheel
a
Grinding axis
Workpiece
NOTE
Continuous dressing function is optional function.
Limitations
- Cutting axis
The cutting axis is the second controlled axis. By setting bit 0 (FXY)
of parameter No. 5101 to 1, the axis can be switched with a plane
selection command (G17, G18, or G19).
- Grinding axis
To specify a grinding axis, set its axis number, which must be other
than that of the cutting axis, in parameter No. 5176.
- Dressing axis
To specify a dressing axis, set its axis number, which must be other
than those of the cutting axis and the grinding axis, in parameter No.
5180.
- ,I,J,K
, I, J, and K commands are all incremental ones.
Spark-out (execution of movement in the grinding direction only)
occurs in the following cases:
I or J is not specified or I = J = 0
K is not specified or K = 0
If I or J is not specified or if I = J = 0 is true, and K is not equal to 0, a
grinding operation is performed infinitely.
- Clearing
The data items I, J, K, , R, F, and P in a canned cycle are modal
information common to G75, G77, G78, and G79, so that once
specified, they remain effective until specified anew. The data is
cleared when a G code of group 00 other than G04 or a G code of
group 01 other than G75, G77, G78, and G79 is specified. L is
effective only in the block in which it is specified.
- 105 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Operation to be performed if the total depth of cut is reached

If, during cutting with I or J, the total depth of cut is reached, the cycle
is ended after the subsequent operations in the sequence (up to <6>)
are executed.
If this occurs, the depth of cut is equal to or less than the total depth of
cut.
If the total depth of cut is reached due to a cutting operation with

I or J
<1>
<3>
<2>
<4>
<6>
<5>
K
I
<1>
<2>
<3>
<5>
<6>
If the total depth of cut is reached during a cutting operation with

I or J
<1>
<3>
<2>
<6>
<4>
<5>
K
<1>
I <2>
<3>
<6>
<5>
NOTE
1 If I, J, and K have different signs, alarm PS0455 is issued.
2 If G75 is specified, but a grinding axis is not specified,
3 If any two of the cutting axis number, the grinding axis
number, and the dressing axis number are the same, alarm
PS0456 is issued.
4 While this cycle is effective, even if G90 (absolute
command) is executed, the , I, J, and K commands are
incremental ones.
- 106 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.6.2
PROGRAMMING
Direct Constant-Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77)

A direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle can be performed.
Format
G77 I_ J_ K_ _ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I_ : First depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the
sign.)
J_ : Second depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on
the sign.)
K_ : Total depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the
sign.)
_ : Grinding range (The grinding direction depends on the
sign.)
R_: Feedrate for I and J
F_ : Feedrate for
P_ : Dwell time
L_ : Grinding-wheel wear compensation number (during
continuous dressing only)
G77
I
J
<1> (R)
<3> (F)
<4> (R)
<2> P
<6> (F)
<5> P
NOTE
- 107 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
A direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle consists of a
sequence of six operations.

with R.
<2> Dwell
<3> Grinding

with R.
<5> Dwell

For details, see Explanation of G75.
- 108 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Operation to be performed when a skip signal is input

With G77, by inputting a skip signal in a cycle, it is possible to end
the cycle after interrupting the current operation sequence (or after
ending the current operation sequence).
The following shows the operation to be performed when a skip signal
is input in each operation sequence.
If operation <1> or <4> in the sequence (movement with I or J)

is in progress, the machine immediately stops cutting and returns
to the coordinate, assumed at the start of the cycle.
Skip signal
Skip signal
(End)
(End)
If operation <2> or <5> in the sequence (dwell) is in progress,

the machine immediately cancels the dwell and returns to the
coordinates, assumed at the start of the cycle.
If operation <3> or <6> in the sequence (grinding movement) is

in progress, the machine returns to the coordinate, assumed at
the start of the cycle after the end of the movement.
Skip signal
(End)
Skip signal
(End)
Limitations
- Cutting axis
The cutting axis is the second controlled axis. By setting bit 0 (FXY)
of parameter No. 5101 to 1, the axis can be switched with a plane
- Grinding axis
- Dressing axis
5181.
- 109 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- ,I,J,K
- Clearing

The operation to be performed if the total depth of cut reaches during
cutting with I or J is the same as that for G75. See Limitation on
G75.
NOTE
1 If I, J, and K have different signs, alarm PS0455 is
issued.
2 If G77 is specified, but a grinding axis is not
specified, alarm PS0455 is issued.
3 If any two of the cutting axis number, the grinding
axis number, and the dressing axis number are the
same, alarm PS0456 is issued.
command) is executed, the , I, J, and K
commands are incremental ones.
- 110 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.6.3
PROGRAMMING
Continuous-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78)

A continuous-feed surface grinding cycle can be performed.
Format
G78 I_ (J_) K_ _ F_P_ L_ ;
I_ : First depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the
sign.)
J_ : Second depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on
the sign.)
K_ : Total depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the
sign.)
_ : Grinding range (The grinding direction depends on the
sign.)
F_ : Feedrate for
P_ : Dwell time
L_ : Grinding-wheel wear compensation number (during
continuous dressing only)
G78
<1> P
I
I(J)
<2> (F)
<3> P
<4> (F)
NOTE
- 111 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
A continuous-feed surface grinding cycle consists of a sequence of
four operations.

<1> Dwell
<2> Cutting with a grinding wheelGrinding

Performs cutting feed along the cutting axis (Z-axis) and the grinding
axis at the same time. The travel distance (depth of cut) along the
cutting axis is equal to the amount specified as the first depth of cut I,
and the travel distance along the grinding axis is equal to the amount
specified with . The grinding axis is specified with parameter No.
5178. The feedrate is the one specified with F. If L is specified when
the continuous dressing function is enabled, dressing is performed
with the cutting axis and the dressing axis. The dressing axis is
specified with parameter No. 5182.
<3> Dwell
<4> Cutting with a grinding wheelGrinding (return direction)

Performs cutting feed along the cutting axis (Z-axis) and the grinding
axis at the same time. The travel distance (depth of cut) along the
cutting axis is equal to the amount specified as the first depth of cut I,
and the travel distance along the grinding axis is equal to the amount
specified with , with the direction being the opposite one. The
- 112 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
Limitations
- Cutting axis
The cutting axis is the third controlled axis. By setting bit 0 (FXY) of
parameter No. 5101, the axis can be switched with a plane selection
command (G17, G18, or G19).
- Grinding axis
- Dressing axis
5182.
-J
If J is not specified, J is regarded as being equal to I.
The J command is effective only in the block in which it is specified.
- ,I,J,K
- Clearing
The data items I, K, , R, F, and P in a canned cycle are modal
group 01 other than G75, G77, G78, and G79 is specified. J, L is
- 113 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

If, during cutting with I or J, the total depth of cut is reached, the cycle
is ended after the subsequent operations in the sequence (up to <4>)
are executed.
If this occurs, the depth of cut is equal to or less than the total depth of
cut.
If the total depth of cut is reached due to a cutting operation with

I or J
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
If the total depth of cut is reached during a cutting operation with

I or J
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<1>
I
<2>
<4>
<3>
NOTE
1 If I, J, and K have different signs, alarm PS0455 is issued.
2 If G78 is specified, but a grinding axis is not specified,
3 If any two of the cutting axis number, the grinding axis
number, and the dressing axis number are the same, alarm
PS0456 is issued.
command) is executed, the , I, J, and K commands are
incremental ones.
- 114 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
5.6.4
PROGRAMMING
Intermittent-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79)

An intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle can be performed.
Format
G79 I_ J_ K_ _ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;
I_
J_
K_
_
R_
F_
P_
L_
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
First depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)

Second depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)
Total depth of cut (The cutting direction depends on the sign.)
Grinding range (The grinding direction depends on the sign.)
Feedrate for I and J
Feedrate for
Dwell time
Grinding-wheel wear compensation number (during continuous
dressing only)
G79
I
J
<1> (R)
<3> (F)
<2> P
<4> (R)
<6> (F)
<5> P
NOTE
- 115 -
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
An intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle consists of a sequence of
six operations.

Makes a cut in the Z-axis direction with cutting feed by the amount
with R.
<2> Dwell
<3> Grinding

Makes a cut in the Z-axis direction with cutting feed by the amount
with R.
<5> Dwell

Limitations
- Cutting axis
The cutting axis is the third controlled axis. By setting bit 0 (FXY) of
parameter No. 5101 to 1, the axis can be switched with a plane
- Grinding axis
- 116 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
- Dressing axis
5183.
- ,I,J,K
- Clearing

The operation to be performed if the total depth of cut reaches during
cutting with I or J is the same as that for G75. See Limitation on
G75.
NOTE
1 If I, J, and K have different signs, alarm PS0455 is
issued.
2 If G79 is specified, but a grinding axis is not
specified, alarm PS0455 is issued.
3 If any two of the cutting axis number, the grinding
axis number, and the dressing axis number are the
same, alarm PS0456 is issued.
command) is executed, the , I, J, and K
commands are incremental ones.
- 117 -
6.COMPENSATION FUNCTION
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Chapter 6, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the
following sections:
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)...........119

TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION SHIFT TYPES..............127
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37) ....137
TOOL OFFSET (G45 - G48)....................................................141
OVERVIEW OF CUTTER COMPENSATION (G40-G42) ....146
DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION ...........................153
CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G39) ..................210
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF
COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES
FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ...............................................212
6.9 SCALING (G50, G51) ..............................................................215
6.10 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69) ...............224
6.11 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1)....231
6.12 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1).........236
- 118 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
6.1
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)

This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool
length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the
tool used into the offset memory. It is possible to compensate the
difference without changing the program.
Specify the direction of offset with G43 or G44. Select a tool length
compensation value from the offset memory by entering the
corresponding address and number (H code).
Tool assumed
during programming
Actual tool
Specify this distance as

the value of tool length
compensation.
Fig. 6.1 (a)
6.1.1
Tool length compensation
Overview
The following three methods of tool length compensation can be used,
depending on the axis along which tool length compensation can be
made.
- Tool length compensation A
Compensates for the difference in tool length along the basic Z-axis.
- Tool length compensation B
Compensates for the difference in tool length in the direction normal
to a selected plane.
- Tool length compensation C
Compensates for the difference in tool length along a specified axis.
Format
Type
Format
Tool length compensation A
G43 Z_ H_ ;
G44 Z_ H_ ;
Tool length compensation B
G17 G43 Z_ H_ ;
G17 G44 Z_ H_ ;
G18 G43 Y_ H_ ;
G18 G44 Y_ H_ ;
G19 G43 X_ H_ ;
G19 G44 X_ H_ ;
Tool length compensation C
G43 _H_ ;
G44 _H_ ;
G49 ; or H0 ;
- 119 -
Description
G43
G44
G17
G18
G19
: Positive offset
: Negative offset
: XY plane selection
: ZX plane selection
: YZ plane selection
: Address of a specified axis
: Address for specifying the
tool length compensation
value
X, Y, Z : Offset move command
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
- Selection of tool length compensation
Select tool length compensation A, B, or C, by setting bits 1 (TLB)
and 0 (TLC) of parameter No.5001 .
Parameter No.5001
Bit 1 (TLB)
Bit 0 (TLC)
0
1
0/1
0
0
1
Type
- Direction of the offset

When G43 is specified, the tool length compensation value (stored in
offset memory) specified with the H code is added to the coordinates
of the end position specified by a command in the program. When
G44 is specified, the same value is subtracted from the coordinates of
the end position. The resulting coordinates indicate the end position
after compensation, regardless of whether the absolute or incremental
mode is selected.
When the specification of an axis is omitted, a movement is made by
the tool length compensation value.
G43 and G44 are modal G codes. They are valid until another G code
belonging to the same group is used.
- 120 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Specification of the tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value assigned to the number (offset
number) specified in the H code is selected from offset memory and
added to or subtracted from the moving command in the program.
Example
:
H1 ;
The offset value of offset number 1 is
selected.
:
G43 Z_ ; Offset is applied according to the offset
value of offset number 1.
:
H2 ;
Offset is applied according to the offset
:
H0 ;
value 0.
:
H3 ;
:
G49 ;
Offset is canceled.
:
H4 ;
The offset value of offset number 4 is
selected.
:
A tool length compensation value is to be set in the offset memory
corresponding to an offset number.
WARNING
When another offset number is specified, the tool
length compensation value just changes to a new
value. The new tool length compensation value
is not added to the old tool length compensation
value.
H1 : Tool length compensation value 20.0
H2 : Tool length compensation value 30.0
G90 G43 Z100.0 H1 ; Z will move to 120.0
G90 G43 Z100.0 H2 ; Z will move to 130.0
NOTE
The tool length compensation value corresponding
to offset No. 0, that is, H0 always means 0. It is
impossible to set any other tool length
compensation value to H0.
- 121 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Performing tool length compensation along two or more axes

Tool length compensation B can be executed along two or more axes
when the axes are specified in two or more blocks.
By setting bit 3 (TAL) of parameter No. 5001 to 1, tool length
compensation C can also can be executed along two or more axes
when the axes are specified in two or more blocks. If no axis is
specified in the same block, the alarm PS0027 is issued. If two or
more axes are specified in the same block, the alarm PS0336 is issued.
Example 1
When tool length compensation B is executed
along the X-axis and Y-axis
G19 G43 H_ ;
Offset in X axis
G18 G43 H_ ;
Offset in Y axis
Example 2
When tool length compensation C is executed
along the X-axis and Y-axis
G43 X_ H_ ;
Offset in X axis
G43 Y_ H_ ;
Offset in Y axis
Example 3
When an alarm is issued with tool length
compensation C
G43 X_ Y_ H_ ;
An alarm (PS0336) occurs
- Tool length compensation cancel
To cancel tool length compensation, specify G49 or H0. After G49 or
H0 is specified, the system immediately cancels the offset mode.
NOTE
1 If offset is executed along two or more axes, offset
along all axes is canceled by specifying G49. If H0
is used to specify cancellation, offset along only the
axis normal to a selected plane is canceled in the
case of tool length compensation B, or offset along
only the last axis specified by G43 or G44 is canceled
in the case of tool length compensation C.
2 If offset is executed along three or more axes, and
offset along all axes is canceled using G49, the alarm
PS0015 (TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES) may
be issued. By using H0 together, for example,
cancel offset so that the number of simultaneously
controlled axes (the number of axes along which
movements are made simultaneously) does not
exceed the allowable range of the system.
3 When H is specified as an address for setting a
compensation number in cutter compensation
(G40, G41, or G42) (bit 2 (OFH) of parameter
No.5001 = 1), G49 (tool length compensation
cancel) is performed in the block if G49 (tool length
compensation cancel) is specified in the same block
as for G40 (cutter compensation cancel).
- 122 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
Tool length compensation (in boring holes #1, #2, and #3)
#1
#3
20
30
(6)
(13)
+Y
(9)
(1)
#2
30
+X
30
120
Actual position
Offset value
=4mm
Programmed
position
50
+Z
(2)
35
(12)
18 (3) (5) (7)
(8)
(4)
30
(10)
8
22
(11)
Program
H1=-4.0 (Tool length compensation value)
N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ;........................................................... (1)
N2 G43 Z-32.0 H1 ; ....................................................................... (2)
N3 G01 Z-21.0 F1000 ; ................................................................. (3)
N4 G04 P2000 ; ............................................................................... (4)
N5 G00 Z21.0 ;................................................................................ (5)
N6 X30.0 Y-50.0 ; ........................................................................... (6)
N7 G01 Z-41.0 ; .............................................................................. (7)
N8 G00 Z41.0 ;................................................................................ (8)
N9 X50.0 Y30.0 ; ............................................................................ (9)
N10 G01 Z-25.0 ; ............................................................................ (10)
N11 G04 P2000 ; ........................................................................... (11)
N12 G00 Z57.0 H0 ; ...................................................................... (12)
N13 X-200.0 Y-60.0 ;...................................................................... (13)
N14 M2 ;
- 123 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Notes
- Command for setting a workpiece coordinate system in the tool length
compensation mode
Executing a workpiece coordinate system setting G code command
(G92) presets a coordinate system in such a way that the specified
position will be a pre-compensation position.
However, this G code cannot be used together with a block where tool
length compensation vectors vary. Refer to Notes in "Work
Coordinate System Setting" of the User's Manual (Common) for
details.
- Bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No.5001

If bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is set, cutter compensation takes
precedence over tool length compensation. Concrete explanations
follow:
If OFH = "0":
Processing is carried out properly according to a selected modal
state (G43, G44, or G49).
If OFH = "1":
In a block where G40, G41, or G42 is specified, tool length
compensation is disabled.
In the G40 mode, processing is carried out properly according to
a selected modal state (G43, G44, or G49).
In the G41 and G42 modes, tool length compensation is enabled
only in a block in which G43, G44, or G49 is specified. No
compensation amount is updated only with the H code.
G49 is enabled if G49 is specified in the same block as for G40,
however.
- 124 -
B-64304EN-2/01
6.1.2
PROGRAMMING
G53, G28, and G30 Commands in Tool Length Compensation

Mode
This section describes the tool length compensation cancellation and
restoration performed when G53, G28, or G30 is specified in tool
length compensation mode. Also described is the timing of tool length
compensation.
Explanation
- Tool length compensation vector cancellation
When G53, G28, or G30 is specified in tool length compensation
mode, tool length compensation vectors are canceled as described
below. However, the previously specified modal G code remains
displayed; modal code display is not switched to G49.
(1) When G53 is specified
Command
G53 IP_
G49 G53 IP_
Specified axis
Tool length
compensation axis
Other than tool length
compensation axis
Tool length
compensation axis
compensation axis
Operation
Canceled upon movement being
performed
Not canceled
Canceled upon movement being
performed
Canceled
(IP_ : Dimension word)
CAUTION
If tool length compensation is applied along
multiple axes, the offset vector along the axis
specified by G53 is canceled.
(2) When G28 or G30 is specified
Command
Specified axis
Tool length
compensation axis
G28 IP_
G49 G28 IP_

compensation axis
Tool length
compensation axis
compensation axis
- 125 -
Operation
Not canceled at an intermediate
point.
Canceled at the reference
position.
Not canceled at an intermediate
point.
Canceled at the reference
position.
Canceled when a movement is
made to an intermediate point.
Canceled when a movement is
made to an intermediate point.
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
CAUTION
If tool length compensation is applied along
multiple axes, the offset vector along the axis on
which a reference position return operation has
been performed is canceled.
- Tool length compensation vector restoration
Tool length compensation vectors, canceled by specifying G53, G28,
or G30 in tool length compensation mode, are restored as described
below.
Type
Parameter EVO
(No.5001#6)
0
A/B
1
C
Restoration condition
The H command or G43 (G44) is
specified.
Restored by the next buffered block.
The H command or G43 (G44) IP_ is
specified.
CAUTION
If a tool length compensation vector is restored
only with H_, G43, or G44 when tool length
compensation is applied along multiple axes, the
tool length compensation vector along only the
axis normal to a selected plane is restored in the
case of tool length compensation B, or the tool
length compensation vector along only the last axis
for which tool length compensation is specified is
restored in the case of tool length compensation C.
The tool length compensation vector along any
other axes is not restored.
NOTE
In a block in which G40, G41, or G42 is specified,
no tool length compensation vector is restored.
- 126 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
6.2
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION SHIFT TYPES
Overview
A tool length compensation operation can be performed by shifting
the program coordinate system: The coordinate system containing
the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool
length compensation value. A tool length compensation shift type
can be selected with parameter TOS (parameter No. 5006#6). If no
move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49
command, the tool will not move along the axis. If a move command
is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49 command, the
coordinate system will be shifted first, then the tool will move along
the axis.
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the
type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation:

Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis.

Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and
Z axis.

Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.
Format
- Tool length compensation A
G43 Z_H_;
Shifts the coordinate system along the Z axis by the
compensation value, to the + side.
G44 Z_H_;
compensation value, to the - side.
G43 (or G44) : + (or -) side offset at which to start tool
length compensation
H_
: Address specifying the tool length
compensation value
- 127 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool length compensation B

G17 G43 Z_H_;
G17 G44 Z_H_;

G18 G43 Y_H_;

Shifts the coordinate system along the X axis by the
G18 G44 Y_H_;

Shifts the coordinate system along the X axis by the
G19 G43 X_H_;

Shifts the coordinate system along the Y axis by the
G19 G44 X_H_;

Shifts the coordinate system along the Y axis by the
G17 (or G18, G19) : Plane selection
G43 (or G44)
: + (or -) side offset at which to start
H_
compensation value
- Tool length compensation C

G43 _H_;
Shifts the coordinate system along a specified axis by the
G44 _H_;
Shifts the coordinate system along a specified axis by the
G43 (or G44) : + (or -) side offset at which to start tool
length compensation
_
: Address of any one axis
H_
compensation value

G49; or H0;
G49 (or H0): Tool length compensation cancel
- 128 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Explanation
- Offset direction
If the tool length compensation value specified with an H code (and
stored in offset memory) is G43, the coordinate system is shifted to
the + side; if G44, to the - side. If the sign of the tool length
compensation value is -, the coordinate system is shifted to the - side
if G43 and to the + side if G44. G43 and G44 are modal G codes;
they remain valid until another G code in the same group is used.
- Specifying a tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value corresponding to the number
(offset number) specified with an H code (and stored in offset
memory) is used. The tool length compensation corresponding to the
offset number 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set a tool
length compensation value corresponding to H0.
- Compensation axis
Specify one of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, using
parameters TLC and TLB (No. 5001#0, #1).
- Specifying offset on two or more axes

Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by
specifying offset axes in multiple blocks.
To perform offset on X and Y axes
G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis.
G18 G43 H_; Performs offset on the Y axis.
Tool length compensation C suppresses the generation of an alarm
even if offset is performed on two or more axes at the same time, by
setting TAL (No. 5001#3) to 1.

To cancel offset, specify either G49 or H0. Canceling offset causes
the shifting of the coordinate system to be undone. If no move
command is specified at this time, the tool will not move along the
axis.
- 129 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Limitation
- Operation to be performed at the start and cancellation of tool length
compensation
When a tool length compensation shift type is used (bit 6 (TOS) of
parameter No. 5006 = 1), and if the start or cancellation (G43, G44,
G49, or H0) of a tool length compensation is specified in cutter
compensation mode (G41,G42), look-ahead of the subsequent blocks
is not performed until the end of the block in which the start or
cancellation is specified. Thus, the operation is as described below.
In the block in which the start or cancellation is specified,

deceleration to a stop is performed.
Because look-ahead is not performed, the compensation vector of
cutter compensation is vertical to the block immediately
preceding the one in which the start or cancellation is specified.
Thus, overcutting or undercutting may occur before or after this
command.
Until the completion of the block in which the start or
cancellation is specified, the subsequent custom macros will not
be executed.
Example in which overcutting occurs in cutter compensation)

Overcutting may occur if tool length compensation is started or
canceled in cutter compensation mode.
:
G40 G49 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z100. ;
N1 G42 G01 X10. Y10. F500 D1 ;
N2 G43 Z0. H2 ;
N3 X100. ;
N4 Y100. ;
N5 X10. ;
N6 Y10. ;
N7 G49 Z100. ;
N8 #100=#5023 ;
N9 G40 X0 Y0 ;
:
- 130 -
Start of cutter compensation

Start of tool length compensation
Cancellation of tool length compensation

Custom macro command
Cancellation of cutter compensation
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
N2 contains G43 (start of tool length compensation) in cutter

compensation (G42) mode and, therefore, look-ahead of N3 and
subsequent blocks is not performed.
As a result,
Deceleration to a stop is performed between N2 and N3.
The cutter compensation vector at the end point of N1 is vertical

to block N1. (Overcutting may occur.)
If it is assumed that look-ahead is performed, the vector is
vertical to the start point of N2, and no overcutting occurs.
Cutter compensation vector if look-ahead is not
performed
Tool center path if look-ahead

is not performed
Path specified by the

program
Tool
Cutter compensation vector if

look-ahead is performed
Tool center path if look-ahead is

performed
N7 contains G49 (cancellation of tool length compensation) in G42

mode and, therefore, look-ahead of N8 and subsequent blocks is not
performed.
As a result,
Deceleration to a stop is performed at the end point of N7.
The custom macro command in N8 is executed after the end of

N7. This means that in this example, variable #100 will be the
machine coordinate on the Z-axis at the end point position of N7.
(Variable #5023: Machine coordinate on the third axis)
If it is assumed that look-ahead is performed, N8 is executed at
the point the look-ahead of N8 is performed, that is, before the
end of N7, so that variable #100 will be a position before the end
point of N7.
The cutter compensation vector at the end point of N6 is vertical

to block N6. (Overcutting or undercutting may occur.)
- 131 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example in which no overcutting occurs in cutter compensation

(recommended)
Before cutter compensation mode, start tool length compensation.
G40 G49 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z100. ;

N1 G43 G01 Z100. F500 H2 ;
N2 G42 X10. Y10. D1 ;
N3 Z0 ;
N4 X100. ;
N5 Y100. ;
N6 X10. ;
N7 Y10. ;
N8 G40 X0 Y0 ;
N9 G49 Z100. ;
N10 #100=#5023 ;

Cancellation of cutter compensation

Cancellation of tool length compensation
Custom macro command
N1 is a command for starting tool length compensation. However,

blocks N2 and the subsequent blocks are preread because the current
mode is not cutter compensation. As a result, the cutter compensation
path can be determined correctly. In blocks N1 and N9, deceleration
to a stop is not performed. The custom macro command in N10 is
executed without waiting for the end of N9.
Operation to be performed if the tool length compensation is changed in tool length

compensation mode
When a tool length compensation shift type is used (bit 6 (TOS) of
parameter No. 5006 = 1), it is possible to select the operation to be
performed if the tool length compensation is changed (*1) in cutter
compensation (G41,G42) and in tool length (G43,G44), by using bit 1
(MOF) of parameter No. 5000.
Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 0

The tool moves along the axis by the change in tool length
compensation.
Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 1:

After the tool length compensation is changed, movement by the
change in tool length compensation is not performed until the
absolute command for the compensation axis is executed.
*1
Changes in tool length compensation include:

H code specified in a program (D code for the lathe system
extended tool selection function)
G43/G44 specified to change the direction of tool length
compensation
Tool compensation amount changed using the offset screen,
G10 command, system variable, or window function when
bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 = "1"
Restoration of a tool length compensation vector that was
temporarily canceled using G53, G28, or G30 during tool
length compensation
- 132 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Example in which the tool length compensation is changed with an

H code)
The following explains the operation to be performed if the offset
number is changed in tool length compensation mode.
:
G40 G49 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z100. ;
N1 G43 G01 Z100. F500 H2 ; ......Start of tool length compensation
N2 G42 X10. Y10. D1 ;........................Start of cutter compensation
N3 Z0 ;
N4 X100. ;
N5 Y100. ;
N6 H3 ; ........................ Tool length compensation (number) change
N7 X10. ;
N8 Y10. ;
N9 G91Z-5. ;........ Incremental command for the compensation axis
N10 G90 Z-5. ;..........Absolute command for the compensation axis
:
In N6, a tool length compensation change (H code) is specified in
cutter compensation (G42) mode and tool length compensation (G43)
mode. The operation to be performed in this case is as described
below, depending on the setting of bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No.
5000.

In block N6, the tool moves along the axis by the change in tool
length compensation.

In block N6, no movement is performed.
Block N9 contains an incremental command and, therefore, the
movement by the tool length compensation change is not
performed. The tool moves by the travel distance specified in the
program (-5.000).
Block N10 contains the absolute command for the compensation
axis that is specified first after the tool length compensation
change and, therefore, the tool length compensation change is
reflected in this block.
- 133 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example in which the tool length compensation is overwritten

during operation)
The following explains the operation to be performed if continuous
operation is executed with the program below, with bit 6 (EVO) of
parameter No. 5001 being 1, and tool compensation No. 2 is changed
during the execution of N3.
:
G40 G49 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z100. ;
N1 G43 G01 Z100. F500 H2 ;
N2 G42 X10. Y10. D1 ;
N3 Z0 ;
N4 X100. ;
N5 Y100. ;
N6 X10. ;
N7 Y10. ;
N8 G91Z-5. ;
N9 G90 Z-5. ;
:

Change tool length compensation (No. 2) during execution
Incremental command for the compensation axis

Absolute command for the compensation axis

In N6 (first buffered block after the tool compensation is
changed), the tool moves along the axis by the change in tool
Block N6 is the first block after the tool compensation is changed,
but this block does not contain a compensation axis command,
and the movement by the change in tool length compensation is
not performed.
Block N8 contains a compensation axis command, but the
command is an incremental one, and the movement by the
change in tool length compensation is not performed. The tool
moves by the travel distance specified in the program (-5.000).
Block N9 contains the first absolute command for the
compensation axis that is specified after the tool length
compensation is changed and, therefore, the movement by the
change in tool length compensation is performed in this block.
- 134 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
2
3
4
5
6
CAUTION
Specifying tool length compensation (a shift type)
first and then executing an incremental
programming causes the tool length compensation
value to be reflected in the coordinates only, not in
the travel distance of the machine; executing an
absolute programming causes the tool length
compensation value to be reflected in both the
movement of the machine and the coordinates.
If a programmable mirror image is effective, the tool
length compensation is applied in the specified
direction.
No scaling magnification is applied to the tool length
compensation value.
No coordinate system rotation is applied to the tool
length compensation value. Tool length
compensation is effective in the direction in which
the offset is applied.
With the WINDOW command, changing parameter
TOS during automatic operation does not cause the
tool length compensation type to be changed.
If offset has been performed on two or more axes
with tool length compensation B, a G49 command
causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0
causes the offset to be canceled only on the axis
vertical to the specified plane.
If the tool length compensation value is changed by
changing the offset number, this simply means that
the value is replaced by a new tool length
compensation value; it does not mean that a new
tool length compensation value is added to the old
tool length compensation.
- 135 -
PROGRAMMING
10
11
B-64304EN-2/01
CAUTION
If reference position return (G28 or G30) has been
specified, tool length compensation is canceled for
the axis specified at the time of positioning on the
reference point; however, tool length compensation
is not canceled for an un-specified axis. If
reference position return has been specified in the
same block as that containing tool length
compensation cancel (G49), tool length
compensation is canceled for both the specified and
un-specified axes at the time of positioning on the
mid-point.
With a machine coordinate system command
(G53), tool length compensation is canceled for the
axis specified at the time of positioning on the
specified point.
The tool length compensation vector canceled by
specifying G53, G28, or G30 during tool length
compensation is restored as described below:
For tool length compensation types A and B, if
parameter EVO (No. 5001#6) is 1, the vector is
restored in the block buffered next; for all of tool
length compensation types A, B, and C, it is
restored in a block containing an H, G43, or G44
command if parameter is 0.
When a tool length compensation shift type is used,
if the start or cancellation of a tool length
compensation or other command is specified cutter
compensation mode, look-ahead is not performed.
As a result, overcutting or undercutting may occur
before or after the block in which the start or
cancellation is specified. Thus, specify the start and
cancellation of tool length compensation before the
entry to cutter compensation mode or at a location
where machining is not affected.
- 136 -
B-64304EN-2/01
6.3
PROGRAMMING
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37)

By issuing G37 the tool starts moving to the measurement position
and keeps on moving till the approach end signal from the
measurement device is output. Movement of the tool is stopped when
the tool nose reaches the measurement position.
Difference between coordinate value when tool reaches the
measurement position and coordinate value commanded by G37 is
added to the tool length compensation amount currently used.
Z
Rapid
traverse
A (Start point)
Measurement position is commanded
with G37
B (Deceleration position)
Measurement
feedrate
C (Measurement position)
The tool stops when the approach end
signal goes on.
X
Compensation value = (Current compensation value) + [(Coordinates of the

point at which the tool is stopped) - (Coordinates of the programmed measure
ment position)]
Fig. 6.3 (a) Automatic tool length measurement
Format
G92 IP_ ;
Sets the workpiece coordinate system.

(It can be set with G54 to G59. See
Chapter "Coordinate System" in Users
Manual (Common to T/M series.))
Hxx ;
Specifies an offset number for tool
G90 G37 IP_ ; Absolute programming
G37 is valid only in the block in which it is specified.
IP_ indicates the X-, Y-, Z-, or fourth axis.
Explanation
- Setting the workpiece coordinate system
Set the workpiece coordinate system so that a measurement can be
made after moving the tool to the measurement position. The
coordinate system must be the same as the workpiece coordinate
system for programming.
- 137 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Specifying G37
Specify the absolute coordinates of the correct measurement position.
Execution of this command moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate
toward the measurement position, reduces the federate halfway, then
continuous to move it until the approach end signal from the
measuring instrument is issued. When the tool nose reaches the
measurement position, the measuring instrument sends an approach
end signal to the CNC which stops the tool.
- Changing the offset value

The difference between the coordinates of the position at which the
tool reaches for measurement and the coordinates specified by G37 is
added to the current tool length compensation value. (If parameter
MDC (No. 6210#6) is 1, it is subtracted.)
Offset value =
(Current compensation value) + [(Coordinates of the position at which
the tool reaches for measurement) - (Coordinates specified by G37)]
These offset values can be manually changed from MDI.
- Alarm
When automatic tool length measurement is executed, the tool moves
as shown in Fig. 6.2 (b). If the approach end signal goes on while the
tool is traveling from point B to point C, an alarm occurs. Unless the
approach end signal goes on before the tool reaches point F, the same
alarm occurs. The alarm number is PS0080.
Rapid
traverse
Start
point
Deceleration
feedrate
(measurement
feedrate)
B
Approach end signal ON

E
F
Position commanded
by G37
Permitted range of approach end signal
Fig. 6.3 (b)
Tool movement to the measurement position
CAUTION
When a manual movement is inserted into a
movement at a measurement federate, return the
tool to the position before the inserted manual
movement for restart.
- 138 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
NOTE
1 When an H code is specified in the same block as
G37, an alarm is generated. Specify H code before
the block of G37.
2 The measurement speed (FP), , and are set as
parameters (FP: No. 6241, : No. 6251, : No.
6254) by the machine tool builder. Make settings
so that e are always positive and are always
greater than .
3 When tool offset memory A is used, the offset
value is changed. When tool offset memory C is
used, the tool wear compensation value for the H
code is changed.
4 A delay or variation in detection of the
measurement position arrival signal is 0 to 2 msec
on the CNC side excluding the PMC side.
Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2
msec and a delay or variation (including a delay or
variation on the receiver side) in propagation of the
skip signal on the PMC side, multiplied by the
feedrate set in parameter No. 6241.
5 A delay or variation in time after detection of the
measurement position arrival signal until a feed
stops is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the amount of
overrun, further consider a delay in
acceleration/deceleration, servo delay, and delay
on the PMC side.
- 139 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
G92 Z760.0 X1100.0 ; Sets a workpiece coordinate system with
respect to the programmed absolute zero
point.
G00 G90 X850.0 ;
Moves the tool to X850.0.
That is the tool is moved to a position that is a
specified distance from the measurement
position along the Z-axis.
H01 ;
Specifies offset number 1.
G37 Z200.0 ;
Moves the tool to the measurement position.
G00 Z204.0 ;
Retracts the tool a small distance along the
Z-axis.
For example, if the tool reaches the measurement position with
Z198.0;, the compensation value must be corrected. Because the
correct measurement position is at a distance of 200 mm, the
compensation value is lessened by 2.0 mm (198.0 - 200.0 = -2.0).
Z
760
200
Measurement
position along Z axis
0
850
- 140 -
1100
B-64304EN-2/01
6.4
PROGRAMMING
TOOL OFFSET (G45 - G48)

The programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased or
decreased by a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value.
The tool offset function can also be applied to an additional axis.
Workpiece
Tool center path
Tool
Programmed path
Format
G45 IP_ D_ ; Increase the travel distance by the tool
offset value
G46 IP_ D_ ; Decrease the travel distance by the tool
offset value
G47 IP_ D_ ; Increase the travel distance by twice the
tool offset value
G48 IP_ D_ ; Decrease the travel distance by twice the
tool offset value
G45 to 48 : One-shot G code for increasing or decreasing
the travel distance
IP_
: Command for moving the tool
D_
Code for specifying the tool offset value
* If bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 ="0", setting bit 5
(TPH) of parameter No. 5001 to "1" enables address H to
be used as a code for specifying a tool position offset
value.
- 141 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
- Increase and decrease
As shown in Table 6.4 (a), the travel distance of the tool is increased
or decreased by the specified tool offset value.
In the absolute mode, the travel distance is increased or decreased as
the tool is moved from the end point of the previous block to the
position specified by the block containing G45 to G48.
Table 6.4 (a) Increase and decrease of the tool travel distance
G code
When a positive tool offset

value is specified
When a negative tool offset

value is specified
Start point
End point
Start point
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
Start point
End point
End point
G45
G46
G47
G48
Programmed movement distance

Tool offset value
Actual movement position
If a move command with a travel distance of zero is specified in the

incremental programming (G91) mode, the tool is moved by the
distance corresponding to the specified tool offset value.
If a move command with a travel distance of zero is specified in the
absolute programming (G90) mode, the tool is not moved.
- Tool offset value

Once selected by D code, the tool offset value remains unchanged
until another tool offset value is selected.
Tool offset values can be set within the following range:
D0 always indicates a tool offset value of zero.
*
If bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 ="0", setting bit 5 (TPH) of

parameter No. 5001 to "1" enables address H to be used as a code
for specifying a tool position offset value.
- 142 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
CAUTION
1 When G45 to G48 is specified to n axes (n=1-4)
simultaneously in a motion block, offset is applied to
all n axes.
When the cutter is offset only for cutter radius or
diameter in taper cutting, overcutting or undercutting
occurs.
Therefore, use cutter compensation (G40 - G42)
shown in II-6.4 or 6.6.
Shape actually cut
Desired
shape
Y axis
Overcutting
X axis
G01 X_ F_ ;
G47 X_ Y_ D_ ;
Y_ ;
Desired shape
Shape actually cut

Y axis
Undercutting
X axis
G01 G45 X_ F_ D_;

X_ Y_ ;
G45 Y_ ;
2 G45 to G48 (tool offset) must not be used in the

G41 or G42 (cutter compensation) mode.
- 143 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
1 When the specified direction is reversed by
decrease as shown in the figure below, the tool
moves in the opposite direction.
Movement of the
Program command
End
position
Start
position
Tool offset value

Example
G46 X2.50 ;
Tool offset value
+3.70
Equivalent command
X-1.20 ;
2 Tool offset can be applied to circular interpolation

(G02, G03) with the G45 to G48 commands only for
1/4 and 3/4 circles using addresses I, J and K by the
parameter setting, providing that the coordinate
system rotation be not specified at the same time.
This function is provided for compatibility with the
conventional CNC program without any cutter
compensation. The function should not be used
when a new CNC program is prepared.
Tool offset for circular interpolation
N4
N3
Programmed tool path
Program
N1 G46 G00 X_ Y_ D_ ;
N2 G45 G01 Y_ F_ ;
N3 G45 G03 X_ Y_ I_ ;
N4 G01 X_ ;
N2
Actual tool path

N1
3 D code should be used in tool offset mode.

4 G45 to G48 are ignored in canned cycle mode.
Perform tool offset by specifying G45 to G48 before
entering canned cycle mode and cancel the offset
after releasing the canned cycle mode.
- 144 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
Program using tool offset
N12
N11
30R
N9
N10
40
N13
N8
30R
N4
40
N3
N1
Y axis
N5
N2
N6
N7
50
N14
X
Origin
Tool diameter
Offset No.
Tool offset value
80
50
40
30
30
: 20
: 01
: +10.0
Program
N1 G91 G46 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 D01 ;
N2 G47 G01 X50.0 F120.0 ;
N3 Y40.0 ;
N4 G48 X40.0 ;
N5 Y-40.0 ;
N6 G45 X30.0 ;
N7 G45 G03 X30.0 Y30.0 J30.0 ;
N8 G45 G01 Y20.0 ;
N9 G46 X0 ; (Decreases toward the positive direction for movement
amount "0". The tool moves in the -X direction by the
offset value.)
N10 G46 G02 X-30.0 Y30.0 J30.0 ;
N11 G45 G01 Y0 ; (Increase toward the positive direction for
movement amount "0". The tool moves in the +Y
direction by the offset value.)
N12 G47 X-120.0 ;
N13 G47 Y-80.0 ;
N14 G46 G00 X-80.0 Y-50.0 ;
- 145 -
6.5
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
OVERVIEW OF CUTTER COMPENSATION (G40-G42)

When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of
the tool (Fig. 6.5 (a)).
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates
an offset vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start-up).
The offset vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the
vector is on the workpiece side and the head positions to the center of
the tool.
If a linear interpolation or circular interpolation command is specified
after start-up, the tool path can be shifted by the length of the offset
vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the
cutter compensation mode.
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Start-up
Fig. 6.5 (a) Outline of cutter compensation
- 146 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Format
- Start up (cutter compensation start)
G00(or G01)G41(or G42) IP_D_;
G41
G42
IP_
D_
:
:
:
:
Cutter compensation left (Group 07)

Cutter compensation right (Group 07)
Command for axis movement
Code for specifying as the cutter compensation
value (1-3 digits) (D code)
* Setting bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 to "1" enables

address H to be used as a code for specifying a cutter
compensation amount. When bit 2 (OFH) of parameter
No. 5001 = "1", if tool length compensation and cutter
compensation are specified in the same block, the latter
command takes precedence.
- Cutter compensation cancel (offset mode cancel)

G40 IP_;
G40
IP_
: Cutter compensation cancel (Group 07)

(Offset mode cancel)
: Command for axis movement
- Selection of the offset plane

Offset plane
Command for plane selection
IP_
XpYp
ZpXp
YpZp
G17 ;
G18 ;
G19 ;
Xp_Yp_
Xp_Zp_
Yp_Zp_
Explanation
- Offset cancel mode
At the beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancel
mode. In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center
path coincides with the programmed path.
- Start-up
When a cutter compensation command (G41 or G42, nonzero
dimension word in the offset plane and command 0 in a non-D0 D
code) is specified in the offset cancel mode, the CNC enters the offset
mode.
Moving the tool with this command is called start-up.
Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up.
If circular interpolation (G02, G03) is specified, alarm PS0034 occurs.
For the start-up and subsequent blocks, the CNC prereads as many
blocks as the number of preread blocks set in the parameter (No.
19625).
- 147 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Offset mode
In the offset mode, compensation is accomplished by positioning
(G00), linear interpolation (G01), or circular interpolation (G02, G03).
If three or more blocks that move the tool cannot be read in offset
mode, the tool may make either an excessive or insufficient cut.
If the offset plane is switched in the offset mode, alarm PS0037 occurs
and the tool is stopped.
- Offset mode cancel

In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the
following conditions is executed, the CNC enters the offset cancel
mode, and the action of this block is called the offset cancel.
1. G40 has been commanded.
2. 0 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter
compensation (D code).
When performing offset cancel, circular arc command (G02 or G03) is
not available. If these commands are specified, an PS0034 is
generated and the tool stops. In the offset cancel, the control
executes the instructions in that block and the block in the cutter
compensation buffer.
In the meantime, in the case of a single block mode, after reading one
block, the control executes it and stops. By pushing the cycle start
button once more, one block is executed without reading the next
block.
Then the control is in the cancel mode, and normally, the block to be
executed next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is
not read into the buffer for cutter compensation.
Start up
(G41/G42)
Offset cancel mode
Offset mode cancel
Offset mode
(G40/D0)
Fig. 6.5 (b)
Changing the offset mode
- Change of the cutter compensation value

In general, the cutter compensation value shall be changed in the
cancel mode, when changing tools. If the cutter compensation value
is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point of the block is
calculated for the new cutter compensation value.
Calculated from the cutter
compensation value in the block N7
Calculated from the cutter

compensation value in the block N6
N7
N6
N8
Programmed path
Fig. 6.5 (c) Changing the cutter compensation value
- 148 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Positive/negative cutter compensation value and tool center path

If the compensation value is negative (), distribution is made for a
figure in which G41's and G42's are all replaced with each other on
the program. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the
outside of the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vice versa.
Fig. 6.5 (d) shows one example.
Generally, the compensation value is programmed to be positive (+).
When a tool path is programmed as in <1>, if the compensation value
is made negative (), the tool center moves as in <2>, and vice versa.
Consequently, the same program permits cutting both male and female
shapes, and any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of
the compensation value.
Applicable if start-up and cancel is A type. (See the descriptions
about the start-up of cutter compensation.)
<2>
<1>
Tool center path
Programmed path
Fig. 6.5 (d)
Tool center paths when positive and negative cutter

compensation values are specified
- Cutter compensation value setting

Assign a cutter compensation values to the D codes on the MDI panel.
NOTE
The cutter compensation value for which the D
code corresponds to 0 always means 0.
It is not possible to set the cutter compensation
value corresponding to D0.
- 149 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Valid compensation value range

The valid range of values that can be set as a compensation value is
either of the following, depending on the bits 1 (OFC) and 0 (OFA)
parameter No. 5042.
Valid compensation range (metric input)
OFC
OFA
Range
0
0
1
9999.99mm
9999.999mm
9999.9999mm
1
0
0
Valid compensation range (inch input)

OFC
OFA
Range
0
0
1
999.999inch
999.9999inch
999.99999inch
1
0
0
The compensation value corresponding to offset No. 0 always means 0.

It is not possible to set the compensation value corresponding to offset
No. 0.
- Offset vector
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the
cutter compensation value assigned by D code. It is calculated inside
the control unit, and its direction is up-dated in accordance with the
progress of the tool in each block.
The offset vector is deleted by reset.
- Specifying a cutter compensation value

Specify a cutter compensation value with a number assigned to it.
The number consists of 1 to 3 digits after address D (D code).
The D code is valid until another D code is specified. The D code is
used to specify the tool offset value as well as the cutter compensation
value.
- Plane selection and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18
and G19, (G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the
offset plane.
Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is
not in the specified plane. The programmed values are used as they
are.
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset
plane is compensated.
The offset plane is changed during the offset cancel mode. If it is
performed during the offset mode, an PS0037 is displayed and the
machine is stopped.
- 150 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
250R
N5
C1(700,1300)
P4(500,1150)
C3
P5(900,1150)
(-150,1150)
C2 (1550,1150)
650R
650R
N6
N4
N7
N3
P2
P6(950,900)
P3(450,900)
P7
(250,900)
(1150,900)
N8
N2
P9(700,650)
P1
(250,550)
P8
(1150,550)
N10
N9
Y axis
N1
N11
X axis
Start point
- 151 -
Unit : mm
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; .................................................. Specifies

N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
absolute coordinates.
The tool is positioned at the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0 ; .............. Starts cutter compensation (start-up).
The tool is shifted to the left of the programmed path by
the distance specified in D07.
In other words the tool path is shifted by the radius of
the tool (offset mode) because D07 is set to 15
beforehand (the radius of the tool is 15 mm).
G01 Y900.0 F150 ; ............................................. Specifies machining from P1 to P2.
X450.0 ; ............................................................ Specifies machining from P2 to P3.
G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ; ............................. Specifies machining from P3 to P4.
G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ; ......................................... Specifies machining from P4 to P5.
G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ; ............................... Specifies machining from P5 to P6.
G01 X1150.0 ;.................................................... Specifies machining from P6 to P7.
Y550.0 ; ............................................................ Specifies machining from P7 to P8.
X700.0 Y650.0 ; ................................................. Specifies machining from P8 to P9.
X250.0 Y550.0 ; ................................................. Specifies machining from P9 to P1.
G00 G40 X0 Y0 ; ................................................ Cancels the offset mode.
The tool is returned to the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
Notes
- Bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No.5001
If bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is set, cutter compensation takes
precedence over tool length compensation. Concrete explanations
follow:
If OFH = "0":
Processing is carried out properly according to a selected modal
state (G43, G44, or G49).
If OFH = "1":
In a block where G40, G41, or G42 is specified, tool length
compensation is disabled.
In the G40 mode, processing is carried out properly according to
a selected modal state (G43, G44, or G49).
In the G41 and G42 modes, tool length compensation is enabled
only in a block in which G43, G44, or G49 is specified. No
compensation amount is updated only with the H code.
G49 is enabled if G49 is specified in the same block as for G40,
however.
- 152 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
6.6
DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION
6.6.1
Overview
- Inner side and outer side

When an angle of intersection of the tool paths specified with move
commands for two blocks on the workpiece side is over 180, it is
referred to as "inner side." When the angle is between 0 and 180, it
is referred to as "outer side."
Inner side
Outer side
Programmed path
Workpiece
Workpiece
Programmed path
0<180
180
- Outer corner connection method

If the tool moves around an outer corner in cutter compensation mode,
it is possible to specify whether to connect compensation vectors with
linear interpolation or with circular interpolation, using parameter
CCC (No. 19607#2).
<1> Linear connection type
[Bit 2 (CCC) of parameter
No.19607 = 0]
Vectors are connected with linear
interpolation.
- 153 -
<2> Circular connection type

[Bit 2 (CCC) of
parameter No.19607 = 0]
Vectors are connected with circular
interpolation.
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Cancel mode
The cutter compensation enters the cancel mode under the following
conditions. (The system may not enter the cancel mode depending
on the machine tool.)
<1> Immediately after the power is turned on
<2> When the
key on the MDI panel is pushed
<3> After a program is forced to end by executing M02 or M30

<4> After the cutter compensation cancel command (G40) is
exercised
In the cancel mode, the compensation vector is set to zero, and the
path of the center of tool coincides with the programmed path. A
program must end in cancel mode. If it ends in the cutter
compensation mode, the tool cannot be positioned at the end point,
and the tool stops at a location the compensation vector length away
from the end point.
NOTE
The operation to be performed when a reset operation
is performed during cutter compensation differs
depending on bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402.
- If CLR is 0
The system enters the reset state. G41/G42 are
retained as the modal code of group 07, but to
perform cutter compensation, an offset number (D
code) must be specified again.
- If CLR is 1
The system enters the clear state. The modal code
of group 07 is G40, and to perform cutter
compensation again, G41/G42 and an offset
number (D code) must be specified.
- Start-up
When a block which satisfies all the following conditions is executed
in cancel mode, the CNC enters the cutter compensation mode.
Control during this operation is called start-up.
<1> G41 or G42 is contained in the block, or has been specified to
place the CNC in the cutter compensation mode.
<2> 0 < compensation number of cutter compensation maximum
compensation number
<3> Positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) mode
<4> A compensation plane axis command with a travel distance of 0
(except start-up type C) is specified.
If start-up is specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03) mode,
PS0034 will occur.
As a start-up operation, one of the three types A, B, and C can be
selected by setting parameter SUP (No. 5003#0) and parameter SUV
(No. 5003#1) appropriately. The operation to be performed if the
tool moves around an inner side is of single type only.
- 154 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
SUV
SUP
Table 6.6.1 (a) Start-up/cancel operation

Type
Operation
Type A
A compensation vector is output, which is vertical

to the block subsequent to the start-up block and
the block preceding the cancel block.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
Type B
A compensation vector is output, which is vertical

to the start-up block and the cancel block. An
intersection vector is also output.
Intersection
Tool center path
Programmed path
G41
N2
N1
0
1
Type C
When the start-up block and the cancel block are

blocks without tool movement, the tool moves by
the cutter compensation value in the direction
vertical to the block subsequent to the start-up
block and the block preceding the cancel block.
Intersection
Programmed
path
Tool center path
N3
Programmed path
N2
G41
N1
For a block with tool movement, the tool follows

the SUP setting: If it is 0, type A is assumed and
if 1, type B is assumed.
- Reading input commands in cutter compensation mode

In cutter compensation mode, input commands are read from usually
three blocks and up to eight blocks depending on the setting of
parameter (No. 19625) to perform intersection calculation or an
interference check, described later, regardless of whether the blocks
are with or without tool movement, until a cancel command is
received.
To perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two
blocks with tool movement. To perform an interference check, it is
necessary to read at least three blocks with tool movement.
- 155 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
As the setting of parameter (No. 19625), that is, the number of blocks
to read, increases, it is possible to predict overcutting (interference)
for up to more subsequent commands. Increases in blocks to read
and analyze, however, cause reading and analysis to take more time.
- Ending (canceling) cutter compensation

In cutter compensation mode, cutter compensation is canceled if a
block that satisfies at least either one of the following conditions is
executed:
<1> G40 is specified.
<2> D00 is specified as the compensation number of cutter
compensation.
If cutter compensation cancel is to be performed, it must not be by a
circular command (G02, G03). Otherwise, an alarm will occur.
For a cancel operation, one of three types, A, B, and C, can be
selected by appropriately setting parameter SUP (No. 5003#0) and
parameter SUV (No. 5003#1). The operation to be performed if the
tool turns around the inside is of a single type.
- Meaning of symbols
The following symbols are used in subsequent figures:
S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once.
SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice.
SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three
times.
L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line.
C indicates that the tool moves along an arc.
r indicates the cutter compensation value.
An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two
blocks intersect with each other after they are shifted by r.
indicates the center of the tool.
- 156 -
B-64304EN-2/01
6.6.2
PROGRAMMING
Tool Movement in Start-up

When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool
moves as illustrated below (start-up):
Explanation
- Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (180 )
LinearLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
G42
Tool center path
L
Start point
LinearCircular
S
L
Start point
- 157 -
Workpiece
G42
Tool center path Programmed path
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an obtuse angle (90 <180)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by
parameter SUP (No.5003#0).
Start point
LinearLinear
G42
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
S
Type
A
LinearCircular
Tool center path
Start point
G42
Work
Workpiece
piece
r
S
Tool center path

LinearLinear
(Linear connection type)
Start point
G42
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
Type
B
Intersection
LinearCircular
Programmed path
Tool center path
Start point
G42
L
r
S
L
Intersection
- 158 -
Workpiece
C
L
Tool center path
Programmed path
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
Start point
G42
Workpiece
L
Programmed path
r
C
Type
B
LinearCircular
Tool center path
Start point
(Circular
connection type)
G42
L
r
Workpiece
r
C
S
C
Tool center path
- 159 -
Programmed path
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an acute angle (<90)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by
parameter SUP (No.5003#0).
LinearLinear
Start point
G42
Workpiece
Programmed path
Type
A
S
LinearCircular
Tool center path
Start point
G42
Workpiece
S C
Tool center path

Programmed path
LinearLinear
Start point
L
G42
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
Type
B
S
LinearCircular
Tool center path
Start point
L
G42
r
L
L
Workpiece
Tool center path

Programmed path
- 160 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
Start point
L
r
G42
Workpiece
Programmed path
Type
B
Tool center path
Start point
LinearCircular
(Circular
connection type)
L
r
G42
Workpiece
S C
Tool center path
Programmed path
- Tool movement around the outside linear linear at an acute angle less than 1
degree (<1)
S
L
r
L
(G41)
G41 Less than 1 deg
- 161 -
Tool center path
Programmed path
Start point
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- A block without tool movement specified at start-up

For type A and B
If the command is specified at start-up, the offset vector is not
created. The tool does not operate in a start-up block.
N7
SS
S
N6
N8
r
Tool center path
G40 ;
N9
N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
N7 G41 X0 ;
N8 Y-100.0 ;
N9 Y-100.0 X100.0 ;
Programmed path
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical
to the block with tool movement subsequent to the start-up block.
Without tool
movement
L
Programmed path
S
L
S
Intersection
- 162 -
Tool center path
B-64304EN-2/01
6.6.3
PROGRAMMING
Tool Movement in Offset Mode

In offset mode, compensation is performed even for positioning
commands, not to speak of linear and circular interpolations. To
perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two
blocks with tool movement. If, therefore, two or more blocks with
tool movement cannot be read in offset mode because blocks without
tool movement, such as auxiliary function independent commands and
dwell, are specified in succession, excessive or insufficient cutting
may occur because intersection calculation fails. Assuming the
number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined by
parameter (No. 19625), to be N and the number of commands in those
N blocks without tool movement that have been read to be M, the
condition under which intersection calculation is possible is (N - 2)
M. For example, if the maximum number of blocks to read in offset
mode is 5, intersection calculation is possible even if up to three
blocks without tool movement are specified.
NOTE
The condition necessary for an interference check,
described later, differs from this condition. For
details, see the explanation of the item,
interference check.
If a G or M code in which buffering is suppressed is specified, no
subsequent commands can be read before that block is executed,
regardless of the setting of parameter (No. 19625). Excessive or
insufficient cutting may, therefore, occur because of an intersection
calculation failure.
- 163 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool movement around the inside of a corner (180 )

LinearLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
S
Intersection
Tool center path
LinearCircular
Workpiece
Intersection
S
L
Tool center path
Programmed path
CircularLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
L
C
CircularCircular
S
Intersection
Intersection
C
Workpiece
Tool center
path
- 164 -
Tool center path
Programmed path
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Tool movement around the inside (<1) with an abnormally long vector, linear
linear
Intersection
r
Tool center path

Programmed path
r
S
Intersection
Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc,
the reader should infer in the same procedure.
- 165 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle (90<180)

LinearLinear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
Programmed path
S
Intersection
Tool center path
LinearCircular
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
L
S L
Intersection
C
Tool center path
Programmed path
CircularLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
C
L
Intersection S
L
6
CircularCircular
(Linear
connection type)
Tool center path
Programmed path
Tool center
path
- 166 -
r
C
Workpiece
S L
Intersection
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
LinearCircular
(Circular
connection type)
r
L
Workpiece
r
C
Tool center path

CircularLinear
(Circular
connection type)
Programmed path
Workpiece
Programmed path
C
C
Tool center path
CircularCircular
(Circular
connection type)
Programmed path
C
Tool center path
- 167 -
Workpiece
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle (<90)

LinearLinear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
S
LinearCircular
(Linear
connection type)
Tool center path
Workpiece
r
L
S
C
Tool center path
Programmed path
CircularLinear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
S
Tool center path
CircularCircular
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
r
L
S
C
Tool center path
- 168 -
Programmed path
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
L
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
C
S
LinearCircular
(Circular
connection type)
Tool center path
Workpiece
r
C
S
Programmed path
Tool center path

CircularLinear
(Circular
connection type)
C
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
CircularCircular
(Circular
connection type)
Workpiece
C
S
Tool center path
- 169 -
Programmed path
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- When it is exceptional
End point for the arc is not on the arc
If the end of a line leading to an arc is not on the arc as illustrated
below, the system assumes that the cutter compensation has been
executed with respect to an imaginary circle that has the same center
as the arc and passes the specified end point. Based on this
assumption, the system creates a vector and carries out compensation.
The same description applies to tool movement between two circular
paths.
End the arc
Workpiece
Imaginary circle
Programmed path
Tool center path
Center of the arc
L S
There is no inner intersection

If the cutter compensation value is sufficiently small, the two circular
tool center paths made after compensation intersect at a position (P).
Intersection P may not occur if an excessively large value is specified
for cutter compensation. When this is predicted, PS0033 occurs at
the end of the previous block and the tool is stopped.
In the Example shown below, tool center paths along arcs A and B
intersect at P when a sufficiently small value is specified for cutter
compensation. If an excessively large value is specified, this
intersection does not occur.
Alarm occurs and the tool stops
When the cutter compensation

value is large
When the cutter compensation
value is small
Center of the arc B
Programmed path
r
Arc A
- 170 -
Center of the arc A

r
Arc B
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- When the center of the arc is identical with the start point or the end point
If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end point,
PS0041 is displayed, and the tool will stop at the start point of the
preceding block of the arc.
(G41)
N5 G91 G01 X50.0 ;
N6 X50.0 ;
N7 G02 X100.0 I0 J0 ;
N8 G01 Y-100.0 ;
Tool center path

Alarm is displayed and the
tool stops
N5
N6
N7
Programmed path
N8
- Change in the offset direction in the offset mode

The offset direction is decided by G codes (G41 and G42) for cutter
compensation and the sign of the compensation value as follows.
Sign of compensation
+
Left side offset

Right side offset
Right side offset

Left side offset
G code
G41
G42
The offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the offset
direction is changed in a block, a vector is generated at the
intersection of the tool center path of that block and the tool center
path of a preceding block.
However, the change is not available in the start-up block and the
block following it.
- 171 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool center path with an intersection

LinearLinear
S
Workpiece
G42
Intersection
r
Programmed path
r
G41
Workpiece
Tool center path
LinearCircular
C
r
Workpiece
G41
G42
Programmed path
r
Workpiece
L
Tool center path
Intersection
CircularLinear
Workpiece
G42
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
C
S
Intersection
r
G41
Workpiece
CircularCircular
Workpiece
G42
Programmed path
r
r
G41
C
Tool center path
- 172 -
S
Intersection
Workpiece
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Tool center path without an intersection

When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41
and G42, if intersection with the offset path is not required, the vector
normal to block B is created at the start point of block B.
LinearLinear
S
Workpiece
(G42)
G42
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
G41
B
Workpiece
S
G42
Programmed path
G41
Tool center path
L
LinearCircular
Intersection
S
L
L
A
Tool center path

(G41)
(G41)
G42
Programmed path
S
CircularCircular
C
S
An arc whose end position

is not on the arc
C
r
G41
(G42)
Programmed path
(G42)
r
C
r
L S L
Tool center path
- 173 -
Center
Center
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- The length of tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation.
However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was
commanded with address I, J, and K this situation can occur.
In this case of the figure, the cutter compensation is not performed
with more than one circle circumference: an arc is formed from P1 to
P2 as shown. Depending on the circumstances, an alarm may be
displayed due to the item, "Interference Check" described later. To
execute a circle with more than one circumference, the circle must be
specified in segments.
Tool center path Programmed path
N5
N7
P1
(G42)
N5 G01 G91 X500.0 Y-700.0 ;
N6 G41 G02 J-500.0 ;
N7 G42 G01 X500.0 Y700.0 ;
- 174 -
P2
N6
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Cutter compensation G code in the offset mode

The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving
direction in the previous block, irrespective of machining inner or
outer side, by commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41,
G42) in the offset mode, independently. If this code is specified in a
circular command, correct circular motion will not be obtained.
When the direction of offset is expected to be changed by the
command of cutter compensation G code (G41, G42), see "Change in
the offset direction in the offset mode".
LinearLinear
A block specified by G42
G42 mode
L
S
Tool center path
Intersection
CircularLinear
A block specified by G42
G42 mode
C
S Intersection
Programmed path
- 175 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Command canceling the offset vector temporarily

During offset mode, if G92 (workpiece coordinate system setting) or
G52 (local coordinate system setting) is commanded, the offset vector
is temporarily cancelled and thereafter offset mode is automatically
restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves
directly from the intersecting point to the commanded point where
offset vector is canceled.
Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the
intersecting point.
S
S
L
L
L
Tool center path
N5
Programmed path
(G41)
N5 G01 X700.0 Y300.0 ;
N6 X600.0 Y-300.0 ;
N7 G92 X200.0 Y100.0 ;
N8 G01 X800.0 Y400.0 ;
N6
L
S
N8
N7
G92 block
Before specifying G28 (reference position return), G29 (movement

from reference position), G30 (second, third, and fourth reference
position return), and G53 (machine coordinate system selection)
commands, cancel offset mode, using G40. If an attempt is made to
specify any of the commands in offset mode, the offset vector
temporarily disappears.
- 176 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- If I, J, and K are specified in a G00/G01 mode block

At the start of cutter compensation or in that mode, by specifying I, J,
and K in a positioning mode (G00) or linear interpolation mode (G01)
block, it is possible to set the compensation vector at the end point of
that block in the direction vertical to that specified by I, J, and K.
This makes it possible to change the compensation direction
intentionally.
IJ type vector (XY plane)

The following explains the compensation vector (IJ type vector) to be
created on the XY compensation plane (G17 mode). (The same
explanation applies to the KI type vector on the G18 plane and the JK
type vector on the G19 plane.) As shown in the figure below, it is
assumed that the compensation vector (IJ type vector) is the vector
with a size equal to the compensation value and vertical to the
direction specified by I and J, without performing intersection
calculation on the programmed path. I and J can be specified both at
the start of cutter compensation and in that mode. If they are
specified at the start of compensation, any start-up type set in the
appropriate parameter will be invalid, and an IJ type vector is
assumed.
Offset vector direction

In G41 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an
imaginary tool movement direction, and an offset vector is created
vertical to that direction and on the left side.
Compensation vector
I, J, K
In G42 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an

imaginary tool movement direction, and an offset vector is created
vertical to that direction and on the right side.
I, J, K
Compensation vector
- 177 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with
tool movement)
N50
N40
N30
N20
(G40)
N10 G91 G41 X100.0 Y100.0
I1 D1 ;
N20 G04 X1000 ;
N30 G01 F1000 ;
N40 S300 ;
N50 M50 ;
N60 X150. ;
D1
N60
Tool center path
N10
Programmed path
Note) In N10, a vector is

specified with a size of D1
in the direction vertical to
the X axis, using I1.
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation

(without tool movement)
(G40)
N10 G41 I1 D1 ;
N20 G91 X100. Y100. ;
N30 X150. ;
Note) In N10, a vector is
specified with a size
of D1 in the direction
vertical to the X axis,
using I1.
N30
Tool nose radius
center path
N20
Programmed path
N10
D1
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with

tool movement)
(G17 G41 G91 D1)

N10 G00 X150. J50. ;
N20 G02 I50. ;
N30 G00 X-150. ;
Note) In N10, a vector is specified N10
with a size of D1 in the
N30
direction vertical to the Y axis,
using J50.
(I,J)
<2>
N20
<1>
<2>
<1> IJ type vector

<2> Vector determined with
intersection calculation
Tool center path
Programmed path
Path determined with
intersection calculation
- 178 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
If I and J are specified in a block without tool movement in

compensation mode
N30
S S
Start-up/cancel type C
N40
Tool center
path
N20
N50
(I, J)
N10 G41 D1 G01 F1000 ;

N20 G91 X100. Y100. ;
N30 I10. ;
N40 X150. ;
N50 G40 ;
Programmed path
N10
D1
Limitation
If an IJ type vector is specified, tool interference may occur due to that
vector alone, depending on the direction. If this occurs, no
interference alarm will occur, or no interference avoidance will be
performed. Overcutting may, therefore, result.
Overcutting
(I, J)
Start-up/cancel
Type C
N10 G42 D1 F1000 ;
N20 G91 X100. ;
N30 X100. Y-100. I10. ;
N40 X100. Y-100. ;
N50 G40 ;
Programmed
N20
path
N10
N30
N40
N50
Tool center path
- A block without tool movement

The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the
tool will not move even if cutter compensation is effected.
M05 ;
S21 ;
G04 X10.0 ;
G22 X100000 ;
G10 L11 P01 R10.0 ;
(G17) Z200.0 ;
G90 ;, O10 ;, N20 ;
G91 X0 ;
- 179 -
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
M code output
S code output
Dwell
Machining area setting
Cutter compensation value setting/changing
Move command not included in the offset plane.
G, O, and N codes only
Move distance is zero.
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- A block without tool movement specified in offset mode

Unless the number of blocks without movement consecutively
specified is more than N-2 blocks (where N is the number of blocks to
read in offset mode (parameter No. 19625)) in offset mode, the vector
and the tool center path will be as usual. This block is executed at
the single block stop point.
N7
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ;

N7 G04 X10.0 ;
N8 X100.0 ;
N8
N6
Programmed path
Tool center path
SS
Block N7 is executed here.
For an axis command for which the move distance is zero, however, a
vector with a size equal to the compensation value will be created
vertical to the movement direction in the previous block, even if the
number of block is 1. Note that specifying such a command may
result in overcutting.
N7
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ;

N7 X0 ;
N8 X100.0 ;
N8
N6
Programed path
Tool center path
SS
L
In offset mode, the number of blocks without movement consecutively

specified must not exceed N-2 (where N is the number of blocks to
read in offset mode (parameter (No. 19625)). If commanded, a
vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a
normal direction to tool motion in earlier block, so overcutting may
result.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
N7 S21 ;
N8 G04 X10.0 ;
N9 X100.0 ;
(No. of blocks to read in
offset mode = 3)
N7,N8
N6
L
L
- 180 -
N9
Programmed path
Tool center path
SSS
Blocks N7 and N8 are executed here.
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified

If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified in offset mode, it
is no longer possible to read and analyze subsequent blocks regardless
of the number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined
by parameter (No. 19625). Then, intersection calculation and a
interference check, described later, are no longer possible. If this
occurs, overcutting may occur because a vertical vector is output in
the immediately preceding block.
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is not specified
(G42)
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ;
N6 X40.0 ;
:
:
N6
N5
L
L
Programmed path
Tool center path
S
Intersection
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is specified

(G42)
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ;
N6 M50 ;
N7 X40.0 ;
:
:
N6
N7
N5
Programmed path
Tool center path
SS
L
- 181 -
Block N6 is executed here.
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Corner movement
When two or more offset vectors are produced at the end of a block,
the tool moves linearly from one vector to another. This movement
is called the corner movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other (the distance of corner
movement between the vectors is judged short due to the setting of
parameter (No. 5010)), corner movement is not performed. In this
case, the vector to the single block stop point takes precedence and
remains, while other vectors are ignored. This makes it possible to
ignore the very small movements arising from performing cutter
compensation, thereby preventing velocity changes due to interruption
of buffering.
V X
This vector is ignored, if

VX Vlimit and
VY Vlimit
r
Tool center path
N1
N1
V Y
The vector to the single block

stop point remains even if
VX Vlimit and VY Vlimit.
N2
Programmed path
Vlimit is determined with the setting of parameter (No. 5010).
If the vectors are not judged to almost coincide (therefore, are not
erased), movement to turn around the corner is performed. The
corner movement that precedes the single block stop point belongs to
the previous block, while the corner movement that succeeds the
single block stop point belongs to the latter block.
This move belongs to block N6, thus, the feedrate is equal
to that in block N6.
S
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the
feedrate is equal to that in block N7.
N6
N7
However, if the path of the next block is semicircular or more, the

above function is not performed.
- 182 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
The reason for this is as follows:

N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N6 G02 J-600.0 ;
N7 G01 X150.0 Y-200.0 ;
N8 G40 X150.0 Y-200.0 ;
P2 P3 P4 P5
P6
P1
N5 N7
N4
Programmed path
N8
N6
Tool center path
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:

P1 P2 P3 (Circle) P4 P5 P6
But if the distance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the point P3 is
ignored. Therefore, the tool path is as follows:
P2 P4
Namely, circle cutting by the block N6 is ignored.
- Interruption of manual operation

For manual operation during the offset mode, see "Manual Absolute
ON and OFF."
- 183 -
6.6.4
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel
Explanation
- If the cancel block is a block with tool movement, and the tool moves around the
inside (180 )
LinearLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
G40
S
L
CircularLinear
Workpiece
C
Programmed path
- 184 -
G40
S
Tool center path
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
outside at an obtuse angle (90 < 180)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by parameter
SUP (No.5003#0).
LinearLinear
G40
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
Tool center path

Type
A
CircularLinear
G40
L
Workpiece
r
S
C
Programmed path
LinearLinear
(Linear
connection type)
Tool center path
G40
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
Intersection
Tool center path

Type
B
CircularLinear
(Linear
connection type)
G40
L
Workpiece
C
Programmed path
- 185 -
L
Tool center path
r
S
Inter- L
section
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
G40
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
C
Tool center path

Type
B
CircularLinear
(Circular
connection type)
G40
L
Workpiece
r
C
C
Programmed path
- 186 -
Tool center path
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
outside at an acute angle (<90)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by parameter
SUP (No.5003#0).
LinearLinear
Workpiece
Programmed path
G40
G42
r
Tool center path

Type
A
CircularLinear
G40
Workpiece
G42
C
Tool center path

Programmed path
LinearLinear
(Linear
connection type)
L
G40
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
L
Type
B
Tool center path
CircularLinear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
r
L
C
Tool center path

Programmed path
- 187 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
LinearLinear
(Circular
connection type)
L
S
G40
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
Type
B
CircularLinear
(Circular
connection type)
L
S
Workpiece
r
C
Tool center path

Programmed path
outside at an acute angle of 1 degree or less in a linear linear manner (1)
S
Tool center path
L
r
L
Programmed path
(G42)
G40
- 188 -
1 or less
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- A block without tool movement specified together with offset cancel

For types A and B
In the block preceding the cancel block, a vector is created with a
size equal to the cutter compensation value in the vertical
direction. The tool does not operate in the cancel block. The
remaining vectors are canceled with the next move command.
N7
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ;

N7 G40 ;
N8 X130.0 ;
N8
N6
Programmed path
SS
L
Tool center path
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical
to the block preceding the cancel block.
Programmed path
Tool center path
G40 (without
movement)
L
L
S
- 189 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Block containing G40 and I_J_K_

The previous block contains G41 or G42
If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_
are specified, the system assumes that the path is programmed as a
path from the end point determined by the former block to a vector
determined by (I,J), (I,K), or (J,K). The direction of compensation in
the former block is inherited.
N1 (G42 mode) ;
N2 G40 Xa Yb I_ J_ ;
In the N1 block, the tool nose radius center moves

towards P.
In the N2 block, the tool nose radius moves towards E.
E(a, b)
(I, J)
G40
N2
P
Tool center path

S
N1
(G42)
Programamed path
Workpiece
In this case, note that the CNC obtains an intersection of the tool path
irrespective of whether inner or outer side machining is specified.
E
G40
P
Tool center path
S
r
Programmed path
(G42)
r
(I, J)
When an intersection is not obtainable, the tool comes to the normal

position to the previous block at the end of the previous block.
E
P
G40
Tool center path
S
r
(G42) Programmed path
(I, J)
r
- 190 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Length of the tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
In the Example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more
than once. It moves along the arc from P1 to P2. The interference
check function described below may raise an alarm.
To make the tool trace a circle more than once, program two or more
arcs.
Tool center path
P1
N7
Programmed path
P2
N5
(I, J)
(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X100.0 ;
N6 G02 J-60.0 ;
N7 G40 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 I-10.0 J-10.0 ;
- 191 -
N6
6.6.5
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Prevention of Overcutting Due to Cutter Compensation
Explanation
- Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
Since the cutter compensation forces the tool center path to move in
the reverse of the programmed direction, overcutting will result. In
this case an alarm is displayed and the CNC stops at the start of the
block.
An alarm is displayed and
the operation stops
Tool center path

Programmed path
Workpiece
Overcutting if the operation would not stop
Fig. 6.6.5 (a) Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
- 192 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Machining a step smaller than the tool radius

For a figure in which a workpiece step is specified with an arc, the
tool center path will be as shown in Fig. 6.6.5 (b). If the step is
smaller than the tool radius, the tool center path usually compensated
as shown in Fig. 6.6.5 (c) may be in the direction opposite to the
programmed path. In this case, the first vector is ignored, and the
tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block
operation is stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the
single block mode, the cycle operation is continued.
If the step is of linear, no alarm will be generated and cut correctly.
However uncut part will remain.
Single block stop point
S
Tool center path
Programmed path
S
Arc center
Workpiece
Fig. 6.6.5 (b) Machining a step larger than the tool radius
Single block stop point

Linear movement
Path to be taken if the

vector is not ignored
The first vector is ignored
Tool center path
Programmed path
Workpiece
Arc
Arc center
An overcutting will result if the first vector is not ignored.

However, tool moves linearly.
Fig. 6.6.5 (c) Machining a step smaller than the tool radius
- 193 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Starting compensation and cutting along the Z-axis

It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z
axis after the cutter compensation (normally XY plane) is effected at
some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining. In
the case above, if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis
into rapid traverse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below.
Let us consider the following program, assuming the number of blocks
to read in cutter compensation mode (parameter (No. 19625)) to be 3.
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;
N3 G01 Z-300.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation
Workpiece
N6
N3:Move command in Z axis (one block)

N1
In the program example above, when executing block N1, blocks N3

and N6 are also entered into the buffer storage, and by the relationship
among them the correct compensation is performed as in the figure
above.
Then, suppose that the block N3 (move command in Z axis) is divided
into N3 and N5.
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;
N3 G01 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation
Workpiece
N6
N3, N5:Move command for the Z axis (two blocks)

N1
At this time, because the number of blocks to read is 3, blocks up to

N5 can be read at the start of N1 compensation, but block N6 cannot
be read. As a result, compensation is performed only on the basis of
the information in block N1, and a vertical vector is created at the end
of the compensation start block. Usually, therefore, overcutting will
result as shown in the figure above.
- 194 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
In such a case, it is possible to prevent overcutting by specifying a

command with the exactly the same direction as the advance direction
immediately before movement along the Z axis beforehand, after the
tool is moved along the Z axis using the above rule.
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y400.0 D1 ;
N2 Y100.0 ;
N3 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation
N6
Workpiece
N3, N5 : Move command for the Z axis (2 blocks)

N2
N1
As the block with sequence N2 has the move command in the same
direction as that of the block with sequence N6, the correct
compensation is performed.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent overcutting in the same way by
specifying an IJ type vector with the same direction as the advance
direction in the start-up block, as in N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. I0
J1 D1;, after the tool has moved along the Z axis.
- 195 -
6.6.6
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Interference Check
Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check
function checks for tool overcutting in advance. However, all
interference cannot be checked by this function. The interference
check is performed even if overcutting does not occur.
Explanation
- Condition under which an interference check is possible
To perform an interference check, it is necessary to read at least three
blocks with tool movement. If, therefore, three or more blocks with
tool movement cannot be read in offset mode because blocks without
tool movement, such as independent auxiliary function and dwell, are
specified in succession, excessive or insufficient cutting may occur
because an interference check fails. Assuming the number of blocks
to read in offset mode, which is determined by parameter (No. 19625),
to be N and the number of commands in those N blocks without tool
movement that have been read to be M, the condition under which an
interference check is possible is
(N - 3) M.
For example, if the maximum number of blocks to read in offset mode
is 8, an interference check is possible even if up to five blocks without
tool movement are specified. In this case, three adjacent blocks can
be checked for interference, but any subsequent interference that may
occur cannot be detected.
- Interference check method

Two interference check methods are available, direction check and
circular angle check. Parameter CNC (No. 5008#1) and parameter
CNV (No. 5008#3) are used to specify whether to enable these
methods.
Parameter
CNV
Parameter
CNC
Operation
An interference check is enabled, and a

direction check and a circular angle check can
be performed.
An interference check is enabled, and only a
circular angle check is performed.
An interference check is disabled.
NOTE
There are no settings for performing a direction
check only.
- 196 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Interference reference <1> (direction check)

Assuming the number of blocks to read during cutter compensation to
be N, a check is first performed on the compensation vector group
calculated in (block 1 - block 2) to be output this time and the
compensation vector group calculated in (block N-1 - block N); if they
intersect, they are judged to interfere. If no interference is found, a
check is performed sequentially in the direction toward the
compensation vector group to be output this time, as follows:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-2 - block N-1)
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-3 - block N-2)
:
:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block 2 - block 3)
Even if multiple number of compensation vector groups are generated,
a check is performed on all pairs.
The judgment method is as follows:
For a check on the
compensation vector group in (block 1 - block 2) and those in (block
N-1 - block N), the direction vector from the specified (end point of
block 1) to the (end point of block N-1) is compared with the direction
vector from the (point resulting from adding the compensation vector
to be checked to the end of block 1) to the (point resulting from
adding the compensation vector to be checked to the end of block
N-1), and if the direction is 90o or greater or 270o or less, they are
judged to intersect and interfere. This is called a direction check.
Example of interference standard <1>
(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 7 end-point
vector)
The direction differs by
180.
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 2
Block 7
Block 8
Block 1
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4
- 197 -
Block 5
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Example of interference standard <1>

(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 2 end-point
vector)
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1
The directions of
these two paths are
different (180).
Block 2
- Interference reference <2> (circular angle check)

In a check on three adjacent blocks, that is, a check on the
compensation vector group calculated on (block 1 - block 2) and the
compensation vector group calculated on (block 2 - block 3), if block
2 is circular, a check is performed on the circular angle between the
start and end points of the programmed path and the circular angle of
the start and end point of the post-compensation path, in addition to
direction check <1>. If the difference is 180o or greater, the blocks
are judged to interfere. This is called a circular angle check.
Example of <2> (if block 2 is circular and the start point of the
post-compensation arc coincide with the end point)
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 3
Block 1
Programmed path
Block 2
- 198 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- When interference is assumed although actual interference does not occur

<1> Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation value
Programmed
path
Tool center path
Stopped
C
B
There is no actual interference, but since the direction

programmed in block B is opposite to that of the path after the
cutter compensation, the tool stops and an alarm is displayed.
<2> Groove which is smaller than the cutter compensation value
Programmed
path
Tool center path
Stopped
Like <1>, an alarm is displayed because of the interference as the

direction is reverse in block B.
- 199 -
6.6.6.1
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to

occur
The operation to be performed if an interference check judges that an
interference (due to overcutting) occurs can be either of the following
two, depending on the setting of parameter CAV (No. 19607#5).
6.6.6.2
Parameter
CAV
Function
Interference check
alarm function
Interference check
avoidance function
Operation
An alarm stop occurs before the

execution of the block in which
overcutting (interference) occurs.
The tool path is changed so that
overcutting (interference) does not
occur, and processing continues.
Interference check alarm function
- Interference other than those between adjacent three blocks

If the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 7
are judged to interfere as shown in the figure, an alarm will occur
before the execution of block 1 so that the tool stops. In this case,
the vectors will not be erased.
Stopped
Tool center path
Block 1
Block 8
Programmed path
Block 2
Block 7
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4
- 200 -
Block 5
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Interference between adjacent three blocks

If an interference is judged to occur between adjacent three blocks, the
interfering vector, as well as any vectors existing inside of it, is erased,
and a path is created to connect the remaining vectors. In the
Example shown in the figure below, V2 and V5 interfere, so that V2
and V5 are erased, so are V3 and V4, which are inside of them, and V1
is connected to V6. The operation during this time is linear
interpolation.
V6
V1
V2
V5
V3
V4
Tool center path
Programmed path
If, after vector erasure, the last single vector still interferes, or if there
is only one vector at the beginning and it interferes, an alarm will
occur immediately after the start of the previous block (end point for a
single block) and the tool stops. In the Example shown in the figure
below, V2 and V3 interfere, but, even after erasure, an alarm will occur
because the final vectors V1 and V4 interfere.
Tool center path
Stopped
Programmed path
V4
V3
- 201 -
V1
V2
6.6.6.3
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Interference check avoidance function
Overview
If a command is specified which satisfies the condition under which
the interference check alarm function generates an interference alarm,
this function suppresses the generation of the interference alarm, but
causes a new compensation vector to be calculated as a path for
avoiding interference, thereby continuing machining. For the path
for avoiding interference, insufficient cutting occurs in comparison
with the programmed path. In addition, depending on the specified
figure, no path for avoiding interference can be determined or the path
for avoiding interference may be judged dangerous. In such a case,
an alarm stop will occur. For this reason, it is not always possible to
avoid interference for all commands.
- Interference avoidance method

Let us consider a case in which an interference occurs between the
compensation vector between (block 1 - block 2) and the
compensation vector between (block N-1 - block N). The direction
vector from the end point of block 1 to the end point of block N-1 is
called a gap vector. At this time, a post-compensation intersection
vector between (block 1 - gap vector) and a post-compensation
intersection vector between (gap vector - block N) is determined, and
a path connecting them is created.
Post-compensation intersection vector
between block 1 and gap vector
Post-compensation intersection vector

between gap vector and block 8
Movement o f block 7
Post-compensation
path
Block 1
Gap vector
Block 8
Block 2
Block 7
Programmed path
Block 3
Block 4
Block 6
Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 6 coincide with the end
point of block 1. Thus, after compensation, blocks 2 to 6 will be blocks without tool
movement.
- 202 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
If the post-compensation intersection vector of (block 1 - gap vector)

and the post-compensation intersection vector of (gap vector - block
N) further intersect, vector erasure is first performed in the same way
as in "Interference between adjacent three blocks". If the last vectors
that remains still intersects, the post-compensation intersection vector
of (block 1 - block N) is re-calculated.
Post-compensation path
Re-calculation
Programmed path
Block 8
Block 1
Block 1
Post-compensation
intersection vector
between block 1 and
gap vector
Block 2
Post-compensation
intersection between
gap vector and block 8
Gap vector
Block 7
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4
Block 2
Block 8
Postcompensation
intersection
vector between
block 1 and
block 8
Block 7
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4
Block 5
Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 7

coincide with the end point of block 1. Thus, after compensation,
blocks 2 to 7 will be blocks without tool movement.
- 203 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
If the cutter compensation value is greater than the radius of the

specified arc as shown in the figure below, and a command is
specified which results in compensation with respect to the inside of
the arc, interference is avoided by performing intersection calculation
with an arc command being assumed a linear one. In this case,
avoided vectors are connected with linear interpolation.
Post-compensation path
Programmed path
- 204 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- If no interference avoidance vector exists

If the parallel pocket shown in the figure is to be machined, the
end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 2 are
judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the
post-compensation path of block 1 and the post-compensation path of
block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are parallel to each
other, no intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will occur
immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
If the circular pocket shown in the figure is to be machined, the

block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are circular, no
post-compensation intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will
occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop, as in the
previous example.
Tool center path
Programmed path
Stopped
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
- 205 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference

If the acute-angle pocket shown in the figure is to be machined, the
block 3. In this case, the movement direction of the post-avoidance
path extremely differs from the previously specified direction. If the
post-avoidance path extremely differs from that of the original
command (90 or greater or 270 or less), interference avoidance
operation is judged dangerous; an alarm will occur immediately before
block 1 and the tool will stop.
Post-compensation intersection of
blocks 1 and 3
Tool center path
Stopped
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
If a pocket in which the bottom is wider than the top, such as that
shown in the figure, is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1
and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an
attempt is made to calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the
intersection vector of the post-compensation path of block 1 and the
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, the relation between
blocks 1 and 3 is judged an outer one, the post-avoidance path results
in overcutting as compared with the original command. In such a
case, interference avoidance operation is judge dangerous; an alarm
will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Tool center path
Stopped
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Post-compensation intersection
of blocks 1 and 3
- 206 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- If further interference with an interference avoidance vector occurs

If the pocket shown in the figure is to be machined, if the number of
blocks to read is 3, the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point
vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to
calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector
of the post-compensation path of block 1 and the post-compensation
path of block 3. In this case, however, the end-point vector of block
3 that is to be calculated next further interferes with the previous
interference avoidance vector. If a further interference occurs to the
interference avoidance vector once created and output, the movement
in the block will not be performed; an alarm will occur immediately
before the block and the tool will stop.
The intersection vectors of
blocks 3 and 4 further
interfere.
Tool center path
Sropped
Programmed path
Block 5
Block 4
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
NOTE
1 For "If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference"
and "If further interference with an interference
avoidance vector occurs", by setting parameter
NAA (No. 19607#6) appropriately, it is possible to
suppress an alarm to continue machining. For "If
no interference avoidance vector exists", however,
it is not possible to avoid an alarm regardless of the
setting of this parameter.
2 If a single block stop occurs during interference
avoidance operation, and an operation is performed
which differs from the original movement, such as
manual intervention, MDI intervention, cutter
compensation value change, intersection
calculation is performed with a new path. If such
an operation is performed, therefore, an
interference may occur again although interference
avoidance has been performed once.
- 207 -
6.6.7
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Cutter Compensation for Input from MDI
Explanation
- MDI operation
During MDI operation, that is, if a program command is specified in
MDI mode in the reset state to make a cycle start, intersection
calculation is performed for compensation in the same way as in
memory operation/DNC operation. Compensation is performed in
the same way if a subprogram is called from program memory due to
MDI operation.
Subprogram in program memory
MDI command
G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
M98 P9000 ;
M02 ;
O9000 ;
N1 G41 G17 G91 G01 X10. Y10.
D1 ;
N2 Y15. ;
N3 X15. ;
N4 Y-15. ;
N5 X-15. ;
N6 G40 X-10. Y-10. ;
M99 ;
N3
N2
N4
N1
N5
N6
- 208 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- MDI intervention
If MDI intervention is performed, that is, if a single block stop is
performed to enter the automatic operation stop state in the middle of
memory operation, DNC operation, and the like, and a program
command is specified in MDI mode to make a cycle start, cutter
compensation does not perform intersection calculation, retaining the
last compensation vector before the intervention.
MDI intervention
MEM mode
G91 X30. ;
X20. Y20. ;
X20. Y-20. ;
(G41)
N2 G91 X10. Y30. ;
N3 X10. Y-30. ;
N4 X40. ;
Last compensation vector
MDI intervention
N2
N3
- 209 -
Retained compensation vector
N4
Program command
6.7
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G39)

By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter compensation, corner
circular interpolation can be performed. The radius of the corner
circular interpolation equals the compensation value.
Format
In offset mode
G39 ;
or
I_ J_
G39 I_ K_ ;
J_ K_
Explanation
- Corner circular interpolation
When the command indicated above is specified, corner circular
interpolation in which the radius equals compensation value can be
performed. G41 or G42 preceding the command determines whether
the arc is clockwise or counterclockwise. G39 is a one-shot G code.
- G39 without I, J, or K
When G39 is programmed, the arc at the corner is formed so that the
vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of
the next block.
- G39 with I, J, and K

When G39 is specified with I, J, and K, the arc at the corner is formed
so that the vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the
vector defined by the I, J, and K values.
Limitation
- Move command
In a block containing G39, no move command can be specified.
Otherwise, an alarm will occur.
- Inner corner
In an inner corner block, G39 cannot be specified.
overcutting will occur.
Otherwise,
- Corner arc velocity

If a corner arc is specified with G39 in G00 mode, the corner arc block
velocity will be that of the F command previously specified. If G39
is specified in a state in which no F command has never been specified,
the velocity of the corner arc block will be that specified with
parameter (No. 1411).
- 210 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Example
- G39 without I, J, or K
:
:
(In offset mode)
(G90)
N1 X10.0 ;
N2 G39 ;
N3 Y-10.0 ;
:
:
Y axis
X axis
Block N1
Offset vector
Block N2 (Corner arc)
(10.0, 0.0)
Block N3
Programmed path
Tool center path
(10.0, -10.0)
- G39 with I, J, and K

:
:
(In offset mode)
(G90)
N1 X10.0 ;
N2 G39 I1.0 J-3.0 ;
N3 X0.0 Y-10.0 ;
:
:
Y axis
Block N1
X axis
Offset vector
Tool center path
Block N2 (Corner
arc)
(10.0, 0.0)
Programmed
path
Block N3
(I=-1.0, J=3.0)
(0.0, -10.0)
- 211 -
6.8
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES
FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values
and tool wear compensation (Fig. 6.8 (a)).
Reference
position
OFSG
OFSW
OFSG : Geometry compensation value
OFSW : Wear compensation value
Fig. 6.8 (a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
MDI panel (see section III-1.1.1) or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when
the corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation,
or the tool offset.
Two types of tool compensation memories are available according to
the compensation value configuration: tool compensation memory A
and C. One of the types can be selected (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter
No.8136).
Explanation
- Tool compensation memory A (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 1)
In tool compensation memory A, memory for geometry compensation
and memory for wear compensation are not distinguished from each
other. So, the sum of geometry compensation and wear compensation
values is to be set in the compensation memory. Moreover, no
distinction is made between memory for cutter compensation (for D
code) and memory for tool length compensation (for H code).
Compensation
number
001
002
003
:
Setting example
Compensation value
Common to D code/H code
(geometry+wear)
10.000
20.000
100.000
:
- 212 -
For D code
For D code
For H code
:
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Tool compensation memory C (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 0)

In tool compensation memory C, memory for geometry compensation
and memory for wear compensation are prepared separately. So,
geometry compensation values and wear compensation values can be
set separately. Moreover, memory for cutter compensation (for D
code) and memory for tool length compensation (for H code) are
prepared separately.
Setting example
D code
H code
For geometry
For wear
For geometry
For wear
compensation compensation compensation compensation
Compensation
number
001
002
:
10.000
20.000
:
0.100
0.200
:
100.000
200.000
:
0.100
0.300
:
- Unit and valid range of tool compensation values

The unit and valid range of values that can be set as a compensation
value is either of the following, depending on the bits 1 (OFC) and 0
(OFA) parameter No. 5042.
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (metric input)
OFC
OFA
Unit
Valid range
0
0
1
1
0
0
0.01mm
0.001mm
0.0001mm
9999.99mm
9999.999mm
9999.9999mm
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (inch input)

OFC
OFA
Unit
Valid range
0
0
1
1
0
0
0.001inch
0.0001inch
0.00001inch
999.999inch
999.9999inch
999.99999inch
- Number of tool compensation data items

Using the bit 5 (NDO) of parameter No. 8136 enables the total number
of items of tool compensation data to be specified as either 400 (bit 5
(NDO) of parameter No. 8136 = "0") or 32 (bit 5 (NDO) of parameter
No. 8136 = "1").
- 213 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Format
The format for programming depends on the type of tool
compensation memory.
For tool compensation memory A
G10 L11 P_ R_ Q_ ;
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number
For tool compensation memory C
G10 L_ P_ R_ Q_ ;
L_ : Type of compensation memory
L10 : Geometry compensation value
corresponding to an H code
L11 : Wear compensation value
corresponding to an H code
L12 : Geometry compensation value
corresponding to a D code
L13 : Wear compensation corresponding
to a D code
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number
By specifying G10, a tool compensation value can be set or modified.
When G10 is specified by absolute input (G90), the specified value is
used as the new tool compensation value.
When incremental input (G91) is used, a specified value added to the
tool compensation value currently set is used as the new tool
compensation value.
NOTE
1 Address R follows the increment system for tool
offset values.
2 If L is omitted for compatibility with the conventional
CNC format, or L1 is specified, the same operation
as when L11 is specified is performed.
- 214 -
6.9
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
SCALING (G50, G51)
Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same
magnification rate is applied to each axis and the other in which
different magnification rates are applied to different axes.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in the
parameter is applied.
Y
P4
P3
P4
P0
P2
P1
P3
P2
P1
X
P0
P1 to P4
P1 to P4
: Scaling center
: Programmed figure
: Scaled figure
Fig. 6.9 (a)
Scaling
NOTE
To enable scaling, set bit 5 (SCL) of parameter No.
8132 to "1".
Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
(When parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) = 0)
Format
Meaning of command
G51 IP_P_ ;
Scaling start
IP_
: Absolute command for center coordinate
value of scaling
Scaling is effective.
P_
:
Scaling
magnification
(Scaling mode)
G50 ;
Scaling cancel
Scaling up or down along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image)
(When parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) = 1)
Format
Meaning of command
G51 IP_I_J_K_; Scaling start
IP_
: Absolute command for center coordinate
value of scaling
Scaling is effective.
I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y,
(Scaling mode)
and Z axes) respectively
G50 ;
Scaling cancel
- 215 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
CAUTION
1 Specify G51 in a separate block.
2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50
to cancel the scaling mode.
NOTE
1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input
mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 = 1) does
not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J,
and K to change.
2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times
the least command increment (bit 7 (IPR) of
parameter No. 1004 = 1) does not cause the units
of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change.
3 An attempt to specify 0 as a magnification rate
causes alarm PS0142 to occur in a G51 block.
Explanation
- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set bit 0 (SCL) of
parameter No. 5401 to 1.
- Minimum unit of scaling magnification

Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.
5400 is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.
- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center
coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block are assumed those of an
absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed
when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center.
CAUTION
With the move command subsequent to the G51
block, execute an absolute (G90 mode) position
command.
If no absolute position command is executed after
the G51 block, the position assumed when G51 is
specified is assumed the scaling center; once an
absolute position command is executed, the scaling
center assumes the coordinates specified in the
G51 block, after that block.
- 216 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification

Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 to 0.
If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in
parameter No. 5411 is used.
Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal
point input is made, alarm PS0007 will occur.
A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a
negative value is specified, alarm PS0006 will occur.
The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.
- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)

Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a
negative magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. The
axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling
center.
Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400to 1 to validate each axis
scaling (mirror image).
Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3
axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No. 1022 to specify which axes to
use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J,
and K are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the
magnification set with parameter No. 5421 is used.
A value other than 0 must be set to parameter No. 5421.
Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of
magnification (I, J, K).
Magnification can be set within the range of 0.00001 to
9999.99999.
a/b
c/d
o
: Scaling magnification of X axis

: Scaling magnification of Y axis
: Scaling center
Y axis
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
c
o
a
b
Fig. 6.9 (b) Scaling of each axis
- 217 -
X axis
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
CAUTION
Specifying the following commands at the same
time causes them to be executed in the order
indicated below:
<1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
<2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a
negative magnification)
<3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the
CNC or the settings of the CNC
In this case, the programmable mirror image is
effective to the scaling center and magnification as
well.
To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time,
specify them in this order; to cancel them, specify
them in the reverse order.
- 218 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular
interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse.
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000;
(A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a
magnification of 1 is applied to the Y-component.)
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J100.0 F500;
Above commands are equivalent to the following command:
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J100.0 F500;
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is
assumed.)
Y
Scaled shape
X
(0,0)
Fig. 6.9 (c)
(100.0)
(200.0)
Scaling for circular interpolation1
Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K

after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center
direction of each axis.
If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified
arc, the operation will be same as that in which I and J are specified.
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;
- 219 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the
same time, scaling is performed first, followed by coordinate system
rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as
well.
To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate
system rotation. To cancel them, specify them in the reverse order.
Example
Main program
O1
G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (x 3 in the X direction and x 2
in the Y direction)
M98 P1000 ;
G17 G68 X35.0 Y20.0 R30. ;
M98 P1000 ;
G69 ;
G50 ;
M30 ;
Subprogram
O1000 ;
G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ;
G01 X50.0 ;
G01 Y30.0 ;
G01 X20.0 ;
G01 Y10.0 ;
M99 ;
Y
Rotation center
of coordinate
system before
scaling
Rotation center of
coordinate system
after scaling
Original program
Scaling center
Fig. 6.9 (d)
- 220 -
Shape after
coordinate system
rotation
X
Scaled shape
Scaling and coordinate system rotation
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Scaling and optional chamfering/corner R

Chamfering
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
Corner R
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner R results in
a spiral, not an arc, because scaling is applied to the end point and radius of
the arc.
Fig. 6.9 (e)
Scaling and optional chamfering/corner R
Limitation
- Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool
length compensation values, and tool offset values (Fig. 6.9 (f) ).
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
Cutter compensation values are not scaled.
Fig. 6.9 (f)
- 221 -
Scaling during cutter compensation
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Invalid scaling
Scaling is not applied to the travel distance during canned cycle
shown below.
Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83,
G73).
Fine boring cycle (G76)
Shift value Q of X and Y axes in back boring cycle (G87).
In manual operation, the travel distance cannot be increased or
decreased using the scaling.
CAUTION
If a parameter setting value is employed as a
scaling magnification without specifying P, the
setting value at G51 command time is employed as
the scaling magnification, and a change of this
value, if any, is not effective.
Before specifying the G code for reference position
return (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) or coordinate
system setting (G52 to G59, G92, etc.), cancel the
scaling mode. If it is specified without canceling
scaling, the alarm PS0412 is issued.
If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions
of 5 and over as a unit and disregarding the rest,
the move amount may become zero. In this case,
the block is regarded as a no movement block, and
therefore, it may affect the tool movement by cutter
compensation. See the description of cutter
compensation.
Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the
rollover function is enabled. Otherwise, the tool
may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting
in unexpected movement.
NOTE
1 The position display represents the coordinate
value after scaling.
2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the
specified plane, the following results:
(1) Circular command
......................... Direction of rotation is reversed.
(2) Tool radius tool nose radius compensation
................................ Offset direction is reversed.
(3) Coordinate system rotation
................................. Rotation angle is reversed.
- 222 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Example
Sample program of a scaling in each axis
O1;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I750 J250; ( 0.75 in the X direction, 0.25 in
the Y direction)
G00 G90 X60.0 Y50.0;
G01 X120.0 F100;
G01 Y90;
G01 X60;
G01 Y50;
G50;
M30;
Y axis
90
Programmed figure
80
Scaled figure
(60,50)
30
20
10
Scaling center
X axis
75
100
20
95
120
Fig. 6.9 (g) Program example of scaling in each axis
- 223 -
6.10
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69)

A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it
becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation
command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated
from the programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is
a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated
from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the
program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and
calling it after rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
X
Fig. 6.10 (a)
Format
Format
G17
G18 G68 __ R_ ;
G19
Start rotation of a coordinate system.
Coordinate system rotation mode

(The coordinate system is rotated.)
G69 ;
Coordinate system rotation cancel command
Meaning of command
G17 (G18 or G19) :
Select the plane in which contains the figure
to be rotated.
Absolute programming for two of the X_, Y_, and Z_ axes that
__
correspond to the current plane selected by a command (G17,
G18, or G19). The command specifies the coordinates of the
center of rotation for the values specified subsequent to G68
R_
Angular displacement with a positive value indicates counter
clockwise rotation. Parameter RIN (No. 5400#0) selects
whether the specified angular displacement is always
considered an absolute value or is considered an absolute or
incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or
G91).
Least input increment :
0.001 deg
Valid data range :
-360,000 to 360,000
- 224 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Angle of rotation R (incremental value)

Center of
rotation
Angle of rotation (absolute value)
(, )
Fig. 6.10 (b)
NOTE
When a decimal fraction is used to specify angular
displacement (R_), the 1's digit corresponds to
degree units.
Explanation
- G code for selecting a plane: G17,G18 or G19
The G code for selecting a plane (G17,G18,or G19) can be specified
before the block containing the G code for coordinate system rotation
(G68). G17, G18 or G19 must not be designated in the mode of
coordinate system rotation.
- Incremental programming in coordinate system rotation mode

The center of rotation for an incremental programming programmed
after G68 but before an absolute programming is the tool position
when G68 was programmed (Fig. 6.11 (c)).
- Center of rotation
When __ is not programmed, the tool position when G68 was
programmed is assumed as the center of rotation.
- Angular displacement
When R_ is not specified, the value specified in parameter No. 5410 is
assumed as the angular displacement.
To specify angular displacement (R_) in 0.00001 degrees (one
hundred-thousandth), set parameter FRD (No. 11630#0) to 1. In this
case, angular displacement R is specified within the range of
-36000000 to 36000000.
- Coordinate system rotation cancel command

The G code used to cancel coordinate system rotation (G69) may be
specified in a block in which another command is specified.
- Tool compensation
Cutter compensation, tool length compensation, tool offset, and other
compensation operations are executed after the coordinate system is
rotated.
- 225 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Limitation
- Commands related to reference position return and the coordinate system
In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference
position return (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) and those for changing the
coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If
any of these G codes is necessary, specify it only after canceling
coordinate system rotation mode. If it is specified without canceling
scaling, the alarm PS0412 is issued.
- Incremental programming
The first move command after the coordinate system rotation cancel
command (G69) must be specified with absolute values. If an
incremental move command is specified, correct movement will not
be performed.
- Note on the specification of one axis in coordinate system rotation

With the parameter below, a move position in the case where one axis
is specified in the absolute mode can selected. If two axes are
specified, a movement is made to the same position, regardless of the
setting of the parameter.
Parameter AX1 (No. 11600#5)
If one axis is specified in the absolute mode when the coordinate
system rotation mode is set:
0: The specified position is first calculated in the coordinate system
before rotation then the coordinate system is rotated.
1: The coordinate system is first rotated then a movement is made to
the specified position in the rotated coordinate system.
(FS0i-compatible specification)
This parameter changes the handling of coordinates on axes not
specified, so that a position to be reached by movement changes.
(Example)
G90 G0 X0 Y0
G01 X10. Y10. F6000
G68 X0 Y0 R45...........Specifies coordinate system rotation.
Y14.142........................Specifies one axis ....(1)
G69
When parameter AX1 (No. 11600#5) = 0:
The specified position is calculated in the coordinate system
(XY) before rotation then the coordinate system is rotated.
So, with the specification of (1), the position on the
unspecified X axis is X10, and the specified position is
(X10,Y14.142). Next, a movement is made to the move
position (X-2.929,Y17.071) obtained by 45 rotation.
- 226 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Move position
: X-2.929,Y17.071
Specified position
: X10,Y14.142
Tool path
45
Coordinates before
coordinate system rotation is
specified
: X10,Y10
X
When parameter AX1 (No. 11600#5) = 1:

With the specification of (1), coordinates (X10,Y10) before
coordinate system rotation are converted to coordinates
(X'14.142,Y'0) in the coordinate system (X'Y') obtained by
45 rotation. Next, a movement is made to the specified
position (X'14.142,Y'14.142), that is, the move position
(X0,Y20).
Specified position
: X'14.142,Y'14.142
Move position
: X0,Y20
Tool path
Y'
45
X'
Coordinates before coordinate
system rotation is specified
: X10,Y10
Conversion
Coordinates in rotated coordinate
system
: X'14.142,Y'0
X
- 227 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Explanation
- Absolute/Incremental position commands
N1 G92 X-500.0 Y-500.0 G69 G17 ;
N2 G68 X700.0 Y300.0 R60.0 ;
N3 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F200 ;
(G91X500.0Y500.0)
N4 G91 X1000.0 ;
N5 G02 Y1000.0 R1000.0 ;
N6 G03 X-1000.0 I-500.0 J-500.0 ;
N7 G01 Y-1000.0 ;
N8 G69 G90 X-500.0 Y-500.0 M02 ;
Tool path when the incremental
command is designated in the N3
block (in parenthesis)
Originally programmed tool path
Center of rotation
(700.0,300.0)
(0,0)
60
(-500.0,-500.0)
Tool path after rotation
Fig. 6.10 (c)
Absolute/incremental programming during coordinate

system rotation
- Cutter compensation and coordinate system rotation

It is possible to specify G68 and G69 in cutter compensation mode.
The rotation plane must coincide with the plane of cutter compensation.
N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ;
N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 F1000 D01 ;
N3 G68 R-30000 ;
N4 G91 X2000 ;
N5 G03 Y1000 R1000 J500 ;
N6 G01 X-2000 ;
N7 Y-1000 ;
N8 G69 G40 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ;
Programmed shape before
coordinate system rotation
Programmed shape
after coordinate
system rotation
3
(0, 0)
Tool path
Fig. 6.10 (d) Cutter compensation and coordinate system rotation
- 228 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01

If a coordinate system rotation command is executed in the scaling
mode (G51 mode), the coordinate value (a, b) of the rotation center
will also be scaled, but not the rotation angle (R). When a move
command is issued, the scaling is applied first and then the
coordinates are rotated.
A coordinate system rotation command (G68) should not be issued in
cutter compensation mode (G41, G42) on scaling mode (G51). The
coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior
to setting the cutter compensation mode.
1.
When the system is not in cutter compensation mode, specify the

commands in the following order :
G51 ;
Scaling mode start
G68 ;
Coordinate system rotation mode start
:
G69 ;
Coordinate system rotation mode cancel
G50 ;
Scaling mode cancel
2.
When the system is in cutter compensation, specify the

commands in the following order (Fig.6.10(e)) :
(cutter compensation cancel)
G51 ;
Scaling mode start
G68 ;
Coordinate system rotation start
:
G41 ;
Cutter compensation mode start
:
G92 X0 Y0 ;
G51 X300.0 Y150.0 P500 ;
G68 X200.0 Y100.0 R45.0 ;
G01 X400.0 Y100.0 ;
Y100.0 ;
X-200.0 ;
Y-100.0 ;
X200.0 ;
When scaling and coordinate
system rotation are applied
Y
When only coordinate system

rotation is applied
When only scaling is
applied
200.0
Cutting program
100.0
200.0
Fig. 6.10 (e)
400.0
Scaling and coordinate system rotation in cutter

compensation mode
- 229 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Repetitive commands for coordinate system rotation

It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall
subprogram by changing the angle.
Sample program for when parameter RIN (No. 5400#0) is set to 1.
The specified angular displancement is treated as an absolute or
incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or G91).
G92 X0 Y0 G69 G17;
G01 F200 H01 ;
M98 P2100 ;
M98 P072200 ;
G00 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ;
O 2200 G68 X0 Y0 G91 R45.0 ;
G90 M98 P2100 ;
M99 ;
O 2100 G90 G01 G42 X0 Y-10.0 ;
X4.142 ;
X7.071 Y-7.071 ;
G40 ;
M99 ;
Programmed path
(0, 0)
(0, -10.0)
When offset is
applied
Subprogram
Fig. 6.10 (f)
- 230 -
Coordinate system rotation command
6.11
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1)
Overview
When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane
during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the
tool so that the C-axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig.
6.11 (a)).
C-axis
C-axis
Tool
Tool
Normal direction (in

which the tool moves)
Fig. 6.11 (a) Sample Movement of the tool
Format
G41.1 ; Normal direction control, left
G42.1 ; Normal direction control, right
G40.1 ; Cancel normal direction control
The normal direction control, left (G41.1) command is
used when the workpiece is on the right side of the tool as
viewed while you are looking into the tools way.
Once either G41.1 or G42.1 is issued, normal direction
control is enabled (normal direction control mode).
Issuing G40.1 cancels the normal direction control mode.
- 231 -
PROGRAMMING
Tool center path
B-64304EN-2/01
Tool center path
Center of the arc

Fig. 6.11 (b) Normal direction control, left (G41.1)
Fig. 6.11 (c) Normal direction control, right (G42.1)
Explanation
- Angle of the C axis
When viewed from the center of rotation around the C-axis, the
angular displacement about the C-axis is determined as shown in Fig.
6.11 (d). The positive side of the X-axis is assumed to be 0, the
positive side of the Y-axis is 90, the negative side of the X-axis is
180, and the negative side of the Y-axis is 270.
+Y
90
180
Center of rotation
+X
270
Fig. 6.11 (d) Angle of the C axis
- Normal direction control of the C axis

When the cancel mode is switched to the normal direction control
mode, the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path at the
beginning of the block containing G41.1 or G42.1.
In the interface between blocks in the normal direction control mode,
a command to move the tool is automatically inserted so that the
C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path at the beginning of each
block. The tool is first oriented so that the C-axis becomes
perpendicular to the tool path specified by the move command, then it
is moved along the X- and Y axes.
In the cutter compensation mode, the tool is oriented so that the C-axis
becomes perpendicular to the tool path created after compensation.
- 232 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
In single-block operation, the tool is not stopped between a command

for rotation of the tool and a command for movement along the X- and
Y-axes. A single-block stop always occurs after the tool is moved
along the X- and Y-axes.
Tool center path
SS
N1
S : Single block stop point
N2
S
N3
S
Fig. 6.11 (e) Point at which a single-block stop occurs in the normal
direction control mode
Before circular interpolation is started, the C-axis is rotated so that the

C-axis becomes normal to the arc at the start point. During circular
interpolation, the tool is controlled so that the C-axis is always
perpendicular to the tool path determined by circular interpolation.
The tool is controlled so that the C-axis
is always normal to the tool path
determined by circular interpolation.
A rotation command is inserted so

that the C-axis becomes normal to
the arc at the start point.
Tool center path
Center of the arc

Fig. 6.11 (f) Normal direction control of the circular interpolation
NOTE
During normal direction control, the C axis always
rotates through an angle less than 180 deg. I.e., it
rotates in whichever direction provides the shorter
route.
- 233 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- C axis feedrate
Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is
executed at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at
that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved
along the X-and Y-axes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid
traverse feedrate is applied.
The feedrate of the C axis during circular interpolation is defined by
the following formula.
F
Amount of movement of the C axis (deg)

Length of arc (mm or inch)
(deg/min)
F : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) specified by the corresponding

block of the arc
Amount of movement of the C axis :
The difference in angles at the beginning and the end of the
block.
NOTE
If the feedrate of the C axis exceeds the maximum
cutting speed of the C axis specified to parameter
No. 1430, the feedrate of each of the other axes is
clamped to keep the feedrate of the C axis below
the maximum cutting speed of the C axis.
- Normal direction control axis
A C-axis to which normal-direction control is applied can be assigned
to any axis with parameter No. 5480.
- Angle for which figure insertion is ignored

When the rotation angle to be inserted, calculated by normal-direction
control, is smaller than the value set with parameter No. 5482, the
corresponding rotation block is not inserted for the axis to which
normal-direction control is applied. This ignored rotation angle is
added to the next rotation angle to be inserted, the total angle being
subject to the same check at the next block.
If an angle of 360 degrees or more is specified, the corresponding
rotation block is not inserted.
If an angle of 180 degrees or more is specified in a block other than
that for circular interpolation with a C-axis rotation angle of 180
degrees or more, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted.
- 234 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Movement for which arc insertion is ignored

Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with
the same normal direction as that of the preceding block.
Linear movement
When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value,
machining for block N2 is performed using the same direction as
that for block N1.
Tool center path
N2
N3
N1
Distance
Circular movement
When the diameter of block N2, shown below, is smaller than the
set value, machining for block N2 is performed using the same
normal direction as that for block N1. And control as
compensation along the circular arc is not performed.
Tool center path
N2
N3
Diameter
N1
NOTE
1 Do not specify any command to the C axis during
normal direction control. Any command specified at
this time is ignored.
2 Before processing starts, it is necessary to
correlate the workpiece coordinate of the C axis
with the actual position of the C axis on the
machine using the coordinate system setting (G92)
or the like.
3 The helical cutting option is required to use this
function. Helical cutting cannot be specified in the
normal direction control mode.
4 Normal direction control cannot be performed by
the G53 move command.
5 The C-axis must be a rotation axis.
- 235 -
6.12
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1)

A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with
respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 15.3 (a)).
Y
Axis of symmetry (X=50)

(2)
(1)
100
60
Axis of symmetry
(Y=50)
50
40
(4)
(3)
0
40
50
60
100
(1) Original image of a programmed command

(2) Image symmetrical about a line parallel to the Y-axis and crossing the
X-axis at 50
(3) Image symmetrical about point (50, 50)
(4) Image symmetrical about a line parallel to the X-axis and crossing the
Y-axis at 50
Fig. 6.12 (a) Programmable mirror image
Format
G51.1 IP_ ;
:
:
:
:
G50.1 IP_ ;
Setting a programmable image

A mirror image of a command specified in
these blocks is produced with respect to
the axis of symmetry specified by G51.1
IP_;.
Canceling a programmable mirror image
IP_ : Point (position) and axis of symmetry for producing a

mirror image when specified with G51.1.
Axis of symmetry for producing a mirror image when
specified with G50.1. Point of symmetry is not
specified.
- 236 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Explanation
- Mirror image by setting
If the programmable mirror image function is specified when the
command for producing a mirror image is also selected by a CNC
external switch or CNC setting (see III-4.8 in Users Manual
(Common to T/M series.)), the programmable mirror image function is
executed first.
- Mirror image on a single axis in a specified plane

Applying a mirror image to one of the axes on a specified plane
changes the following commands as follows :
Command
Explanation
Circular command
Cutter compensation
G02 and G03 are interchanged.

G41 and G42 are interchanged.
CW and CCW (directions of rotation) are
interchanged.
Limitation
Processing proceeds from program mirror image to scaling and
coordinate system rotation in the stated order. The commands should
be specified in this order, and, for cancellation, in the reverse order.
Do not specify G50.1 or G51.1 during scaling or coordinate system
rotation mode.
- Commands related to reference position return and coordinate system

In programmable mirror image mode, G codes related to reference
position return (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) and those for changing the
coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If
any of these G codes is necessary, specify it only after canceling the
programmable mirror image mode. If it is specified without
canceling the mode, the alarm PS0412 is issued.
- 237 -
7. MEMORY OPERATION USING

Series 10/11 FORMAT
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
MEMORY OPERATION USING Series

10/11 PROGRAM FORMAT
Overview
Memory operation of the program registered in Series 10/11 program
format is possible by setting the setting parameter FCV (No. 0001#1)
to 1.
Explanation
Data formats for tool radius compensation, subprogram call, and
canned cycles are different between the Series 0i and Series 10/11.
The Series 10/11 program formats can be processed for memory
operation.
Other data formats must comply with the Series 0i. When a value out
of the specified range for the Series 0i is registered, an alarm occurs.
Functions not available in the Series 0i cannot be used for memory
operation.
- Address for the tool radius compensation offset number
Offset numbers are specified by address D in the Series 10/11.
When an offset number is specified by address D, the modal value
specified by address H is replaced with the offset number specified by
address D.
- Subprogram call
If a subprogram number of more than four digits is specified, the four
low-order digits are regarded as the subprogram number.
If no repeat count is specified, 1 is assumed.
Table 7 (a)
Subprogram call program format

Program format
M98 P{{{{ L{{{{ ;
P : Subprogram number
L : Repetition count (1 to 9999)
M98 P{{{
;
CNC
Series 10/11
Series 0i
Repetition count
(1 to 9999)
Subprogram number
- Address for the canned cycle repetition count for drilling

The Series 10/11 and this CNC use different addresses for the
canned cycle repetition count for drilling as listed in Table 7 (b).
Table 7 (b) Address for the canned cycle repetition count for drilling
CNC
Address
Series 10/11
Series 0i
L
K
- 238 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
8.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Chapter 8, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the
following sections:
8.1 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81 (G80.4, G81.4))........240
- 239 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
8.1
ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81 (G80.4, G81.4))
8.1.1
Electronic Gear Box
Overview
This function synchronizes the revolutions of the workpiece axis
connected to the servo motor with the revolutions of the tool axis
(grinding stone/hob) connected to the spindle motor so as to machine
(grind/cut) gears as in the hobbing machine function.
The
synchronization ratio can be specified by a program.
Synchronization of the tool axis and the workpiece axis by this
function is directly controlled by a digital servo, so the workpiece axis
can track changes in the speed of the tool axis with no error, thereby
achieving high-precision machining of gears. In the following
descriptions, the electric gear box is called the EGB. For details on
the conditions that need be met to set the workpiece axis and tool axis,
refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
NOTE
Electronic gear box is optional function.
- Example of controlled axis configuration
Spindle
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
:
:
:
:
:
EGB master axis : Tool axis

X axis
Y axis
C axis (EGB slave axis : Workpiece axis)
C axis (EGB dummy axis : Cannot be used as a normal
controlled axis.)
CNC
Spindle (master axis)
Spindle amp.
Motor
Tool axis
1st axis X (omitted)

2nd axis Y (omitted)
EGB
3rd axis C
slave axis
FFG
-
Detector
Position control
Velocity/current control
Servo amp.
Motor
Sync switch
Follow-up +
C axis
Workpiece axis
4th axis
dummy axis
Spindle Detector
K1
Separate detector
K1: Sync coefficient
Error counter
- 240 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
Format
Start of
synchronization
Cancellation of
synchronization
Parameter EFX
(No.7731#0)=0
Parameter EFX
(No.7731#0)=1
G81 T ( L )
( Q P ) ;
G80 ;
G81.4 T ( L )
( Q P ) ;
G80.4 ;
T : Number of teeth (Specifiable range: 1 to 1000)

L : Number of hob threads (Specifiable range: -200 to +200)
The sign of L determines the direction of rotation for the workpiece axis.
When L is positive, the direction of rotation for the workpiece axis is
positive (+ direction).
When L is negative, the direction of rotation for the workpiece axis is
negative (- direction).
When L is 0, it follows the setting of bit 3 (LZR) of parameter No.7701.
If L is not specified, the number of hob threads is assumed 1.
Q : Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
(Unit: 0.00001mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0mm)
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
(Unit: 0.00001inch-1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 254.0 inch-1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Unit: 0.0001deg, Specifiable range: -90.0 to 90.0deg)
*
When specifying Q and P, the user can use a decimal point.

NOTE
Specify G81, G80, G81.4, and G80.4 in a single
block.
Explanation
- Master axis, slave axis, and dummy axis
The synchronization reference axis is called the master axis, while the
axis along which movement is performed in synchronization with the
master axis is called the slave axis. For example, if the workpiece
moves in synchronization with the rotating tool as in a hobbing
machine, the tool axis is the master axis and the workpiece axis is the
slave axis.
Which axes to become the master and slave axes depends on the
configuration of the machine. For details, refer to the manual issued
A single servo axis is used exclusively so that digital servo can
directly read the rotation position of the master axis. (This axis is
called the EGB dummy axis.)
- 241 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Synchronous control
(1) Start of synchronization
If G81 is issued so that the machine enters synchronization mode,
the synch switch of the EGB function is closed, and the
synchronization of the tool and workpiece axes is started.
During synchronization, the rotation about the tool and
workpiece axes is controlled so that the relationship between T
(number of teeth) and L (number of hob threads) is maintained.
During synchronization, the synchronization relationship is
maintained regardless of whether the operation is automatic or
manual.
Specify P and Q to use helical gear compensation.
If only either P or Q is issued, alarm PS1594 is generated.
If, during synchronization, G81 is issued again without
synchronization cancellation, alarm PS1595 is generated if ECN,
bit 3 of parameter No. 7731, is 0. If ECN, bit 3 of parameter No.
7731, is 1, helical gear compensation is conducted with the
synchronization coefficient being changed to the one newly
specified with T and L commands if T and L commands are
issued, and if T and L commands are not issued and only P and Q
commands are issued, helical gear compensation is conducted
with the synchronization coefficient kept intact. This allows
consecutive fabrication of helical gears and super gears.
(2) Start of tool axis rotation
When the rotation of the tool axis starts, the rotation of the
workpiece axis starts so that the synchronous relationship
specified in the G81 block can be maintained.
The rotation direction of the workpiece axis depends on the
rotation direction of the tool axis. That is, when the rotation
direction of the tool axis is positive, the rotation direction of the
workpiece axis is also positive; when the rotation direction of the
tool axis is negative, the rotation direction of the workpiece axis
is also negative. However, by specifying a negative value for L,
the rotation direction of the workpiece axis can be made opposite
to the rotation direction of the tool axis.
During synchronization, the machine coordinates of the
workpiece axis and EGB axis are updated as synchronous motion
proceeds. On the other hand, a synchronous move command
has no effect on the absolute and relative coordinates.
(3) Termination of tool axis rotation
In synchronism with gradual stop of the tool axis, the workpiece
axis is decelerated and stopped. By specifying the command
below after the spindle stops, synchronization is canceled, and
the EGB synchronization switch is opened.
- 242 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
(4) Cancellation of synchronization

When cancellation of synchronization is issued, the absolute
coordinate on the workpiece axis is updated in accordance with
the amount of travel during synchronization. Subsequently,
absolute commands for the workpiece axis will be enabled.
For a rotation axis, the amount of travel during synchronization,
as rounded to 360-degree units is added to the absolute
coordinate.
In the G80 block, only O and N addresses can be specified.
By setting HBR, bit 0 of parameter No. 7700, to 0, it is possible
to cancel synchronization with a reset. If the manual absolute
switch is ON, the absolute coordinates are updated.
Synchronization is automatically canceled under the following
conditions:
<1> An emergency stop is applied.
<2> A servo alarm is generated.
<3> Alarm PW0000 (POWER MUST BE OFF) is generated.
<4> An IO alarm is generated.
CAUTION
1 Feed hold, interlock, and machine lock are invalid
to a slave axis in EGB synchronization.
2 Even if an OT alarm is issued for a slave axis in
EGB synchronization, synchronization will not be
canceled.
3 During synchronization, it is possible to execute a
move command for a slave axis and other axes,
using a program. The move command for a slave
command must be an incremental one.
- 243 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
1 If bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700 is set to 1,
EGB synchronization will not be canceled due to a
reset. Usually, set this parameter bit to 1.
2 In synchronous mode, it is not possible to specify
G27, G28, G29, G30, and G53 for a slave axis.
3 It is not possible to use controlled axis detach for a
slave axis.
4 During synchronization, manual handle interruption
can be performed on the slave and other axes.
5 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric conversion
commands (G20 and G21) cannot be issued.
6 In synchronous mode, only the machine
coordinates on a slave axis are updated.
7 If bit 0 (EFX) of parameter No. 7731 is 0, no
canned cycle for drilling can be used. To use a
canned cycle for drilling, set bit 0 (EFX) of
parameter No. 7731 to 1 and use G81.4 instead of
G81 and G80.4 instead of G80.
8 If TDP, bit 0 of parameter No. 7702, is 1, the
permissible range of T is 0.1 to 100 (1/10 of the
specified value).
9 If, at the start of EGB synchronization (G81), L is
specified as 0, synchronization starts with L
assumed to be 1 if bit 3 (LZR) of parameter
No.7701, is 0; if bit 3 (LZR) of parameter No.7701,
is 1, synchronization is not started with L assumed
to be 0. At this time, helical gear compensation is
performed.
10 Feed per revolution is performed on the feedback
pulses on the spindle. By setting ERV, bit 0 of
parameter No. 7703, to 1, feed per revolution can
be performed based on the speed on the
synchronous slave axis.
11 Actual cutting feedrate display does not take
synchronization pulses into consideration.
12 In EGB synchronization mode, AI contour control
mode is temporarily canceled.
- 244 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
- Helical gear compensation

For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is compensated for the
movement along the Z-axis (axial feed axis) based on the torsion angle
of the gear.
Helical gear compensation is performed with the following formulas:
Compensation angle =
Z sin(P)
T Q
Compensation angle =
Z Q sin(P)
T
360 (for metric input)

360 (for inch input)
where
Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg)
Z :Amount of travel on the Z-axis after the specification of G81
P : Signed gear helix angle (deg)
: Circular constant
T : Number of teeth
Q : Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch-1)
Use P, T, and Q specified in the G81 block.
In helical compensation, the machine coordinates on the workpiece
axis and the absolute coordinates are updated with helical
compensation.
- 245 -
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Direction of helical gear compensation

The direction depends on HDR, bit 2 of parameter No. 7700.
When HDR is set to 1.
+Z
-Z
+Z
-Z
(a)
(c)
(b)
+C
(d)
+C
+C
+C
C:+, Z:+, P:+
C:+, Z:+, P:-
C:+, Z:-, P:+
C:+, Z:-, P:-
Compensation direction : +
Compensation direction : -
(e)
(f)
(h)
(g)
C:-, Z:+, P:+
C:-, Z:+, P:-
C:-, Z:-, P:+
C:-, Z:-, P:-
When HDR is set to 0. (In (a), (b), (c), and (d), the same as that if HDR is 1)
+Z
-Z
(e)
(h)
(g)
(f)
C
C:-, Z:+, P:+
C:-, Z:+, P:-
C:-, Z:-, P:+
C:-, Z:-, P:-
- Synchronization coefficient
A synchronization coefficient is internally represented using a fraction
(Kn/Kd) to eliminate an error. The formula below is used for
calculation.
Synchronization coefficient =
Kn L
=
Kd T
where
L : Number of hob threads
T : Number of teeth
: Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the
master axis (parameter No. 7772)
: Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the
slave axis (parameter No. 7773)
Kn / Kd is a value resulting from reducing the right side of the above
formula, but the result of reduction is subject to the following
restrictions:
-2147483648Kn2147483647
1Kd65535
When this restriction is not satisfied, the alarm (PS1596) is issued
when G81 is specified.
- 246 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
Example
O1000 ;
N0010 M19 ;
N0020 G28 G91 C0 ;
N0030 G81 T20 L1 ;
N0040 S300 M03 ;

N0050 G01 X F ;
N0060 G01 Z F ;
-----------------------------;
N0100 G01 X F ;
N0110 M05 ;
N0120 G80 ;
N0130 M30 ;
- 247 -
Tool axis orientation

Reference position return on the workpiece
axis
Synchronous start on tool and workpiece
axes
(Rotation about the workpiece axis by
18 per rotation about the tool axis)
Rotation about the tool axis at 300min-1
Movement along the X-axis (cut)
Movement along the Z-axis (machining)
If necessary, axis commands such as C, X,
and Z commands are allowed.
Movement along the X-axis (escape)
Stop on the tool axis
Synchronous cancellation on tool and
workpiece axes
PROGRAMMING
B-64304EN-2/01
- Retract function
(1) Retract function with an external signal
When the retract switch on the machine operators panel is
turned on, retraction is performed with the retract amount set in
parameter No. 7741 and the feedrate set in parameter No. 7740.
No movement is performed along an axis for which 0 is set as the
retract amount.
For the retract switch, refer to the relevant manual provided by
the machine tool builder.
(2) Retract function with an alarm
If, during EGB synchronization or automatic operation, a CNC
alarm is issued, retraction is performed with the retract amount
set in parameter No. 7741 and the speed set in parameter No.
7740.
This can prevent the tool and the object being machined from
damage if a servo alarm is generated.
No movement is performed along an axis for which 0 is set as the
retract amount.
For the retract switch, refer to the relevant manual provided by
the machine tool builder.
Conditions under the retract function with an alarm
The conditions under which the retract function with a servo or
spindle alarm can be changed using the settings of ARE, bit 1 of
parameter No. 7703, and bit 2 (ARO) of parameter No. 7703.
The table below lists parameter settings and corresponding
conditions.
ARE
ARO
0
0
0
1
Condition
EGB synchronization is in progress.
Both EGB synchronization and
automatic operation are in progress.
Either EGB synchronization or
automatic operation is in progress.
CAUTION
1 Retraction is performed at the speed specified in
parameter No. 7740.
2 Feed hold is not effective to movement during
retraction.
3 Feedrate override is not effective to movement
during retraction.
- 248 -
B-64304EN-2/01
PROGRAMMING
NOTE
1 During a retract operation, an interlock is effective
to the retract axis.
2 During a retract operation, a machine lock is
effective to the retract axis.
3 The retraction direction depends on the movement
direction of the machine, regardless of whether an
mirror image (signal and setting) is enabled or
disabled. (No mirror image can be applied to the
updating of absolute coordinates.)
4 If retraction is performed during automatic
operation, automatic operation is halted
simultaneously with a retract operation, but it is at
the end of the retract operation that the operation
state switches to the automatic operation halt state.
5 It is not possible to perform automatic operation
during retraction.
6 The acceleration/deceleration of a retract operation
is in the acceleration/deceleration state at the start
of retraction.
7 Retract movement is performed with non-linear
type positioning.
8 If, during a retract operation, a reset or an
emergency stop is made, the operation is
interrupted.
9 If, during a retract operation on multiple axes, an
OT alarm or a malfunction prevention alarm is
issued for a retract axis, the operation stops only
on the axis for which the alarm is issued if bit 4
(RTS) of parameter No. 7731 is 0. If bit 4 (RTS) of
parameter No. 7731 is 1, the retract operation is
interrupted on all axes. If a servo alarm or non-axis
malfunction prevention alarm is issued, the retract
operation is interrupted on all axes regardless of
the setting of bit 4 (RTS) of parameter No. 7731.
10 To enable the retract function with an alarm, bit 3
(ART) of parameter No.7702, must be set.
11 The retract function with an alarm does not perform
a retract operation on the retract axis if an overtravel
alarm or a servo alarm is generated on the retract
axis.
12 If a new alarm is issued during retraction with the
retract function with an alarm, a retract operation is
not performed.
- 249 -
III. OPERATION
B-64304EN-2/01
OPERATION
1.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Chapter 1, "SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA", consists of the
following sections:
1.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
1.1.1
1.1.2
.........254
Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value 254

Tool Length Measurement ...........................................258
- 253 -
1.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION
1.1
B-64304EN-2/01

Press function key
to display or set tool compensation values
and other data.

This section explains how to display and specify the following:
1. Tool compensation value
2. Tool length measurement
Refer to the Users Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System) (B-64304EN) for explanations about how to display
or specify the other types of data.
- 254 -
OPERATION
B-64304EN-2/01
1.1.1
Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value

Tool offset values, tool length compensation values, and cutter
compensation values are specified by D codes or H codes in a
program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes or H codes
are displayed or set on the screen.
There are two tool offset memory types, A and C.
Procedure for setting and displaying the tool compensation value
Procedure
1
Press function key
Press chapter selection soft key [OFFSET] or press function key

several times until the tool compensation screen is
displayed.
The screen varies according to the type of tool compensation
memory.
Fig. 1.1.1 (a) Tool compensation memory A (10.4-inch)
- 255 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Fig. 1.1.1 (b) Tool compensation memory C (10.4-inch)
Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed

using page keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensation
number for the compensation value to be set or changed and
press soft key [NO.SRH].
To set a compensation value, enter a value and press soft key
[INPUT].
To change the compensation value, enter a value to add to the
current value (a negative value to reduce the current value) and
press soft key [+INPUT]. Or, enter a new value and press soft
key [INPUT].
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- Other setting method

An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool
offset value. See Chapter III-8 in Users Manual (Common to T/M). A
tool length compensation value can be set by measuring the tool
length as described in the next subsection.
- Tool compensation memory

There are tool compensation memories A and C, which are classified
as follows:
Tool compensation memory A
D codes and H codes are treated the same. Tool geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation are treated the same.
Tool compensation memory C
D codes and H codes are treated differently. Tool geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation are treated differently.
- 256 -
OPERATION
B-64304EN-2/01
Bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 can be used to specify whether to

use tool offset memory C ("0" for specifying to use it and "1" for
specifying not to use it). If tool offset memory C is not used, tool
offset memory A is used.
- Number of tool offset values

Bit 5 (NDO) of parameter No. 8136 can be used to specify whether to
use 400 tool offset values ("0" for specifying to use 400 tool offset
values and "1" for specifying not to use them). If the number of tool
offset values to be used is not 400, the number of tool offset values to
be used is 32.
- Disabling entry of compensation values

The entry of compensation values may be disabled by setting bit 0
(WOF) and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290 (not applied to tool
compensation memory A).
In this case, it is possible to prohibit any range of tool offset values
from being entered from the MDI by setting the start tool offset value
number in parameter No. 3294 and the quantity of offset values
counted from the beginning of the range in parameter No.3295.
If an attempt is made to enter tool offset values including those
prohibited, the following occur:
1) When compensation values are input consecutively from offset
numbers for which the input of values is enabled to offset
numbers for which the input of values is inhibited, a warning is
issued, but the compensation values in the range of the offset
numbers for which the input of values is enabled are set.
2) When compensation values are input consecutively from offset
numbers for which the input of values is inhibited to offset
numbers for which the input of values is enabled, a warning is
issued and the compensation values are not set.
- 257 -
1.1.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Tool Length Measurement

The length of the tool can be measured and registered as the tool
length compensation value by moving the reference tool and the tool
to be measured until they touch the specified position on the machine.
The tool length can be measured along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
Bit 7 (NTL) of parameter No. 8136 can be used to specify whether to
use tool length measurement ("0" for specifying to use it and "1" for
specifying not to use it).
Procedure for tool length measurement
Procedure
1
Use manual operation to move the reference tool until it touches

the specified position on the machine (or workpiece.)
Press function key
several times until the current position
display screen with relative coordinates is displayed.
Fig. 1.1.2 (a)
Current position display screen (8.4-inch)
Reset the relative coordinate for the Z-axis to 0.
Press function key
several times until the tool
compensation screen is displayed.

Use manual operation to move the tool to be measured until it
touches the same specified position. The difference between the
length of the reference tool and the tool to be measured is
displayed in the relative coordinates on the screen.
Move the cursor to the compensation number for the target tool
(the cursor can be moved in the same way as for setting tool
compensation values).
- 258 -
OPERATION
B-64304EN-2/01
Press the address key
. If either
or
key is
depressed instead of
key, the X or Y axis relative
coordinate value is input as an tool length compensation value.

Press the soft key [INP.C.]. The Z axis relative coordinate value
is input and displayed as an tool length compensation value.
Fig. 1.1.2 (b) Tool compensation memory (8.4-inch)
Reference
tool
The difference is set as a tool
length offset value
A prefixed position
- 259 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
APPENDIX
A.PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual.
For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other
parameters, refer to the parameter manual.
Appendix A, "PARAMETERS", consists of the following sections:
A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS .......................................264
A.2 DATA TYPE.............................................................................311
A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES ..................312
- 263 -
A.PARAMETERS
A.1
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
0001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
FCV
#1
#0
FCV
Setting input
Bit path
Program format
0: Series 0 standard format
(This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)
1: Series 10/11 format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program
format can be used for operation on the following
functions:
1 Subprogram call M98,M198
2 Drilling canned cycle
G80 to G89 (T series)
G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11
is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to
the Users Manual.
#7
1004
[Input type]
[Data type]
#7
IPR
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IPR
Parameter input
Bit path
When a number with no decimal point is specified, the least input
increment of each axis is:
0: Not 10 times greater than the least command increment
1: 10 times greater than the least command increment
When the increment system is IS-A, and bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.
3401 is set to 1 (pocket calculator type decimal point programming),
the least input increment cannot be 10 times greater than the least
command increment.
- 264 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1013
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
#0
ISCx
ISAx
Parameter input
Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
#0
#1
ISA
ISC
Increment system of each axis

Increment system
#1 ISCx
#0 ISAx
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0
0
1
1
0
0
1020
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Program axis name for each axis
Parameter input
Byte axis
65 to 67,85 to 90
An axis name (parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from
'A', 'B', 'C', 'U', 'V', 'W', 'X', 'Y', and 'Z'.
(Tip) ASCII code
Axis name
Setting
X
88
Y
89
Z
90
A
65
B
66
C
67
U
85
V
86
W
87
NOTE
1 The same axis name cannot be set for multiple
axes.
2 When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided (when
bit 2 (BCD) of parameter No. 8132 is 1), if the
address (parameter No. 3460) that specifies the
2nd auxiliary function is used as an axis name, the
2nd auxiliary function is disabled.
- 265 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
1022
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system
Parameter input
Byte axis
0 to 7
To determine a plane for circular interpolation, tool radius/tool nose
radius compensation, and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp
plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane), specify which of the basic three axes (X, Y,
and Z) is used for each control axis, or a parallel axis of which basic
axis is used for each control axis.
A basic axis (X, Y, or Z) can be specified only for one control axis.
Two or more control axes can be set as parallel axes for the same basic
axis.
Setting
Meaning
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
Rotation axis (Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis )
X axis of the basic three axes
Y axis of the basic three axes
Z axis of the basic three axes
Axis parallel to the X axis
Axis parallel to the Y axis
Axis parallel to the Z axis
In general, the increment system and diameter/radius specification of

an axis set as a parallel axis are to be set in the same way as for the
basic three axes.
1023
Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Byte axis
0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Usually set to same number as the control axis number.
The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting
the axis-type parameters or axis-type machine signals
With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is

to be performed, set -(spindle number) as the servo axis number.
Example)
When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis
by using the first spindle, set -1.
For tandem controlled axes or electronic gear box (EGB)

controlled axes, two axes need to be specified as one pair. So,
make a setting as described below.
Tandem axis:
For a master axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, ...) servo axis number.
For a slave axis to be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to
the value set for the master axis.
- 266 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
EGB axis:
For a slave axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, ...) servo axis number. For
a dummy axis to be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to
the value set for the slave axis.
1031
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Reference axis
Parameter input
Byte path
The unit of some parameters common to all axes such as those for dry
run feedrate and one-digit F code feed may vary according to the
increment system. An increment system can be selected by a
parameter on an axis-by-axis basis. So, the unit of those parameters is
to match the increment system of a reference axis. Set which axis to
use as a reference axis.
Among the basic three axes, the axis with the finest increment system
is generally selected as a reference axis.
#7
#6
#5
1401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
RF0
#2
#1
#0
LRP
Parameter input
Bit path
#1
LRP
Positioning (G00)
0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that
the tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.
#4
RF0
When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
1410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Minimum unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Dry run rate
Parameter input
Real path
mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate
specification dial. The unit of data depends on the increment system of
the reference axis.
- 267 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
1411
B-64304EN-2/01
Cutting feedrate
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real path
mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
When the machine doesnt need to change cutting feedrate frequently
during cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter.
This eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate (F command) in
the NC program.
The feedrate set in this parameter is valid from when the CNC enters
the clear state (when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 1) due to
power-on or a reset to when the feedrate is specified by a program
command (F command). After the feedrate is specified by a program
command (F command), the feedrate is valid. For details on the clear
state, refer to Appendix in the User's Manual (B-64304EN).
1420
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1430
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Rapid traverse rate for each axis
Parameter input
Real axis
Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Parameter input
Real axis
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
- 268 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
#6
#5
1601
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
NCI
CTLx
#2
#1
#0
An in-position check:
0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the
acceleration/deceleration delay becomes 0) at deceleration time
and that the machine position has reached a specified position
(the servo positional deviation is within the in-position width set
by parameter No. 1826).
1: Confirms only that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the
acceleration/deceleration delay becomes 0) at deceleration time.
#7
#0
#3
Parameter input
Bit path
#6
#5
1610
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
NCI
#4
JGLx
#3
#2
#1
#0
CTBx
CTLx
Parameter input
Bit axis
Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTE
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and set bit 1
(CTBx) of parameter No. 1610 to select bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
Parameter
CTBx CTLx
Acceleration/deceleration
Exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
- 269 -
A.PARAMETERS
#1
APPENDIX
CTBx
B-64304EN-2/01
Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/
deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No.1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation function is used. When this function
is not used, the acceleration/deceleration is
determined according to bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter
No. 1610 regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
#4
JGLx
1732
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is
applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of
parameter No. 1610)
Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on
acceleration in circular interpolation
Parameter input
Real path
With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
interpolation, an optimum feedrate is automatically calculated so that
acceleration produced by changing the move direction in circular
interpolation does not exceed the maximum allowable acceleration
rate specified in parameter No. 1735.
If the radius of an arc is very small, a calculated feedrate may become
too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the
value specified in this parameter.
- 270 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
1735
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on

acceleration in circular interpolation for each axis
Parameter input
Real axis
mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When
the machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration
function based on acceleration in circular interpolation.
Feedrate is controlled so that acceleration produced by changing the
move direction in circular interpolation does not exceed the value
specified in this parameter.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function
based on acceleration is disabled.
If a different value is set in this parameter for each axis, a feedrate is
determined from the smaller of the acceleration rates specified for the
two circular axes.
1826
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
In-position width for each axis
Parameter input
2-word axis
Detection unit
0 to 99999999
The in-position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified
position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller
than the in-position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the
specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)
#7
#6
#5
3115
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
NDFx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NDFx
Parameter input
Bit axis
In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a
selected axis is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.
- 271 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
3131
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Subscript of axis name
Parameter input
Byte axis
0 to 9, 32, 65 to 90
In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation, synchronization
control, and tandem control, specify a subscript for each axis name.
Setting value
0
1 to 9
65 to 90
Meaning
Each axis is set as an axis other than a synchronization
control axis and tandem control axis.
A set value is used as a subscript.
A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.
Example)
When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as indicated
below.
Axis name displayed on a screen such as the
position display screen
X
X1
XM
XS
Setting value
0
1
77
83
When the subscription of an axis name is not set in a 2-path system,

the subscription of an axis name is automatically set to the path
number. To hide the subscription of an axis name, set the parameter
of the subscription of an axis name to the ASCII code (32) of a space.
#7
#6
#5
3290
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
WOF
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
GOF
WOF
Parameter input
Bit path
Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled. (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
NOTE
When tool offset memory A is selected, the tool
offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if
geometric compensation.
#1
GOF
Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled.
1: Disabled. (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
- 272 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
A.PARAMETERS
3294
Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295
Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is
disabled
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Word path
0 to Tool compensation count - 1
When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be
disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of
parameter No.3290, parameter Nos.3294 and 3295 are used to set the
range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No.3294, set
the offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification
is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of such values. In
the following cases, however, none of the tool offset values may be
modified:
When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.3294
When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.3295
When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set
in parameter No.3294
In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the
value set in parameter No.3294 to the maximum tool offset number is
disabled:
When the value of parameter No.3294 added to the value of
parameter No.3295 exceeds the maximum tool offset number
When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the
MDI panel, the warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued.
[Example]
When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to
both of the tool geometry offset values and tool wear offset values
corresponding to offset numbers 51 to 60 are disabled:
Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry

offset value modification)
Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear

offset value modification)
Parameter No.3294 = 51
Parameter No.3295 = 10
If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 is set to 0 without
modifying the other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset
value modification only is disabled, and tool wear offset value
modification is enabled.
- 273 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
#7
#6
#5
B-64304EN-2/01
#4
#3
#2
#1
3401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DPI
3402
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DPI
Parameter input
Bit path
When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a
decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point
input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket
calculator type decimal point input)
#7
#6
G23
CLR
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G91
G19
G18
G01
Parameter input
Bit path
#0
G01
G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is
cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
#1
G18
Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)
#2
G19
Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 to 0.
#3
G91
#6
CLR
G19
G18
G17, G18, or G19 mode
0
0
1
0
1
0
G17 mode (X-Y plane)

G18 mode (Z-X plane)
G19 mode (Y-Z plane)
When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command)
1: G91 mode (incremental command)
Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind
signal, and emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the User's Manual.
- 274 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
G23
When the power is turned on

0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)
#7
3408
[Input type]
[Data type]
C23
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
C23
Parameter input
Bit
If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is set to 1, set a group of G codes
to be placed in the cleared state when the CNC is reset by the
key of the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset & rewind
signal, or the emergency stop signal.
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Places the G code group in the cleared state.
1: Does not place G code group in the cleared state.
3410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Tolerance of arc radius
Setting input
Real path
mm, inch (input unit)
0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard
parameter setting table (B))
When a circular interpolation command is executed, the tolerance for
the radius between the start point and the end point is set.
NOTE
When the setting is 0, the difference between the
arc radius values is not checked.
#7
#6
#5
5000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
MOF
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MOF
Setting input
Bit path
When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) of
parameter No. 5006 is set to 1) is used, if the tool length compensation
amount is changed(NOTE 2) in the tool length compensation mode when
look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 1):
0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation
amount as the movement type.
1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length
compensation command (offset number) and an absolute
command for the compensation axis are specified.
- 275 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
NOTE
1 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows:
The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool nose
radius compensation) of group 07 is other than G40.
One look-ahead block during automatic operation and
multiple look-ahead blocks in the AI advanced preview
control/AI contour control mode are not included in the
state "when look-ahead blocks are present".
2 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as
follows:
When the tool length compensation number is changed
by H code
When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of
When the tool length compensation amount is changed
using the offset screen, G10 command, system variable,
PMC window, and so forth during automatic operation if
bit 1 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 is set to 1.
When a tool length compensation vector canceled
temporarily during tool length compensation by G53,
G28, or G30 is recovered
#7
5001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#1
TLC
TLB
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EVO
TPH
EVR
TAL
OFH
TLB
TLC
Parameter input
Bit path
These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type
TLB
0
1
-
TLC
0
0
1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to

type as described below.
Tool length compensation A :
Z-axis at all times
Tool length compensation B :
Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C :
Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44
- 276 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#2
OFH
A.PARAMETERS
In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to

specify a compensation number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
When this parameter is 1, if tool length
compensation and cutter compensation are
specified in the same block, cutter compensation is
prioritized.
#3
TAL

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
#4
EVR
When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation

mode:
0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or
H code is specified.
1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is
next performed.
#5
TPH
In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a
compensation number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of
parameter No. 5001 is 0.
#6
EVO
If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length

compensation A or tool length compensation B in the offset mode
(G43 or G44):
0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an
H code is specified next.
1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is
performed next.
- 277 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
#7
#6
#5
B-64304EN-2/01
#4
#3
5003
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#1
SUV
SUP
SUP
SUV
#2
#1
#0
SUV
SUP
Parameter input
Bit path
These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter
compensation or tool nose radius compensation.
Type
Operation
Type A A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or the block preceding
the cancellation block is output.
Tool nose radius center path /
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
0
Type B A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block and an
intersection vector are output.
Intersection point

Tool center path
Programmed path
G41
N2
N1
0
1
Type C When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation, the tool is shifted
by the cutter compensation amount in a direction perpendicular to the block next to the startup or
the block before cancellation block.
Intersection point
Tool center path
G41
Shift
Programmed path
N3
N2
N1block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the SUP setting; if
When the
SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.
NOTE
When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation
equivalent to that of FS0i-TC is performed.
- 278 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
#6
#5
5005
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
QNI
TOS
#6
#5
CNC
CNV
#0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Set a tool length compensation operation.
0: Tool length compensation is performed by an axis movement.
1: Tool length compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate
system.
#6
#5
5008
#1
#3
#1
TOS
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
With the tool length measurement function, a tool compensation

number is selected by:
0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection
based on cursor operation).
1: Signal input from the PMC.
#7
#6
#3
Parameter input
Bit path
5006
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
QNI
#4
#3
#2
CNV
#1
#0
CNC
Parameter input
Bit path
These bits are used to select an interference check method in the cutter
compensation or tool nose radius compensation mode.
CNV
CNC
0
1
1
-
Operation
Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an
arc are checked.
Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked.
Interference check is disabled.
For the operation taken when the interference check shows the
occurrence of an reference (overcutting) , see the description of bit 5
(CAV) of parameter No. 19607.
NOTE
Checking of only the direction cannot be set.
- 279 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5010
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter or tool nose
radius compensation
Setting input
Real path
9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool
nose radius compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel
amount resulting from compensation is set. This limit eliminates the
interruption of buffering caused by the small travel amount generated
at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the interruption.
Vx
If Vx Vlimit and VY Vlimit,

this vector is ignored.
V Y
Even if Vx Vlimit and

VY Vlimit, vector to
single-block stop point
remains.
Tool center path

N1
Programmed path
N2
Vlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.
#7
#6
#5
#4
5042
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
#2
#1
#0
OFC
OFA
Parameter input
Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power
must be turned off before operation is continued.
#0
#1
OFA
OFC
These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data
range of a tool offset value.
For metric input
OFC
OFA
0
0
1
1
0
0
- 280 -
Unit
0.01mm
0.001mm
0.0001mm
Valid data range

9999.99mm
9999.999mm
9999.9999mm
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
For inch input

OFC
OFA
0
0
1
#7
Unit
1
0
0
#6
Valid data range

999.999inch
999.9999inch
999.99999inch
0.001inch
0.0001inch
0.00001inch
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5101
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FXY
Parameter input
Bit path
The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the
grinding canned cycle is:
0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle:
Z-axis at all times.
In case of the Grinding canned cycle:
G75,G77 command :Y-axis
G78,G79 command :Z-axis
1: Axis selected by the program
#7
#6
#5
5105
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SBC
#0
FXY
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SBC
Parameter input
Bit path
In each of a drilling canned cycle, chamfering/corner rounding cycle,
0: A single block stop is not carried out.
1: A single block stop is carried out.
- 281 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5114
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle
Parameter input
Real path
table (A))
This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle.
G73
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
q
Z point
5115
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle
Parameter input
Real path
table (A))
This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.
G83
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
q
d
d
q
Z point
- 282 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5148
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back

boring cycle
Parameter input
Byte axis
-5 to 5
This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after
spindle orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For
each boring axis, an axis and direction for tool retraction after
orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number.
Example)
Suppose that:
When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after
orientation is -Y.
When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after
orientation is +Z.
When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after
orientation is -X.
Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes
are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively):
Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction
is -Y.)
Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction
direction is +Z.)
Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction
is -X.)
Set 0 for other axes.
#7
#6
#5
5160
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
NOL
OLS
#0
Parameter input
Bit path
#1
OLS
When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling

cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
#2
NOL
When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload

torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
- 283 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5163
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5164
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter
Parameter input
2-word path
1 to 99999999
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle
mode of a small diameter.
Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next
advancing after an overload torque detection signal is received
Parameter input
Word path
%
1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted because the
overload torque detection signal is received.
S2 = S1 d1 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d1 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
5165
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next

advancing when no overload torque detection signal is received
Parameter input
Word path
%
1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
at the start of the next advancing after the tool is retracted without the
overload torque detection signal received.
S2 = S1 d2 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d2 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
- 284 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5166
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
A.PARAMETERS
Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next

cutting after an overload torque detection signal is received
Parameter input
Word path
%
1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be
changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances
because the overload torque detection signal is received.
F2 = F1 b1 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b1 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5167
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next

cutting when no overload torque detection signal is received
Parameter input
Word path
%
1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be
changed at the start of cutting after the tool is retracted and advances
without the overload torque detection signal received.
F2 = F1 b2 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5168
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of
a small diameter
Parameter input
Byte path
%
1 to 255
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting
feedrate changed repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F b3 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
- 285 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5170
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5171
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5172
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5173
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of

retractions during cutting
Parameter input
Word path
100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable
to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted
during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common
variables #500 to #599.
Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of
retractions because of the reception of an overload torque detection signal
Parameter input
Word path
100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable
to which to output the total number of times the tool is retracted after
the overload torque detection signal is received during cutting. The
total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to #599.
Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified
Parameter input
Real path
mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no
address I is specified.
Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when
no address I is specified
Parameter input
Real path
mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just
before the bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is
specified.
- 286 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5174
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5176
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
A.PARAMETERS
Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter
Parameter input
Real path
table (A))
This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter.
Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to
cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at
the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456
alarm is also issued.
5177
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding

Cycle(G77)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension
Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77).
NOTE
- 287 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5178
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface
grinding cycle(G78).
NOTE
5179
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface
NOTE
5180
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or
grinding axis can be specified. When the axis
number which is same to cutting axis or grinding
axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the
time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed
when this parameter value is 0 and address "L" is
specified in NC program, the PS0456 alarm is also
issued.
- 288 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5181
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
A.PARAMETERS
Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding

cycle(G77)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension
plunge grinding cycle(G77).
NOTE
issued.
5182
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding

cycle(G78)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface
NOTE
issued.
- 289 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5183
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)
Parameter input
Byte path
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface
NOTE
issued.
#7
5200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
#4
FHD
PCP
DOV
#3
#2
#1
#0
G84
Parameter input
Bit path
#0
G84
Method for specifying rigid tapping:

0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to
the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter
No.5210).
1: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84
cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be
used for the reverse tapping cycle.)
#4
DOV
Override during extraction in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated (The override value is set in parameter No.5211.
However, set an override value for rigid tapping return in
parameter No.5381.)
#5
PCP
Address Q is specified in a tapping cycle/rigid tapping:

0: A high-speed peck tapping cycle is assumed.
1: A peck tapping cycle is assumed.
NOTE
In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit
6 (PCT) of parameter No. 5104 is 1. When bit 6
(PCT) of parameter No. 5104 is 0, a (high-speed)
peck tapping cycle is not assumed.
- 290 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#6
FHD
Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated
#7
#6
#5
5201
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
OV3
OVU
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit path
#3
OVU
The increment unit of the override parameter (No.5211) for tool rigid
tapping extraction is:
0: 1%
1: 10%
#4
OV3
A spindle speed for extraction is programmed, so override for

extraction operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7
5202
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OVE
Parameter input
Bit path
NOTE
continued.
#6
OVE
The specification range of extraction override command (address J) by

rigid tapping program specification is:
0: 100% to 200%.
1: 100% to 2000%.
NOTE
1 To enable the extraction override command
(address J) by program specification, set bit 4
(OV3) of parameter No.5201 to 1.
2 When this parameter is set to 1, the operation
equivalent to that of the FS0i-C is assumed.
- 291 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
#7
#6
#5
5203
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
OVS
5211
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OVS
Parameter input
Bit path
In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select signal and
cancellation of override by the override cancel signal is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When feedrate override is enabled, extraction override is disabled.
The spindle override is clamped to 100% during rigid tapping,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.
Override value during rigid tapping extraction
Parameter input
Word path
1% or 10%
0 to 200
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTE
The override value is valid when bit 4 (DOV) of
parameter No.5200 is set to 1. When bit 3 (OVU) of
parameter No.5201 is set to 1, the unit of set data is
10%. An override of up to 200% can be applied to
extraction.
- 292 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5213
Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real path
Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis
This parameter sets the escape value of a high-speed peck tapping
cycle or the clearance value of a peck tapping cycle.
When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200) is

set to 0.
When the parameter PCP (bit 5 of No.5200)

is set to 1.
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
R point
q
q
d
d
Z point
Z point
NOTE
1 In a tapping cycle, this parameter is valid when bit
6 (PCT) of parameter No. 5104 is 1.
2 For the diameter axis, set this parameter using the
diameter value.
- 293 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5241
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first gear)
5242
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second gear)
5243
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third gear)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
2-word spindle
min-1
0 to 9999
Spindle position coder gear ratio
1 : 1 0 to 7400
1 : 2 0 to 9999
1 : 4 0 to 9999
1 : 8 0 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for
each gear in rigid tapping.
Set the same value for both parameter No.5241 and parameter
No.5243 for a one-stage gear system. For a two-stage gear system, set
the same value as set in parameter No. 5242 in parameter No. 5243.
Otherwise, alarm PS0200 will be issued.
5321
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first-stage gear)
5322
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second-stage gear)
5323
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third-stage gear)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5400
[Input type]
[Data type]
Parameter input
Word spindle
Detection unit
-9999 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a spindle backlash.
#7
#6
SCR
XSC
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RIN
Parameter input
Bit path
#0
RIN
Coordinate rotation angle command (R) :

0: Specified by an absolute method
1: Specified by an absolute method (G90) or incremental method
(G91)
#6
XSC
The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 294 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
SCR
Scaling (G51) magnification unit:

0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SCLx
5410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
[Valid data range]
#0
SCLx
Parameter input
Bit axis
Scaling on this axis:
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for
coordinate system rotation
Setting input
2-word path
0.001 degree
-360000 to 360000
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system
rotation. When the angular displacement for coordinate system
rotation is not specified with address R in the block where G68 is
specified, the setting of this parameter is used as the angular
displacement for coordinate system rotation.
5411
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
#1
Scaling (G51) magnification
Setting input
2-word path
0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter
No.5400)
1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling
is disabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no
scaling magnification (P) is specified in the program, the setting of
this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400 is set to 1,
the valid data range is 1 to 9999999.
- 295 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5421
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Scaling magnification for each axis
Setting input
2-word axis
0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter
No.5400)
-999999999 to 1, 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when
axis-by-axis scaling is enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No.
5400 set to 1). For the first spindle to the third spindle (X-axis to
Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification
if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400 is set to 1,
the valid data ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to
9999999.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5431
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
#0
MDL
Parameter input
Bit path
NOTE
continued.
#0
MDL
5440
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
The G60 code (one-direction positioning) is:

0: One-shot G code (group 00).
1: Modal G code (group 01).
Positioning direction and overrun distance in single directional positioning
Parameter input
Real axis
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
table (A))
This parameter sets the positioning direction and overrun distance in
single directional positioning (G60) for each axis. The positioning
direction is specified using a setting data sign, and the overrun
distance using a value set here.
Overrun distance>0: The positioning direction is positive (+).
Overrun distance<0: The positioning direction is negative (-).
Overrun distance=0: Single directional positioning is not performed.
- 296 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
5480
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction
Parameter input
Byte path
1 to the maximum controlled axis number
This parameter sets the controlled axis number of the axis for
controlling the normal direction.
5481
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5482
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Feedrate of rotation of the normal direction controlled axis
Parameter input
Real axis
deg/min
This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal
direction controlled axis that is inserted at the start point of a block
during normal direction control.
Limit value used to determine whether to ignore the rotation insertion of the
normal direction controlled axis
Parameter input
Real path
Degree
The rotation block of the normal direction controlled axis is not
inserted when the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal
direction control does not exceed this setting.
The ignored rotation angle is added to the next rotation insertion angle,
and the block insertion is then judged.
NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more
degrees are set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is
inserted only when the circular interpolation setting
is 180 or more degrees.
#7
5500
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
REL
#6
#5
SIM
#4
#3
#2
#1
G90
INC
ABS
REL
#0
Parameter input
Bit path
The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative
coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
- 297 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#2
ABS
The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
#3
INC
When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction

(parameter No.5511) is not set, rotation in the G90 mode is:
0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference.
1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference. (Set bit 2 (ABS)
of parameter No.5500, to 1.)
#4
G90
A command for the index table indexing axis is:

0: Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command according to
the mode.
1: Always assumed to be an absolute command.
#6
SIM
When the same block includes a command for the index table
indexing axis and a command for another controlled axis:
0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No.5502 is followed.
1: The commands are executed.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm
(PS1564) is issued if the block is neither G00, G28,
nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5501
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#0
ITI
ITI
Parameter input
Bit path
The index table indexing function is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
NOTE
To enable the index table indexing function, set bit
3 (IXC) of parameter No. 8132 to 1 in addition to
this parameter. The index table indexing function
is enabled only when both ITI and IXC are enabled.
#7
#6
#5
5502
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IXSx
Parameter input
Bit axis
- 298 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#0
IXSx
A.PARAMETERS
When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for

the index table indexing axis:
0 : An alarm (PS1564) is issued.
1 : The command is executed.
If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No.5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous
operation with all axes except the index table indexing axis can be
performed regardless of the setting of this parameter.
To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set
SIM to 0, and set this parameter.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm
(PS1564) is issued if the block is neither G00, G28,
nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
5511
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table
indexing
Parameter input
2-word path
0 to 99999999
0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is
determined according to the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter
No.5500 and a command.
1 to 99999999:
The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always
performed in the positive direction. Rotation in the negative
direction is performed only when the M code set in this
parameter is specified together with a movement command.
NOTE
Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500 to 1.
- 299 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
5512
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-64304EN-2/01
Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis
Parameter input
Real path
deg
table (A))
This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance)
for the index table indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the
positioning command must always be an integer multiple of this
setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked.
The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command,
but also for the coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.
NOTE
When the setting is 0, specification can be
performed regardless of the minimum angle.
#7
#6
#5
6000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
HGO
#1
#0
MGO
Parameter input
Bit path
#1
MGO
When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is

executed, a high-speed branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from
the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from
the start of the executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the
start of the program.
#4
HGO
When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is

executed, a high-speed branch to the 30 sequence numbers
immediately before the executed statement is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
#7
6210
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
MDC
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MDC
Parameter input
Bit path
The measurement result of automatic tool length measurement is:
0: Added to the current offset.
1: Subtracted from the current offset.
- 300 -
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
A.PARAMETERS
6241
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement

(for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals)
6242

6243

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real path
mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of
automatic tool length measurement.
NOTE
When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is
0, the setting of parameter No. 6241 is used.
6251
value during automatic tool length measurement

6252

6253

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
2-word path
mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
table (A))
These parameters set the relevant value during automatic tool length
measurement.
NOTE
1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter
No. 6252 or 6253 is 0, the setting of parameter No.
6251 is used.
2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter
or radius programming is specified.
- 301 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01

6254
6255

6256

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
2-word path
mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
table (A))
These parameters set the relevant value during automatic tool length
measurement.
NOTE
1 For the M series, when the setting of
parameter No. 6252 or 6253 is 0, the setting
of parameter No. 6251 is used.
2 Set a radius value regardless of whether
diameter or radius programming is specified.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
ABS
For the move command after manual intervention in the manual

absolute on state:
0: Different paths are used in the absolute (G90) and incremental
(G91) modes.
1: The same path (path in the absolute mode) is used in the absolute
(G90) and incremental (G91) modes.
#7
#0
HBR
#0
Parameter input
Bit path
#6
#5
7700
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
ABS
#4
#3
#2
HDR
#1
#0
HBR
Parameter input
Bit path
When the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used, performing a
reset:
0: Cancels the synchronous mode (G81).
1: Does not cancel the synchronous mode. The mode is canceled
only by the G80 command.
- 302 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#2
HDR
Direction of helical gear compensation (usually, set 1.)

(Example) To cut a left-twisted helical gear when the direction of
rotation about the C-axis is the negative (-) direction:
0: Set a negative (-) value in P.
1: Set a positive (+) value in P.
When HDR = 1
+Z
-Z
+Z
-Z
(a)
C : +, Z : +, P : +
Compensation direction:+
+C
+C
C : +, Z : +, P : Compensation direction:-
(e)
(f)
C : +, Z : -, P : +
Compensation direction:-
+C
C : +, Z : -, P : Compensation direction:+
(h)
(g)
-C
-C
C : -, Z : +, P : +
C : Compensation direction:-
(d)
(c)
(b)
+C
-C
-C
C : -, Z : +, P : Compensation direction:+
C : -, Z : -, P : +
Compensation direction:+
C : -, Z : -, P : Compensation direction:-
When HDR = 0 ((a), (b), (c), and (d) are the same as when HDR = 1)
+Z
(e)
C : -, Z : +, P : +
-Z Compensation direction:+
#7
C : -, Z : +, P : Compensation direction:-
#5
7701
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
LZR
-C
-C
-C
#6
(h)
(g)
(f)
-C
#4
C : -, Z : -, P : +
Compensation direction:-
#3
#2
C : -, Z : -, P : Compensation direction:+
#1
#0
LZR
Parameter input
Bit path
When L (number of hob threads) = 0 is specified at the start of EGB
synchronization (G81):
0: Synchronization is started, assuming that L = 1 is specified.
1: Synchronization is not started, assuming that L = 0 is specified.
However, helical gear compensation is performed.
- 303 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
#7
#6
#5
B-64304EN-2/01
#4
7702
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
TDP
#3
#2
#1
ART
#0
TDP
Parameter input
Bit path
The specifiable number of teeth, T, of the electronic gear box (G81)
is:
0: 1 to 1000
1: 0.1 to 100 (1/10 of a specified value)
NOTE
In either case, a value from 1 to 1000 can be
specified.
#3
ART
The retract function executed when an alarm is issued is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When an alarm is issued, a retract operation is performed with a set
feedrate and travel distance (parameter Nos. 7740 and 7741).
NOTE
If a servo alarm is issued for other than the axis
along which a retract operation is performed, the
servo activating current is maintained until the
retract operation is completed.
#7
#6
#5
7703
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ARO
ARE
ERV
Parameter input
Bit path
#0
ERV
During EGB synchronization (G81), feed per revolution is performed

for:
0: Feedback pulses.
1: Pulses converted to the speed for the workpiece axis.
#1
ARE
In the retract function by an alarm, retract operation is:

0: Performed during EGB synchronization or automatic operation
(automatic operation signal = 1).
1: Determined by the setting of parameter ARO.
- 304 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#2
ARO
The retract function executed when an alarm is issued retracts the tool
during:
0: EGB synchronization.
1: EGB synchronization and automatic operation (automatic
operation signal OP = 1).
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 1 (ARE) of
parameter No. 7703 is set to 1.
The following table lists the parameter settings and corresponding
operation.
ARE
1
1
0
0
ARO
0
1
0
1
Operation
During EGB synchronization
During EGB synchronization and automatic operation
During EGB synchronization or automatic operation
NOTE
Parameters ARE and ARO are valid when bit 3
(ART) of parameter No. 7702 is set to 1 (when the
retract function executed when an alarm is
issued ).
#7
#6
#5
7731
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
EFX
#4
#3
RTS
ECN
#2
#1
#0
EHF
EFX
Parameter input
Bit path
As the EGB command:
0: G80 and G81 are used.
1: G80.4 and G81.4 are used.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, no drilling canned
cycle can be used.
#1
EHF
Feed-forward control for the axial feed axis for helical compensation
is:
0: Enabled only during cutting.
1: Always enabled in the G81 synchronous mode.
Usually, set 0.
Feed-forward control is usually enabled in the cutting feed mode.
When this parameter is set to 1, feed-forward control is always
enabled for the axial feed axis for helical compensation during
synchronization by the command (G81) for a hobbing machine.
When bit 3 (FFR) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, feed-forward
control is always enabled regardless of the setting of this parameter.
- 305 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#3
ECN
During EGB synchronization:

0: G81 cannot be specified again. (An alarm (PS1595) occurs.)
1: G81 can be specified.
#4
RTS
When an OT alarm or axis type malfunction protection alarm is issued

during EGB retract operation:
0: Only the axis for which the alarm is issued is stopped.
1: All axes are stopped.
7740
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Feedrate during retraction
Parameter input
Real axis
This parameter sets the feedrate during retraction for each axis.
7741
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7772
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Retracted distance
Parameter input
Real axis
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
table (A))
This parameter sets the retracted distance for each axis.
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about the tool axis
Parameter input
2-word path
1 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of pulses per rotation about the tool
axis (on the spindle side), for the position detector.
For an A/B phase detector, set this parameter with four pulses
equaling one A/B phase cycle.
NOTE
Specify the number of feedback pulses per rotation
about the tool axis for the position detector,
considering the gear ratio with respect to the
position coder.
- 306 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
7773
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about the workpiece axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
2-word path
1 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of pulses per rotation about the
workpiece axis (on the slave side), for the position detector.
Set the number of pulses output by the detection unit.
Set parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773 when using the G81 EGB
synchronization command.
[Example 1]
When the EGB master axis is the spindle and the EGB slave axis is
the C-axis
CNC
Slave axis
Command
pulses
FFG
n/m
CMR
Least command increment

0.001deg
Dummy axis
Follow-up
Error counter
Speed/current control
Detection unit
Synchronization
switch
CMR
p/rev
Detector
Motor
Gear
ratio B
Synchronization
factor
FFG
N/M
Gear ratio
A
Spindle C-axis
Detector
p/rev
Error counter
Gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B:

1/1 (The spindle and detector are directly connected to each
other.)
Number of detector pulses per spindle rotation : 80,000 pulses/rev
(Calculated for four pulses for one A/B phase cycle)
FFG N/M of the EGB dummy axis: 1/1
Gear ratio of the C-axis A: 1/36 (One rotation about the C-axis to 36
motor rotations)
Number of detector pulses per C-axis rotation : 1,000,000 pulses/rev
C-axis CMR:
1
C-axis FFG n/m:
1/100
In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is:
80000 1/1 = 80000
Therefore, set 80000 for parameter No. 7772.
The number of pulses per C-axis rotation in the detection unit is:
1000000 1/36 1/100 = 360000
Therefore, set 360000 for parameter No. 7773.
- 307 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
[Example 2]
B-64304EN-2/01
When the gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B is 2/3 for the
above example (When the detector rotates twice for three spindle
rotations)
In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is:
80000
2 160000
=
3
3
160000 cannot be divided by 3 without a remainder. In this case,

change the setting of parameter No. 7773 so that the ratio of the
settings of parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773 indicates the value you
want to set.
160000
No.7772
160000
3 = 160000
=
=
No.7773
360000
360000 3 1080000
Therefore, set 160000 for parameter No. 7772 and 1080000 for
parameter No. 7773.
As described above, all the settings of parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773
have to do is to indicate the ratio correctly. So, you can reduce the
fraction indicated by the settings. For example, you may set 16 for
parameter No. 7772 and 108 for parameter No. 7773 for this case.
#7
#6
8132
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
IXC
#5
#4
#3
SCL
SPK
IXC
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Index table indexing is:
0: Not Used.
1: Used.
NOTE
When enabling the index table indexing function,
set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0 in addition
to this parameter. The index table indexing
function is enabled only when both ITI and IXC are
enabled.
#4
SPK
Small-hole peck drilling cycle is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#5
SCL
Scaling is:
0: Not Used.
1: Used.
NOTE
A small-hole peck drilling cycle and scaling cannot
be used at the same time.
- 308 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#7
8136
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NGW
NOTE
continued.
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
NGW
Parameter input
Bit
Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation
(T series) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7
#6
#5
11600
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
AX1
#4
#3
#2
#1
Parameter input
Bit path
When coordinate rotation mode is in effect, if one axis is commanded
in absolute mode:
0: A commanded position is calculated in the coordinate system
before it is rotated.
1: The coordinate system is rotated and then a shift to a commanded
position occurs on the rotated coordinate system.
(Parameter to have compatibility with FS0i-C)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
11630
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FRD
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
CCC
#0
FRD
Parameter input
Bit path
The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of coordinate
rotation is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree. (1/100,000)
#7
19607
#0
AX1
#6
#5
NAA
CAV
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
CCC
Parameter input
Bit path
In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the
outer corner connection method is based on:
0: Linear connection type.
1: Circular connection type.
- 309 -
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
#5
CAV
When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting)

occurred:
0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041).
(Interference check alarm function)
1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent
interference (overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check
avoidance function)
For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC)
of parameter No. 5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.
#6
NAA
When the interference check avoidance function considers that an

avoidance operation is dangerous or that a further interference to the
interference avoidance vector occurs:
0: An alarm is issued.
When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the
alarm (PS5447) is issued.
When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector
is considered to occur, the alarm (PS5448) is issued.
1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.
CAUTION
When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be
shifted largely. Therefore, set this parameter to 0
unless special reasons are present.
19625
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius

compensation mode
Setting input
Byte path
3 to 8
This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode. When a value less
than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is assumed. When a value greater
than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a greater number of
blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made
with a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read
and analyzed increases, so that a longer block processing time
becomes necessary.
Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by
stopping in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation
mode, the setting does not become valid immediately. Before the new
setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter compensation
mode must be canceled, then the mode must be entered again.
- 310 -
A.2
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
DATA TYPE
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type
Bit
Bit machine group
Bit path
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
Byte path
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
Word path
Word axis
Word spindle
2-word
2-word machine group
2-word path
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group
Real path
Real axis
Real spindle
Valid data range
Remarks
0 or 1
-128 to 127
0 to 255
Some parameters handle

these types of data as
unsigned data.
-32768 to 32767
0 to 65535

unsigned data.
0 to 999999999

unsigned data.
See the Standard

Parameter Setting
Tables.
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and bit
spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight different
meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each machine
group. For the 0i -D/0i Mate-D, the maximum number of machine groups is always
1.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control axes
are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of spindles
are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range varies
according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific parameter, see
the explanation of the parameter.
- 311 -
A.PARAMETERS
A.3
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES

This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data
ranges of the CNC parameters of the real type, real machine group
type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type
and unit of data of each parameter conform to the specifications of
each function.
NOTE
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest
multiples of the minimum data unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and
may differ from values representing actual
performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the
CNC, refer to Appendix D, "Range of Command
Value" in the USERS MANUAL (B-64304EN).
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)
Unit of data
Increment
system
Minimum
data unit
mm
deg.
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
inch
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
Valid data range

-999999.99
-999999.999
-99999.9999
-99999.999
-99999.9999
-9999.99999
to +999999.99
to +999999.999
to +99999.9999
to +99999.999
to +99999.9999
to +9999.99999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

Unit of data
Increment
system
Minimum
data unit
mm
deg.
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00
0.000
0.0000
to +999999.99
to +999999.999
to +99999.9999
inch
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
to +99999.999
to +99999.9999
to +9999.99999
- 312 -
Valid data range
A.PARAMETERS
APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

Unit of data
Increment
system
Minimum
data unit
mm/min
degree/min
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.0 to +999000.00
0.0 to +999000.000
0.0 to +99999.9999
inch/min
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0 to +96000.000
0.0 to +9600.0000
0.0 to +4000.00000
Valid data range
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges
for IS-C are extended as follows:
Unit of data
Increment
system
Minimum
data unit
Valid data range
mm/min
degree/min
IS-C
0.001
0.000 to +999000.000
inch/min
IS-C
0.0001
0.0000 to +9600.0000
(D)Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

Unit of data
Increment
system
Minimum
data unit
mm/sec2
deg./sec2
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00
0.000
0.0000
to +999999.99
to +999999.999
to +99999.9999
inch/sec2
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000
0.0000
0.00000
to +99999.999
to +99999.9999
to +9999.99999
Valid data range
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges
for IS-C are extended as follows:
Unit of data
Increment
system
mm/min
degree/min
IS-C
inch/min
IS-C
Minimum
data unit
Valid data range
0.001
0.000 to +999999.999
0.0001
0.0000 to +99999.9999
- 313 -
B.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX
B-64304EN-2/01
DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C

Appendix B, "Differences from Series 0i-C", consists of the following
sections:
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
B.6
B.7
B.8
B.9
B.10
B.11
B.12
B.13
B.14
B.15
B.16
B.17
B.18
B.19
B.20
B.21
B.22
B.23
B.24
B.25
B.26
B.27
B.28
B.29
B.30
B.31
B.32
B.33
B.34
B.35
B.36
B.37
B.38
SETTING UNIT .....................................................................315

AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET .............................................316
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION ...........................................318
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ..............................................319
SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................320
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN...................322
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................325
LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM .......................................326
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................328
SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ...........................329
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL .......................330
TOOL FUNCTIONS ..............................................................331
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY ..................................332
CUSTOM MACRO................................................................333
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO .......................336
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..............337
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL /AI CONTOUR
CONTROL .............................................................................338
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ......341
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ....................................342
ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL.......................347
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY....................348
MANUAL HANDLE FEED ..................................................349
PMC AXIS CONTROL..........................................................350
EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ......................355
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH.........................................356
STORED STROKE CHECK..................................................357
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION......................359
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION.........................................360
RESET AND REWIND .........................................................361
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF ................................362
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ..................................................363
DATA SERVER FUNCTION................................................365
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER........................................366
CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION.................................................................367
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING .....................................373
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.............................................375
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING .................................376
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER
ROUNDING...........................................................................377
- 314 -
APPENDIX B.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C
B-64304EN-2/01
B.1
SETTING UNIT
B.1.1
Differences in Specifications
Function
Diameter/radius
specification in the
move command for
each axis
Explanation
-
Make a selection using bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006

The move command for each axis specifies:
0: Radius.
1: Diameter.
With Series 0i-C, in order for an axis whose diameter is specified to travel the specified
distance, it is necessary not only to set 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 but also to
make either of the following two changes:
- Reduce the command multiplier (CMR) to half. (The detection unit does not need to
be changed.)
- Reduce the detection unit to half, and double the flexible feed gear (DMR).
With Series 0i-D, by contrast, just setting 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 causes
the CNC to reduce the command pulses to half, eliminating the need to make the
changes described above (when the detection unit is not changed).
Note that, when the detection unit is reduced to half, both the CMR and DMR need to be
doubled.
B.1.2
Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.
- 315 -
B.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET
B.2.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Operation of the
current offset for the
measurement result
B-64304EN-2/01
Added to the current offset.
Setting of the feedrate

for measurement
Set the value in parameter No. 6241.

This is a parameter common to the
measuring position reached signals
(XAE, YAE, and ZAE).
Setting of the value

- 316 -
Series 0i-D
-
Select whether to add or subtract, by

using bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No.
6210.
Bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210

The measurement result of automatic tool
length measurement (system M) or
automatic tool compensation (system T) is:
0: Added to the current offset.
1: Subtracted from the current offset.
- Parameter No. 6241
This is a parameter for the measuring
position reached signals (XAE1 and
GAE1).
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter Nos. 6242 and
6243, the value in parameter No. 6241
becomes valid.
GAE1).
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter No. 6252 and
becomes valid.
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Setting of the value
B.2.2


None.
- 317 -
Series 0i-D
-
Parameter No. 6254

GAE1).
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter Nos. 6255 and
becomes valid.
B.3
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
B.3.1
Function
Interpolation method
when the arc end
point is not on the arc
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Series 0i-D
If the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point of an arc is
greater than the value set in parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is issued. If the
difference is smaller (the end point is not on the arc), circular interpolation is performed
as follows.
- Circular interpolation is performed using - Helical interpolation is performed as
shown in the figure below.
the radius value of the start point and,
End point
when an axis reaches the end point, it is
moved linearly.
e
(t)
Parameter No. 3410

In a circular interpolation command, set the
limit allowed for the difference between the
radius values of the start point and end
point.
Start
(t)
(t) = s +
( e s) (t )
point
s
Radius
s
e
Start point
End point
Center
In other words, the radius of the arc moves

linearly according to the center angle (t).
Specifying an arc where the arc radius of
the start point differs from that of the end
point enables helical interpolation. When
performing helical interpolation, set a large
value in parameter No. 3410 that specifies
the limit for the arc radius difference.
B.3.2

None.
- 318 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.4
HELICAL INTERPOLATION
B.4.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Specification of the
feedrate
Specify the feedrate along a circular

arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the
linear axis is as follows:
Length of linear axis
F
Length of circular arc
Series 0i-D
-
Make a selection using bit 5 (HTG) of

parameter No. 1403.
0: Same as left.
1: Specify a feedrate along the tool path
including the linear axis. Therefore, the
tangential velocity of the arc is expressed
as follows:
Length of arc
F
(Length of arc)2(Length of linear axis)2
The velocity along the linear axis is expressed
as follows:
Length of linear axis
F
(Length of arc)2(Length of linear axis)2
Helical cutting
feedrate clamp
B.4.2
Make a selection using bit 0 (HFC)

of parameter No. 1404.
0: The feedrate of the arc and
linear axes is clamped by
parameter No. 1422 or No.1430.
1: The combined feedrate along
the tool path including the linear
axis is clamped by parameter
No. 1422.

None.
- 319 -
For details, refer to "HELICAL

INTERPOLATION" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).
- Bit 0 (HFC) of parameter No. 1404 is not
available.
The feedrate of the arc and linear axes is
clamped by parameter No. 1430.
B.5
SKIP FUNCTION
B.5.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Setting to enable the
high-speed skip signal
for normal skip (G31)
when the multi-stage
skip function is enabled
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
Set 1 in bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No.

6200.
Multi-stage
skip
function
Disabled
Enabled
Set 1 in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No.

6200.
Parameter to decide on use
of the high-speed skip signal
FS0i-C
FS0i-D
Command
G31 (normal skip)
HSS
HSS
G31 (normal skip)
SLS
HSS
G31P1 to G31P4 (multi-stage skip)
SLS
SLS
Target of
acceleration/deceleration
and servo system delay
compensation
Method of
and servo system delay
compensation
Compensation is performed for the

skip coordinates obtained when the
high-speed skip signal is set to "1".
Skip cutting feedrate

(normal skip)
There are two ways to perform

compensation, as follows.
[Compensating the value calculated
from the cutting constant and servo
constant]
Set 1 in bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No.
6201.
[Compensating the accumulated
pulses and positional deviation due to
acceleration/deceleration]
Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
6201.
Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program
Compensation is performed for the

skip coordinates obtained when the
skip or high-speed skip signal is set to
"1".
Bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. 6201 is
not available.
There is only one way to perform
compensation, as follows.
[Compensating the accumulated
pulses and positional deviation due to
acceleration/deceleration]
Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
6201.
Depends on bit 1 (SFP) of parameter

No. 6207. When 0 is set, the
processing is the same as Series
0i-C.
Bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

The feedrate during the skip function
(G31) is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter No.
6281.
- 320 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Skip cutting feedrate
(skip using the
high-speed skip signal or
multi-step skip)
Axis to monitor to check

whether the torque limit
has been reached
(torque limit skip)
High-speed skip signal

input for the G31 P99
command
(torque limit skip)
Setting of a positional
deviation limit in the
torque limit skip
command
(torque limit skip)
When G31 P99/98 is
specified without a
torque limit being
specified in advance
(torque limit skip)
B.5.2
Feedrate specified by the F code in

the program
Depends on bit 3 (TSA) of parameter

No. 6201.
Series 0i-D
-
Depends on bit 2 (SFN) of parameter

processing is the same as Series
0i-C.
Bit 2 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

When the skip function using the
high-speed skip signal (1 is set in bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200) or the
multi-step skip function is executed, the
feedrate is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter Nos.
6282 to 6285.
- Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 is
not available.
Only the axis specified in the same
block as G31 P99/98 is monitored.
Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201

To check whether the torque limit has
been reached, the torque limit skip
function (G31 P99/98) monitors:
0: All axes.
1: Only the axis specified in the same
block as G31 P99/98.
As the skip signal for the G31 P99 command, the high-speed skip signal:
- Cannot be input.
- Can be input.
No parameter is available dedicated to

setting a positional deviation limit for
the torque limit skip function.
The G31 P99/98 command is

executed as is.
(No alarm is issued.)

None.
- 321 -
The value can be set in parameter No.

6287.
Parameter No. 6287

Set a positional deviation limit in the
torque limit skip command for each axis.
- Alarm PS0035 is issued.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.6
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
B.6.1
Function
Conditions for
performing manual
reference position
return during feed
hold
When inch/metric
switch is done
Reference position
setting without dogs
for all axes
Function that
performs reference
position setting
without dogs two or
more times when the
reference position is
not established in
absolute position
detection
Series 0i-C
Series 0i-D
Manual reference position return is performed when automatic operation is halted (feed
hold) and when any of the following conditions is met:
<Conditions>
(1) Travel distance is remaining.
(2) An auxiliary function (M, S, T, or B function) is being executed.
(3) A dwell, canned cycle, or other cycle is in progress.
- Bit 2 (OZR) of parameter No. 1800 is
- Depends on bit 2 (OZR) of parameter
not available.
No. 1800.
Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual
[When OZR = 0]
reference position return is not
Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual
performed.
reference position return is not
performed.
[When OZR = 1]
Manual reference position return is
performed without issuing an alarm.
- The reference position is not lost.
- The reference position is lost.
(The reference position remains
(The reference position is not
established.)
established.)
- Set 1 in bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.
- Bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1002 is
1002.
not available.
Reference position setting without dogs
(bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005) is
set for all axes.
- Not available.
- Depends on bit 4 (GRD) of parameter
No. 1007.
Bit 4 (GRD) of parameter No. 1007
For the axis on which absolute values are
detected, when correspondence between
the machine position and the position by
the absolute position detector is not
completed, the reference position setting
without dogs is:
0: Not performed two or more times.
1: Performed two or more times.
- 322 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Behavior when
manual reference
position return is
started on a rotation
axis with the
deceleration dog
pressed before a
reference position is
established
Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of

parameter No. 1007.
Movement is made at the reference
position return feedrate FL even if the
grid is not established.
Releasing the deceleration dog before
the grid is established causes alarm
PS0090.
Reference position
shift function setting
The function is enabled for all axes by

setting 1 in bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No.
1002.
Setting of whether to
preset the coordinate
system upon
high-speed manual
reference position
return
Not available.
The coordinate system is not preset.
[Rotation axis type = A and bit 0 (RTLx)

of parameter No. 1007 = 0]
PS0090.
[Rotation axis type = A and bit 0 (RTLx)
of parameter No. 1007 = 1]
Movement is made at the rapid
traverse feedrate until the grid is
established.
If the deceleration dog is released
before the grid is established, one
revolution is made at the rapid traverse
feedrate, thus establishing the grid.
Pressing the deceleration dog again
establishes the reference position.
[Rotation axis type = B]
Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of
parameter No. 1007.
PS0090.
Bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No. 1002 is
not available.
Set bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008
for each axis.
Depends on bit 1 (HZP) of parameter
No. 1206.
Bit 1 (HZP) of parameter No.1206

Upon high-speed manual reference
position return, the coordinate system is:
0: Preset.
1: Not preset (FS0i-C compatible
specification).
- 323 -
Series 0i-C
Function
G28/G30 command in
the coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or
programmable mirror
image mode
B-64304EN-2/01
Not available.
Cancel the mode before executing the
command.
Series 0i-D
-
The command can be executed only

when all of the conditions described
below are met.
Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.
<Conditions>
[Conditions required before specifying the
command]
(1) An absolute command is specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image.
(2) Tool length compensation has not been
performed for the target axis of
coordinate system rotation, scaling, or
programmable mirror image when it is
moved by reference position return.
(3) Tool length compensation has been
canceled.
[Conditions required when specifying the
command]
(4) In an incremental command, the travel
distance of the middle point is 0.
[Conditions required after specifying the
command]
(5) The first move command specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image is an absolute command.
B.6.2

None.
- 324 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.7
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
B.7.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Change in absolute
position display when
the workpiece zero
point offset value is
changed
B.7.2
Make a selection using bit 5 (AWK) of

parameter No. 1201.
Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201

When the workpiece zero point offset value
is changed:
0: Changes the absolute position display
when the program executes the block
that is buffered next.
1: Changes the absolute position display
immediately.
In either case, the changed value does not
take effect until the block that is buffered
next.

None.
- 325 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 is

not available.
The tool always behaves as when AWK
is set to 1.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.8
LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
B.8.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Clearing of the local
coordinate system
after servo alarm
cancellation
Series 0i-D
The processing is
determined by the settings
of bit 5 (SNC) and bit 3
(RLC) of parameter No.
1202.
Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.

1202
Upon reset, the local
0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.
Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No.
1202
After servo alarm cancellation,
the local coordinate system is:
0: Cleared.
1: Not cleared.
NOTE
When the RLC bit of the
parameter is set to 1, the local
coordinate system is cleared,
even if the SNC bit of the
parameter is set to 1.
The processing is determined by the settings of bit

7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201, bit 3 (RLC) of
parameter No. 1202, bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402, and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407.
Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1202 is not available.
Bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201

If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
No. 3402 is set to 0, the G code of group number 14
(workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the reset state.
1: Not placed in the reset state.
NOTE
When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, the
processing depends on the setting of bit 6 (C14) of
parameter No. 3407.
Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202
Upon reset, the local coordinate system is:
0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.
NOTE
- When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0
and bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
- When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1
and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407 is set to 0,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402
The reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal,
reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal
places the local coordinate system in:
0: Reset state.
1: Clear state.
Bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407
If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
No. 3402 is set to 1, the G code of group number 14
(workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the clear state.
1: Not placed in the clear state.
- 326 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Operation with the
local coordinate
system setting (G52)
Make a selection using bit 4 (G52) of

parameter No. 1202.
Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202

1) If there are two or more blocks that are
not moved before G52 is specified
during cutter compensation, or if G52 is
specified after the cutter compensation
mode is turned off, with the offset vector
maintained, the local coordinate system
setting is performed:
0: Without considering the cutter
compensation vector.
1: Considering the cutter
compensation vector.
2) When G52 is specified, the local
coordinate system setting is performed
for:
0: All axes.
1: Only those axes whose command
addresses are found in the
G52-specified block.
B.8.2

None.
- 327 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is

not available.
The tool always behaves as when G52
is set to 1.
B.9
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL
B.9.1
Series 0i-C
Function
In-position check
when the Cs contour
control mode is off
B-64304EN-2/01
The in-position check is not made.
Series 0i-D
-
Make a selection using bit 2 (CSNs) of

parameter No. 3729.
Bit 2 (CSNs) of parameter No. 3729

When the Cs contour control mode is off,
the in-position check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
When 1 is set in this parameter, the
processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
B.9.2

Item
Position error display

for Cs contour control
Series 0i-C
For the first spindle, diagnosis display No.
418 is used.
For the second spindle, diagnosis display
No. 420 is used.
- 328 -
Series 0i-D
For both the first and second spindles,
diagnosis display No. 418 (spindle) is used.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.10
SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL
B.10.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Spindle number of the
analog spindle
B.10.2
Series 0i-D
When one serial spindle and one analog spindle are simultaneously controlled in one
path (serial/analog spindle control), the spindle number of the analog spindle is as
follows.
Third spindle
Second spindle
For details about the parameters and other
settings, refer to "SERIAL/ANALOG
SPINDLE CNOTROL" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).

None.
- 329 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.11
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL
B.11.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Constant surface
speed control with no
position coder
This is an optional function for the T

series.
It is not available with the M series.
This is a basic function for both M

series and T series.
It can be used by enabling constant
surface speed control (setting 1 in bit 0
(SSC) of parameter No. 8133) and
setting 1 in bit 2 (PCL) of parameter
No. 1405.
Using bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No.

1407, select whether to enable or
disable the axis feedrate clamp in feed
per revolution when the spindle speed
is clamped by the maximum spindle
speed set in parameter No. 3772.
Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407 is

not available.
The axis feedrate is always clamped.
Using the position coder selection
signal, select the spindle to be used for
feed per revolution. (To use the
position coder selection signal requires
enabling multi-spindle control.)
Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407

In constant surface speed control with no
position coder, when the spindle speed is
clamped by the maximum spindle speed
parameter, the axis feedrate in feed per
revolution is:
0: Not clamped.
1: Clamped.
When 1 is set in this parameter, select the
spindle to be used for feed per revolution
by using the position coder selection signal.
(To use the position coder selection signal
requires enabling multi-spindle control.)
B.11.2
Series 0i-D

None.
- 330 -
The M series does not support the

multi-spindle control function. Therefore,
the second spindle cannot be used for feed
per revolution.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.12
TOOL FUNCTIONS
B.12.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Specification of a G
code of the 00 group
and a T code in the
same block
Behavior when G49
and G40 are specified
in the same block
Specification of the
tool length
compensation amount
(Select the
compensation amount
number with H code.)
Restoration of the tool

length compensation
vector canceled by
specifying G53, G28,
or G30 during tool
length compensation
B.12.2
Series 0i-D
Not allowed.
Not allowed.
Specifying a G code in this way causes
alarm PS0245.
Make a selection using bit 6 (GCS) of

parameter No. 5008.
Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008 is

not available.
The tool always behaves as when 1 is
set in bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No.
5008.
(Tool length compensation is canceled
in the command block.)
Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008

When G49 (tool length compensation
cancellation) and G40 (cutter compensation
cancellation) are specified in the same
block:
0: Tool length compensation is canceled
in the next block.
1: Tool length compensation is canceled
in the block in which the command is
specified.
- Depends on whether the order of
compensation amount numbers
specified by the H code is that of tool
length compensation types A, B, and C,
whether the cutter compensation mode
is on or off, and the setting of bit 2
(OFH) of parameter No. 5001. For
details, refer to Section 14.1, "TOOL
LENGTH COMPENSATION", in
"OPERATOR'S MANUAL"
(B-64124EN).
- The restoration conditions differ
depending on the setting of bit 2 (OFH)
of parameter No. 5001, as well as on
whether the cutter compensation mode
is on or off. For details, refer to
Section 14.1, "TOOL LENGTH
COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64124EN).

None.
- 331 -
Not dependent on the conditions

described at left.
In Series 0i-D, the H code is used to
specify the compensation amount number
(select the compensation amount), and
G43, G44, and G49 are used to select
whether to enable or disable tool length
compensation. For details, refer to
Section 6.1, "TOOL LENGTH
COMPENSATION", in "USER'S MANUAL
(MACHINING CENTER)" (B-64304EN-2).
- Not dependent on the setting of bit 2
(OFH) of parameter No. 5001 or the
cutter compensation mode.
Depends only on the setting of bit 6
(EVO) of parameter No. 5001.
Bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001
For tool length compensation type A or B, if
the tool compensation amount is changed
during the offset mode (G43 or G44), the
vector is restored in:
0: Subsequent block containing a G43 or
G44 command or a H code.
1: Block buffered next.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.13
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY
B.13.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Unit and range of tool
compensation values
Series 0i-D
The unit and range of tool

compensation values are
determined by the setting unit.
Set the unit and range using bit 0 (OFA) and

bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No. 5042.
Bit 0 (OFA) and bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No.

5042
Select the setting unit and range of tool offset
values.
Metric input
OFC OFA
0
1
0
0.001mm
9999.999mm
0.0001mm
9999.9999mm
B.13.2
Make a selection using bit 0 (OIM)

Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006

Upon inch/metric switch, automatic
conversion of tool compensation
values is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the setting of this parameter is
changed, set the tool compensation
data again.

None.
- 332 -
Unit
Range
0.001inch
999.999inch
0.0001inch
999.9999inch
0.00001inch
999.99999inch
Range
9999.99mm
Inch input
OFC OFA
Automatic conversion
of tool compensation
values upon
inch/metric switch
Unit
0.01mm
Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 is not

available.
Tool compensation values are always
converted automatically.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.14
CUSTOM MACRO
B.14.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Keep-type common
variable
(#500 to #999)
The default value is <null>.
The default value is 0.
The Series 0i-D function (described at

right) is not available.
System variable to
read machine
coordinates
#5021 to #5025
Machine coordinates are always read

in machine units (output units).
Logical operations in
an if statement
Logical operations can be used by

setting 1 in bit 0 (MLG) of parameter
No. 6006.
The range specified by parameter Nos.

6031 and 6032 can be made
write-protected (read-only).
Machine coordinates are always read
in input units.
Example) When the setting unit is
IS-B, the input unit is the inch, the
machine unit is the millimeter, and the
coordinate value of the X axis (first
axis) is as follows:
Machine coordinate = 30.000 (mm)
Since the value of #5021 is read in
input units (inches), #5021 is 1.1811.
Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006 is
not available.
Logical operations can always be used.
Behavior of the GOTO

statement when a
sequence number is
not found at the start of
the block
Behavior of "GOTO 0"

when there is a
sequence number
When another NC
command is found in a
G65 block or in an M
code block where a
macro is called by an
M code
Example) G01 X100.
Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006

In an if statement in a custom macro,
logical operations:
0: Cannot be used. (P/S alarm No. 114
is issued.)
1: Can be used.
- The command after the sequence
number of the block (to the right of the
sequence number) is executed.
If a move command is specified before

the sequence number (left side), alarm
PS0128 is issued.
If no move command is specified
before the sequence number (left side),
a block containing a sequence number
is executed from the beginning.
* Use a sequence number at the start of a block.
- The program jumps to the block
- No jump occurs.
containing the sequence number.
Alarm PS1128 is issued.
* Do not use a sequence number.
- A program like the one shown in the
- In a program like the one shown in the
example cannot be executed. Alarm
example, G01 changes the G code
PS0127 is issued.
group to 01, while the move command
A G65 code or an M code that calls a
X100. is not executed. X100. is
macro must be specified at the
regarded as an argument of G65.
beginning of a block (before all other
arguments).
G65 P9001 ;
- 333 -

Function
Behavior when
subprogram call using
an M code and
subprogram call using
an T code are done
Block containing "M98

Pxxxx" or "M99"
without any addresses
other than O, N, P, and
L
Subprogram and
macro calls
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Series 0i-D
- When the machine is run under the conditions and program described below:
[Conditions]
- Subprogram call by T code is enabled (bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 is set
to 1).
- The M code that calls subprogram No. 9001 is M06 (parameter No. 6071 is set to
6).
[Program]
O0001;
T100;
(1)
M06 T200;
(2)
T300 M06;
(3)
M30;
%
In FS0i-D, blocks (1) to (3) of the program
In FS0i-C, blocks (1) to (3) of the program
causes the machine to behave as follows:
causes the machine to behave as follows:
1) Calls and executes O9000.
1) Calls and executes O9000.
2) Issues alarm PS1091.
2) Outputs T200 and waits for FIN.
3) Issues alarm PS1091 (when the
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the
program is run with block (2) deleted).
machine calls and executes O9001.
3) Outputs T300 and waits for FIN.
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the
machine calls and executes O9001.
- Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is
- Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is
not available. The block is always
not available. The block is always
treated as a macro statement. (Single
treated as a macro statement. (Single
block stop is not performed.)
block stop is not performed.)
* For details about macro and NC statements, refer to Section 16.4, "MACRO AND NC
STATEMENTS", in "USER'S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).
- The call nesting level differs as follows.
Series 0i-C
Model
Independent
Call method
nesting level
Macro call
(G65/G66)
Subprogram
call (M98)
Local variable clear

operation by reset
4 in all
Independent
Total
nesting level
(G65/G66/M98)
8 in all
Make a selection using bit 7 (CLV) of

parameter No. 6001.
Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001

When reset, the local variables in the
custom macro are:
0: Cleared to <null>.
1: Not cleared.
B.14.2
Series 0i-D

None.
- 334 -
5 in all
10
Total
(G65/G66/M98)
15 in all
Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 is

not available.
Local variables are always cleared to
<null> when reset.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.14.3
Miscellaneous
Series 0i-D allows you to customize the specifications related to the
maximum and minimum variable values and accuracy by using bit 0
(F0C) of parameter No. 6008. When 1 is set in bit 0 (F0C) of
parameter No. 6008, the specifications are the same as Series 0i-C.
For details, refer to Section 16, "CUSTOM MACRO", in "USER'S
MANUAL" (B-64304EN).
- 335 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.15
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO
B.15.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Interruption type
custom macro in DNC
operation
Program restart
B.15.2
Not available.
Series 0i-D
-
Available.
When an interruption type custom macro is executed during return operation in dry
run after search operation invoked by program restart:
The interruption type custom macro is
Alarm DS0024 is issued.
executed after all axes have restarted.

None.
- 336 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.16
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)
B.16.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Parameter input mode
setting
B.16.2
Specify G10 L50.
Series 0i-D
-

None.
- 337 -
Specify G10 L52.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.17
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL /AI CONTOUR

CONTROL
B.17.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Function name
Setting to enable
bell-shaped
in rapid traverse
Series 0i-D
Some function names have been changed as follows.

- Automatic corner deceleration
- Speed control based on the feedrate
difference on each axis
- Arc radius-based feedrate clamp
- Speed control with acceleration in
circular interpolation
- Bit 6 (RBL) of parameter No. 1603 is
- Setting 1 in bit 6 (RBL) of parameter
not available.
No. 1603 enables bell-shaped
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
acceleration/deceleration in rapid
in rapid traverse is enabled by setting
traverse.
the time constant of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in rapid traverse in
parameter No. 1621 or the
acceleration change time of
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation in rapid traverse
in parameter No. 1672.
Selection of
before interpolation in
rapid traverse or
after interpolation in
rapid traverse
The combination of bit 1 (AIR) of

parameter No. 7054 and bit 1 (LRP) of
parameter No. 1401 determines
acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation or
interpolation.
Setting of acceleration
for look-ahead linear
before interpolation
Set acceleration by specifying the

maximum cutting feedrate for linear
interpolation in parameter No. 1770
and the time to elapse before reaching
the maximum cutting feedrate for
linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation in parameter No. 1771.
- 338 -
Bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 7054 is

not available.
The combination of bit 5 (FRP) of
parameter No. 19501 and bit 1 (LRP)
of parameter No. 1401 determines
interpolation or
interpolation. For details, refer to
"PARAMETER MANUAL"
(B-64310EN).
Parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771 are
not available.
In parameter No. 1660, set the
maximum permissible cutting feedrate
for acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation for each axis.
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Time constant setting of

linear/bell-shaped
cutting feed common to
all axes
Time constant setting of
exponential
cutting feed for each axis
Automatic corner
deceleration based on
angle difference
Parameter No. 1768 is not available.

Set the time constant for each axis in
parameter No. 1769.

(To set the value for linear or
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration,
use parameter No. 1769.)
Permissible speed
difference common to all
axes for automatic
corner deceleration
based on angle
difference (speed control
based on the feedrate
difference on each axis)
Setting of arc
radius-based feedrate
clamp (speed control
with acceleration in
circular interpolation)
Setting of the maximum
cutting feedrate common
to all axes
Rapid traverse block
overlap
Setting 0 in bit 4 (CSD) of parameter

No. 1602 enables the function.
Set the lower limit speed in parameter
No. 1777 and the critical angle
between the two blocks in parameter
No. 1779.

(Use parameter No. 1769 for any
acceleration/deceleration type - linear,
bell-shaped, or exponential.)
Automatic corner deceleration based
on angle difference is not available.
Therefore, bit 4 (CSD) of parameter
No. 1602 and parameter Nos. 1777
and 1779 are not available.

Set the permissible speed difference
for each axis in parameter No. 1783.
Set the upper limit of the feedrate and

the corresponding arc radius value in
parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731,
respectively.

not available.
Set the permissible acceleration for
each axis in parameter No. 1735.
Function name
Setting of
acceleration-based
feedrate clamp (speed
control with the
acceleration on each
axis)

Set the maximum cutting feedrate for
- Enabled only when
- Disabled in the advanced preview
control (T series), AI advanced
interpolation is used in the advanced
preview control (M series), or AI
preview control (T series), AI
contour control (M series) mode.
advanced preview control (M series),
or AI contour control (M series) mode.
Some function names have been changed as follows.
- Acceleration-based feedrate clamp
- Speed control with the acceleration on
each axis
- Parameter No. 1785 is not available.
- Set the permissible acceleration by
Set the permissible acceleration for
specifying the time to elapse before
reaching the maximum cutting
feedrate in parameter No. 1785.
The maximum cutting feedrate set in
parameter No. 1432 is used.
- 339 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Differences regarding AI contour control

Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Time constant of
in rapid traverse in the AI
contour control mode
Set parameter Nos. 1773 and 1774.

If these parameters are not set,
parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621 are
used.
Setting to enable
look-ahead bell-shaped
before interpolation
Setting 1 in bit 7 (BEL) of parameter

No. 1603 enables bell-shaped
interpolation.
B.17.2

None.
- 340 -

not available.
In the case of
interpolation in rapid traverse, set
parameter Nos. 1660 and 1672.
In the case of
interpolation in rapid traverse, set
parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621.
Bit 7 (BEL) of parameter No. 1603 is
not available.
Setting the acceleration change time
of bell-shaped
interpolation in parameter No. 1772
enables bell-shaped
interpolation.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.18
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION
B.18.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Parameters set by
"acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation"
(machining parameter
adjustment screen)
Parameter 1 set by
"permissible acceleration"
adjustment screen)
Parameter 2 set by
"permissible acceleration"
adjustment screen)
B.18.2
Series 0i-D
The following parameters are set

according to the precision level:
[Parameter No. 1770]
Maximum cutting feedrate in linear
interpolation
Time before the maximum cutting
feedrate in linear
interpolation (parameter No. 1770) is
reached
Upper limit of the feedrate by arc
radius-based feedrate clamp
Arc radius corresponding to the upper
limit of the feedrate by arc
radius-based feedrate clamp
(parameter No. 1730)

Maximum permissible cutting feedrate
in acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation on each axis
(Series 0i-D does not have parameter
Nos. 1770 and 1771.)

Maximum cutting feedrate
Time before the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter No. 1432) is
reached
(Set this to determine the permissible
acceleration for acceleration-based
feedrate clamp.)

Permissible acceleration in speed
control with acceleration in circular
interpolation
Nos. 1730 and 1731. Also, "arc
radius-based feedrate clamp" has
been renamed "speed control with
acceleration in circular interpolation".)
Permissible acceleration for speed
control with the acceleration on each
axis
No. 1785. Also, "acceleration-based
feedrate clamp" has been renamed
"speed control with the acceleration
on each axis".)

None.
- 341 -
B.19
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
B.19.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Function name
Setting to perform
synchronous
operation all the time
B-64304EN-2/01
Quick synchronous control

Not available.
Setting to move
multiple slave axes in
synchronism with the
master axis
Setting of the same
name for the master
and slave axes
Not available.
The same name cannot be set for the

master and slave axes.
Setting of axes for

which to perform
simple synchronous
control (axis
synchronous control)
The master axis number set in

parameter No. 8311 must be smaller
than the slave axis number.
- 342 -
Series 0i-D
-
Axis synchronous control

Depends on bit 5 (SCA) of parameter
No. 8304 for the slave axis. When 0 is
set, the processing is the same as
Series 0i-C.
Bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304

In axis synchronous control:
0: Synchronous operation is performed
when the axis synchronous control
selection signal SYNCx or axis
synchronous control manual feed
selection signal SYNCJx for the slave
axis is set to "1".
1: Synchronous operation is performed all
the time.
Synchronous operation is performed
regardless of the setting of the SYNCx
or SYNCJx signal.
- Available.
This is possible by setting the same
master axis number in parameter No.
8311 for the multiple slave axes.
- The same name can be set for the
master and slave axes. In that case,
however, automatic operation cannot
be performed in normal operation; only
manual operation is allowed.
(No alarm is caused even if an attempt
to perform automatic operation is
made.)
- The master axis number set in
parameter No. 8311 may or may not be
smaller than the slave axis number.
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Synchronization error
check based on
positional difference
The servo positional difference between

the master and slave axes is monitored,
and alarm PS0213 is issued if the
difference exceeds the limit value set in
parameter No. 8313 when the number
of synchronized axis pairs is one or the
limit value set in parameter No. 8323 for
the master axis when the number of
synchronized axis pairs is two.
The data range of parameter No. 8323

is as follows:
[Data range]
0 to 32767
Series 0i-D
-
The servo positional difference

between the master and slave axes is
monitored, and alarm DS0001 is issued
if the difference exceeds the limit value
set in parameter No. 8323 for the slave
axis. At the same time, the signal for
indicating a positional difference error
alarm for axis synchronous control
SYNER<F403.0> is output.
Regardless of the number of pairs, set
the limit value in parameter No. 8323.

is as follows:
[Data range]
0 to 999999999
The machine coordinates of the master
and slave axes are compared and, if
the difference is greater than the value
set in parameter No. 8314 for the slave
axis, alarm SV0005 is issued and the
motor is stopped immediately.
The machine coordinates of the master

and slave axes are compared and, if
the difference is greater than the value
set in parameter No. 8314 for the
master axis, alarm SV0407 is issued
and the motor is stopped immediately.

is as follows:
[Data range]
0 to 32767
Setting of
synchronization
establishment
Synchronization establishment is
enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
of synchronized axis pairs is one or by
setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter
No. 8303 for the master axis when the
number of synchronized axis pairs is
two.
Timing of
synchronization
establishment
performed when:
1. Power is turned on when the absolute
position detector is used.
2. Emergency stop is canceled.
Synchronization error
check based on
machine coordinates
- 343 -

is as follows:
[Data range]
0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
+999999.999)
enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
parameter No. 8303 for the slave axis.
(Bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8301 is
not available. Regardless of the
number of pairs, set 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
parameter No. 8303.)
performed when:
1. Power is turned on when the absolute
position detector is used.
2. Manual reference position return
operation is performed.
3. The state of servo position control is
changed from off to on.
(This occurs when emergency stop,
servo alarm, servo off, etc. is canceled.
Note, however, that synchronization
establishment is not performed at the
time of axis removal cancellation.)

Series 0i-C
Function
Maximum
compensation for
synchronization
Automatic setting for

grid position matching
Difference between
the master axis
reference counter and
slave axis reference
counter obtained
through automatic
setting for grid
positioning
Time from the servo
preparation
completion signal SA
<F000.6> being set to
1 until torque
difference alarm
detection is started
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
Set the value in parameter No. 8315

when the number of synchronized axis
pairs is one or in parameter No. 8325
for the master axis when the number of
If the compensation amount exceeds
the values set in the relevant
parameter, alarm SV0410 occurs.
Set the value in parameter No. 8325 for

the slave axis.
If the compensation amount exceeds
the values set in this parameter, alarm
SV0001 occurs.
(Parameter No. 8315 is not available.
the value in parameter No. 8325.)
The data unit and data range of

parameter Nos. 8315 and 8325 are as
follows:
[Data unit]
Detection unit
[Data range]
0 to 32767
Enable automatic setting for grid

position matching by setting 1 in bit 0
(ATE) of parameter No. 8302 when the
one or in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No.
8303 when the number of synchronized
axis pairs is two.
The data unit and data range of

parameter No. 8325 are as follows:
[Data unit]
Machine unit
[Data range]
0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
+999999.999)
Set 1 in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No.
8303 for the slave axis to enable
automatic setting for grid position
matching.
(Bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 is
number of pairs, set the value in bit 0
(ATE) of parameter No. 8303.)
Start automatic setting for grid position

matching by setting 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of
of synchronized axis pairs is one or in
bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 when
the number of synchronized axis pairs
is two.

for the master axis.

for the master axis when the number of
- 344 -
Set 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.

8303 for the slave axis to start
automatic setting for grid position
matching.
(Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 is
number of pairs, set the value in bit 1
(ATS) of parameter No. 8303.)
the slave axis.

the slave axis.
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Setting to use the

external machine
coordinate system
shift function for the
slave axis
When 1 is set in bit 3 (SSE) of

parameter No. 8302, setting an external
machine coordinate system shift for the
master axis causes the slave axis to
shift as well.
This parameter is used for all the pairs.
Setting to prevent
slave axis movement
from being added to
the actual feedrate
display
Setting 1 in bit 7 (SMF) of parameter

No. 3105 prevents slave axis
movement from being added to the
actual feedrate display.
This parameter is used for all the pairs.
Change of the
synchronization state
during a program
command
Specify an M code that is not to be

buffered.
Using this M code, change the input
signal - SYNCx<G138> or
SYNCJx<G140> - from the PMC side.
Bit 3 (SSE) of parameter No. 8302 is

not available.
By setting 1 in bit 7 (SYE) of parameter
No. 8304 for the slave axis, the slave
axis is shifted as well when an external
machine coordinate system shift is set
for the corresponding master axis.
This parameter is used individually for
each slave axis.
Bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No. 3105 is
not available.
Setting 0 in bit 2 (SAF) of parameter
No. 8303 prevents slave axis
movement from being added to the
actual feedrate display. (Note that the
meaning of the value is the opposite
from bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No.
3105.)
This parameter is used individually for
each slave axis.
Specify an M code that changes the
synchronization state (parameter No.
8337 or 8338).
By changing the input signal SYNCx<G138> or SYNCJx<G140> from the PMC side using this M code, it
is possible to change the
synchronization state during a program
command.
Parameter No. 8337

Specify an M code that changes
synchronous operation to normal
operation.
Automatic slave axis

parameter setting
This function is enabled by setting 1 in

bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for
the master axis.
Mirror image for the

slave axis
A mirror image cannot be applied to a

slave axis during simple synchronous
control. It can be applied only to the T
series.
Parameter No. 8338

Specify an M code that changes normal
operation to synchronous operation.
- Bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 is
not available.
This function is enabled by setting 1 in
bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for
the master and slave axes.
- By setting parameter No. 8312 for the
slave axis, a mirror image can be
applied to a slave axis during simple
synchronous control.
Parameter No. 8312
This parameter sets mirror image for the
slave axis. When 100 or a more value is
set with this parameter, the mirror image
function is applied to synchronous control.
- 345 -

Series 0i-C
Function
Setting to cancel the
check of positional
difference between
the master and slave
axes during
synchronization
establishment
B.19.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Depends on bit 5 (SYE) of parameter

No. 8301.
Bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301

During synchronization establishment, the
positional difference limit is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
Series 0i-D
-
Not available.
Therefore, bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No.
8301 is not available.
Since the positional difference is
always checked, parameter No. 8318 is
not available, either.
Parameter No. 8318

Set the time from the synchronization
establishment function outputting a
compensation pulse to the slave axis until
the check of the positional difference limit
between the master and slave axes starts.

Series 0i-C
Item
Positional difference
between the master
and slave axes
This item is displayed in diagnosis No.

540 for the master axis when the
one or in diagnosis No. 541 for the
master axis when the number of
- 346 -
Series 0i-D
-
This item is displayed in diagnosis No.

3500 for the slave axis.
(Regardless of the number of pairs, the
item is displayed in diagnosis No.
3500.)
B-64304EN-2/01
B.20
ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL
B.20.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Angular and
perpendicular axes
when an invalid value
is set in parameter
No. 8211 or 8212
Series 0i-C
Angular
axis
M
series
Reference position
return completion
signal ZP for the
perpendicular axis
moved with the
angular axis
<Fn094, Fn096,
Fn098, Fn100>
When an angular axis
is specified
individually in machine
coordinate system
selection (G53) during
arbitrary angular axis
control
G30 command during
arbitrary angular axis
control
B.20.2
Series 0i-D
Y axis
(2nd axis)
Series 0i-D
Perpendicular
axis
Z axis (3rd
axis)
Angular axis
Y-axis of the basic
three axes (axis with
2 set in parameter
No. 1022)
Perpendicular axis
Z-axis of the basic
three axes (axis with
3 set in parameter
No. 1022)
Select the signal using bit 3 (AZP) of

parameter No. 8200.
When the bit is set to 0, ZP is not set to
"0". (The signal is not cleared.)
When the bit is set to 1, ZP is set to "0".
(The signal is cleared.)
Bit 3 (AZP) of parameter No. 8200 is

not available.
ZP is always set to "0". (The signal is
cleared.)
Select the perpendicular axis operation

using bit 6 (A53) of parameter No.
8201.
When the bit is set to 0, the
perpendicular axis is also moved.
When the bit is set to 1, only the
angular axis is moved.
Select the operation using bit 0 (A30) of
parameter No. 8202.
When the bit is set to 0, the operation is
for the perpendicular coordinate
system.
When the bit is set to 1, the operation is
for the angular coordinate system.
Bit 6 (A53) of parameter No. 8201 is

not available.
Only the angular axis is always moved.
Bit 0 (A30) of parameter No. 8202 is

not available.
The operation is always for the angular
coordinate system.

None.
- 347 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.21
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY
B.21.1
Function
Data range of the M
code that counts the
number of machined
parts
Data range of the
number of parts
required
Data range of the
number and total
number of parts
machined
Data range of the
power-on period, time
during automatic
operation, cutting
time, input signal
TMRON on time, and
one automatic
operation time
B.21.2
Series 0i-C
Series 0i-D
Parameter No. 6710

The data range of the M code that counts the number of machined parts is as follows.
- 0 to 255
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
Parameter No. 6713
The data range of the number of parts required is as follows.
- 0 to 9999
Parameter No. 6711
Number of parts machined
- 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
Parameter No. 6712
Total number of parts machined
The data range is as follows.

- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
- 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
Parameter No. 6750
Parameter No. 6752
Parameter No. 6754
Integrated value of
Integrated value of time during
Integrated value of cutting
power-on period
automatic operation
time
Parameter No. 6756
Parameter No. 6758
Integrated value of time when input signal TMRON (G053.0) Integrated value of one
is on
automatic operation time
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)

None.
- 348 -
0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
B-64304EN-2/01
B.22
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
B.22.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Handle pulses
exceeding the rapid
traverse rate
Permissible amount of
pulses for manual
handle feed
Number of manual
pulse generators used
Value range of the
magnification
parameter for manual
handle feed
B.22.2
Series 0i-D
If manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified, whether to ignore or
accumulate handle pulses exceeding the rapid traverse feedrate can be set as follows.
- Bit 4 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 is
- Depends on bit 4 (HPF) of parameter
not available. Whether to ignore or
No. 7100. The amount of pulses to be
accumulate excess handle pulses is
accumulated is set in parameter No.
determined by the amount to be
7117.
accumulated that is set in parameter
No. 7117.
[When parameter No. 7117 = 0]
Ignored.
[When parameter No. 7117 > 0]
Accumulated in the CNC without being
ignored.
- The value range of parameter No. 7117 - The value range of parameter No. 7117
is 0 to 99999999 (8 digits).
is 0 to 999999999 (9 digits).
-

Up to three generators can be used
without setting the parameter.
For parameter No. 7113, 7114, 7131,
7132, 7133, 7134, 12350, and 12351,
magnification ranges from 1 to 2000.
For parameter Nos. 7113, 7131, 7133,

and 12350, magnification ranges from 1
to 127.
For parameter Nos. 7114, 7132, 7134,
and 12351, magnification ranges from 1
to 1000.
Parameter No. 7134
Parameter No. 7133
Magnification when manual handle feed
Magnification when manual handle feed
amount selection signals MP31 = 0 and
amount selection signals MP31 = 1 and
MP32 = 1
MP32 = 1
* For parameter Nos. 7113, 7114, 7131, 7132, 12350, and 12351, see the section
explaining the similar function for the T series.
-

None.
- 349 -
B.23
PMC AXIS CONTROL
B.23.1
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Relationship with
synchronous control
(synchronous control of
synchronous/composite
control)
Relationship with the
feed-forward and
advanced preview
feed-forward functions
PMC axis control can be applied for any

axis other than a synchronous slave axis.
PMC axis control cannot be applied

for any axis under synchronous
control.
Enable or disable the functions by using

bit 7 (NAH) of parameter No. 1819, bit 3
(G8C) of parameter No. 8004, and bit 4
(G8R) of parameter No. 8004 in
combination.
Data range of rapid

traverse rate for rapid
traverse (00h), 1st to 4th
reference position return
(07h to 0Ah), and
machine coordinate
system selection (20h)
Data range of total
moving distance for rapid
traverse (00h), cutting
feed - feed per minute
(01h), cutting feed - feed
per revolution (02h), and
skip - feed per minute
(03h)
Data range of cutting
feedrate for rapid
traverse (01h) and skip feed per minute (03h)
Neither the feed-forward nor advanced

preview feed-forward function is
available for an axis under PMC axis
control.
Bit 3 (G8C) and bit 4 (G8R) of
parameter No. 8004 are not available.
1 to 65535
The data unit is as follows.
Valid data range

IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter
machine
Inch machine
Rotation axis
Linear axis
30 to 4800
30 to 12000
IS-B
IS-C
99999.999
9999.9999
9999.9999
999.99999
Valid data range

IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter
machine
Inch machine
Rotation axis
mm/min
Unit
mm
deg
inch
Metric machine
Inch machine
Data unit
IS-A to IS-C
1
0.1
mm/min
inch/min
deg/min
Unit

IS-A
IS-B,IS-C
-99999999 to 99999999 (8 digits)
-999999999 to 999999999 (9 digits)
The data unit is the minimum setting unit

for the corresponding axis. (See the
table below.)
S e t t in g
u n it
M i n im u m
d a ta u n it
IS - A
IS - B
IS - C
0 .0 1
0 .0 0 1
0 .0 0 0 1
1 to 65535
By setting 1 in bit 2 (JFM) of

parameter No. 8004, it is possible to
increase the specification unit by a
factor of 200.
Unit of
data
1 to 100000
0.1 to 12000.0
mm/min
0.01 to 4000.00
1 to 100000
0.01 to 480.000
0.1 to 12000.0
inch/min
deg/min
Not available.
Linear
axis
Rotation
axis
inch/min
deg/min
1 to 65535
The specified feedrate must be within the
range shown in the table below.
Linear axis
Function to increase the

specification unit by a
factor of 200 for
continuous feed (06h)
30 to 6000
30 to 15000
30 to 12000

Input increment
mm unit input
deg unit input
inch unit input
30 to 15000
Unit of
data
Bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004

Set the specification unit of feedrate data
for specifying the continuous feed
command for PMC axis control.
Increment
system
IS-B
IS-C
- 350 -
Bit 2 (JFM)
of No. 8004
0
1
0
1
Millimeter
input
(mm/min)
1
200
0.1
20
Inch input
(inch/min)
0.01
2.00
0.001
0.200
Rotation
axis
(min-1)
0.00023
0.046
0.000023
0.0046
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Maximum feedrate for
continuous feed (06h)
When an override of 254% is applied

1 time
10 times
10 times
Speed specification in
the speed command
(10h)
Setting range of torque

data for torque control
(11h)
Note on executing an
absolute command from
the program for an axis
subject to PMC axis
control during automatic
operation
IS-C
Metric input
Inch input
16645
166.45
mm/min
inch/min
166458
1664.58
0mm/min
inch/min
IS-B
Metric input
Inch input
65535
655.35
mm/min
inch/min
655350
6553.50
mm/min
inch/min
IS-C
Metric input
Inch input
6553
65.53
mm/min
inch/min
65535
655.35
mm/min
inch/min
When an override of 254% is applied

IS-B
When override is canceled

1 time
Minimum unit of feedrate

for the speed command
(10h)
IS-B
Metric input
Inch input
166458
1664.58
mm/min
inch/min
1664589
16645.89
mm/min
inch/min
Series 0i-D
IS-C
Metric input
Inch input
Metric input
Inch input
(mm/min)
(inch/min)
(mm/min)
(inch/min)
1 time
166458
1664.58
16645
166.46
10 times
999000
16645.89
99900
1664.58
200 times
999000
39330.0
99900
3933.0
When override is canceled

IS-B
IS-C
Metric input
Inch input
Metric input
Inch input
(mm/min)
(inch/min)
(mm/min)
(inch/min)
1 time
65535
655.35
6553
65.53
10 times
655350
6553.5
65535
655.35
200 times
999000
39330.0
999000
3933.0
The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expressions shown below. The value must
be specified as an integer. No finer value may be specified.
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- Fmin = P 7500 (mm/min)
- Fmin = P 1000 (mm/min)
A speed is specified according to the expressions shown below.
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
F: Speed command (integer)
N: Servo motor speed (min-1)
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- F = N P 7500 (mm/min)
- F = N P 1000 (mm/min)
- The setting range is as follows.
- The setting range is as follows.
Valid data range
-99999999 to +99999999
Unit
0.0000 1 Nm
Valid data range

-999999999 to +999999999 (9 digits)
Unit
0.0000 1 Nm
[For Series 0i-D]

When you switch to PMC axis control to execute a move command during automatic
operation and then switch back to NC axis control to execute an absolute command
from the program for the moved axis, that PMC command needs to be executed using
a non-buffering M code.
For example, when an absolute command is executed in a N40 block after PMC
control is applied to Y axis, as in the example below, PMC axis control needs to be
executed in a non-buffering M code (N20 block).
O0001 ;
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; Executes PMC axis control for the Y axis.
N30 X70. ;
N40 Y50. ;
N50 M30 ;
Execute PMC axis control as follows.

1. After the output of the auxiliary function strobe signal MF for M55, start PMC axis
control.
2. Upon completion of PMC axis control, input the completion signal FIN for M55.
[For Series 0i-C]
Control does not need to be executed using a non-buffering M code.
- 351 -

Series 0i-C
Function
Acceleration/deceleration
control for an axis
synchronized with
external pulses using
external pulse
synchronization (0Bh,
0Dh to 0Fh)
Inch/metric conversion
for a linear axis
controlled only by PMC
axis control
Setting to change all

axes to CNC axes or
PMC axes
If the PMC issues an

axis control command for
an axis when the tool is
waiting for the auxiliary
function completion
signal after moving that
axis according to a move
command and an
auxiliary function
specified from the CNC
side
If the CNC issues a

command for an axis
when that axis is being
moved by the axis
control command from
the PMC side
B-64304EN-2/01
Depends on bit 2 (SUE) of parameter

No. 8002.
Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002

With the external pulse synchronization
command for PMC axis control, the
acceleration/deceleration of the axis
synchronized with external pulses is:
0: Controlled (exponential
acceleration/deceleration).
1: Not controlled.
- Depends on bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No.
8003.
Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003
When the axis controlled only by PMC axis
control (see parameter No. 1010) is a linear
axis, inch/metric input:
0: Influences the axis.
1: Does not influence the axis.
- Depends on bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No.
8003.
Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003
When 0 is set as the number of CNC control
axes (parameter No. 1010), all axes are
changed to:
0: CNC axes.
1: PMC axes.
- Depends on bit 0 (CMV) of parameter
No. 8004.
Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004
If the PMC issues an axis control command
for an axis when the tool is waiting for the
auxiliary function completion signal after
moving that axis according to a move
command and an auxiliary function specified
from the CNC side:
0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: The axis control command from the PMC
side is executed.
- Depends on bit 1 (NMT) of parameter
No. 8004.
Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004
If the CNC issues a command for an axis
when that axis is being moved by the axis
control command from the PMC side:
0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: A command that does not involve moving
the axis is executed without an alarm.
- 352 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002 is

not available.
The acceleration/deceleration of the
axis synchronized with external pulses
is controlled (exponential
acceleration/deceleration).
Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 is

not available. Parameter No. 1010 is
For a linear axis controlled only by
PMC axis control, set rotation axis
type B (set 1 in both bit 1 and bit 0 of
parameter No. 1006) to avoid the
influence of inch/metric input.
Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003 is

There is no parameter to change all
axes to PMC axes.
Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004 is

not available.
The axis control command from the
PMC side is executed.
Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004 is

not available.
A command that does not involve
moving the axis is executed without an
alarm.
(If the command involves moving the
axis, alarm PS0130 is issued.)
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Setting of
diameter/radius
specification for the
amount of travel and
feedrate when diameter
programming is specified
for a PMC-controlled axis
Individual output of the

auxiliary function
Function to exert position

control for the speed
command (10h)
This item is determined by using bit 7

(NDI) of parameter No. 8004 and bit 1
(CDI) of parameter No. 8005 in
combination.
Depends on bit 7 (MFD) of parameter

No. 8005.
Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005

The individual output of the auxiliary function
for PMC axis control function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No.
8005.
Bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005
The speed of PMC axis control is specified
by:
0: Speed command.
1: Position command.
In-position check for an

axis controlled only by
PMC axis control
Depends on bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No.

8006.
Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006

In the case of an axis controlled only by
PMC axis control (see parameter No. 1010),
in-position check is:
0: Performed when no move command is
specified for the PMC axis.
1: Always not performed.
- 353 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 is

not available. The item is determined
by bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005.
Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005

In PMC axis control, when diameter
programming is specified for a
PMC-controlled axis:
0: The amount of travel and feedrate are
each specified with a radius.
1: The amount of travel is specified with
a diameter while the feedrate is
specified with a radius.
- Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 is
not available.
The individual output of the auxiliary
function for PMC axis control function
is enabled.
Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter

No. 8005. Note that, for the EVP=1
setting to take effect, 1 must be set in
bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007.
Bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007

The speed command in PMC axis control
is:
0: FS10/11 type.
1: FS0 type.
- Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006 is
The check is performed when no
move command is specified for the
PMC axis. Otherwise, the processing
is determined by bit 6 (NCI) of
parameter No. 8004.
Bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004
When the PMC-controlled axis is
decelerated, in-position check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

Series 0i-C
Function
No in-position check
signal for a
PMC-controlled axis and
no in-position check
signals for individual
axes
Minimum speed for rapid

traverse override in PMC
axis control
B.23.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Depends on bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No.

8007.
Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007

For in-position check for a PMC axis, the no
in-position check signal NOINPS<G023.5>
and no in-position check signals for
individual axes NOINP1<G359> to
NOINP5<G359> are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- Set the value in parameter No. 8021.

None.
- 354 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007 is

not available.
The no in-position check signal
NOINPS<G023.5> and no in-position
check signals for individual axes
NOINP1<G359> to NOINP5<G359>
are disabled for in-position check for a
PMC axis.

The minimum speed for rapid traverse
override cannot be set.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.24
EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)
B.24.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Address P format
when calling a
subprogram on the
memory card (file
number
specification/program
number specification)
Multiple call alarm
External subprogram
call in MDI mode
Depends on bit 2 (SBP) of parameter

No. 3404.
Series 0i-D
-
To call a subprogram, the program

number must always be specified in
address P.
When calling a subprogram on the
memory card, the processing is not
dependent on the setting of bit 2 (SBP)
Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404

In the external device subprogram call
M198, address P is specified using:
0: File number.
1: Program number.
If a subprogram called by an external subprogram call specifies a further external
subprogram call, the following alarms are issued, respectively:
- Alarm PS0210
- Alarm PS1080
- Enabled.
- Depends on bit 1 (MDE) of parameter
No. 11630.
Bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630

In MDI mode, an external device
subprogram call (M198 command) is:
0: Disabled. (Alarm PS1081 is issued.)
1: Enabled.
B.24.2

None.
- 355 -
B.25
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH
B.25.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Return from a
subprogram to the
calling program's
block that has a
specified sequence
number
Sequence number
search when (M99
Pxxxxx) is executed
B-64304EN-2/01
The calling program is searched from

the beginning, and control is returned to
the first block found to have sequence
number Nxxxxx.
The calling program is searched in a

forward direction from the block that
called the subprogram, and control is
returned to the first block found to have
sequence number Nxxxxx.
If the specified sequence number is not
found, the calling program is searched
from the beginning, and control is
returned to the first block found to have
sequence number Nxxxxx.
Sub program
O9001 ;
M99 P100 ;
[For Series 0i-D]

Control is returned to block (3).
Example)
Main program
O0001 ;
N100 ; (1)
N100 ; (2)
M98 P9001 ;
N100 ; (3)
N100 ; (4)
M30 ;
[For Series 0i-C]
Control is returned to block (1).
Series 0i-D
-
WARNING
Be sure to avoid writing two or more identical sequence numbers in a program.
Doing so may cause the search to find unintended blocks.
B.25.2

None.
- 356 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.26
STORED STROKE CHECK
B.26.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Stored stroke check
immediately following
powering on
This function is always enabled for all

axes.
Overtravel alarm
Machine coordinates are set upon

powering on.
Absolute and relative coordinates are not
set.
(They are set when the absolute position
detector is provided.)
- Stored stoke check 2 does not support
bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300.
Therefore, if an interference alarm
occurs, the tool stops after entering the
prohibited area.
This makes it necessary to make the
prohibited area slightly larger than
actually necessary.
Series 0i-D
-
It is possible to select whether to

enable or disable the function on an
axis-by-axis basis using bit 0 (DOT) of
parameter No. 1311.
Bit 0 (DOT) of parameter No. 1311

The stored stroke limit check immediately
following powering on is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This function stores machine coordinates
using software and therefore imposes a
burden on the system. Disable the
function for those axes that do not require
it. Movements made while the power is
off are not reflected on the machine
coordinate system immediately after
powering on.
- Machine coordinates are set upon
powering on.
Absolute and relative coordinates are
set based on these machine
coordinates.
-
Stored stoke check 2 also supports bit

7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300.
Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop
before entering the prohibited area,
thus eliminating the need to make the
prohibited area slightly larger than
actually necessary.
Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300

If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm
occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with
the inter-path interference check function
(T series), or if an alarm occurs with
chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool
stops:
0: After entering the prohibited area.
1: Before entering the prohibited area.
- 357 -

Series 0i-C
Function
Operation
continuation after
automatic alarm
cancellation when a
soft OT1 alarm is
issued during the
execution of an
absolute command in
automatic operation
Block that judges the
distance to the stored
stroke limit in AI
advanced preview
control or AI contour
control mode
B.26.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
When the operation is resumed, the tool

moves the remaining travel distance of
the block that caused the soft OT.
Therefore, the program can be
continued if the tool is moved through
manual intervention beyond the
remaining travel distance.
A selection can be made using bit 5

(ODA) of parameter No. 7055.
Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055

The distance to the stored stroke limit in AI
advanced preview control or AI contour
control mode is judged with respect to:
0: Axes specified in the current and next
blocks.
1: Axes specified in the current block.

None.
- 358 -
When the operation is resumed, the

tool moves toward the end point of the
block that caused the soft OT, causing
another soft OT and making it
impossible to continue the program.
For details, refer to "STORED
STROKE CHECK 1" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN).
Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 is

not available.
The distance is always judged with respect
to the axes specified in the current block.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.27
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION
B.27.1
Function
Value of parameter
No. 3621 for the
setting of a rotary axis
(type A)
Explanation
Reference position
45.0
0.0
(61)
315.0
(68)
(60)
(62)
(67)
(+)
90.0
270.0
(63)
135.0
(66)
(64)
(65)
180.0
225.0
Compensation values are output at
the positions indicated by .
- Amount of movement per rotation: 360

- Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45
- Number of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
In the above case, the values of the parameters are as follows.
Series 0i-C
Parameter
Series 0i-D
No. 3620: Number of the compensation position of

60
60
the reference position
No. 3621: Smallest compensation position number
60
61
No. 3622: Largest compensation position number
68
68
No. 3623: Compensation magnification
1
1
No. 3624: Interval between compensation positions
45000
45000
No. 3625: Amount of movement per rotation
360000
360000
The value of parameter No. 3621 is as follows.
Series 0i-C
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620)
Series 0i-D
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620) +
1
B.27.2

None.
- 359 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.28
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION
B.28.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Behavior of the
manual screen
erasure function
("<CAN> + function
key") when an alarm
is issued
Redisplay of the
screen upon mode
switching
Function key input
when the screen is
erased or displayed
Time before the

automatic screen
erasure function starts
B.28.2
Series 0i-D
When an alarm is issued (including one - When an alarm is issued (including one
associated with the other path), the
associated with the other path), the
manual screen erasure function is
manual screen erasure function is
disabled.
enabled.
("<CAN> + function key" does not
("<CAN> + function key" erases the
erase the screen.)
screen.)
When the operation mode is switched while the screen is erased:
The screen is not redisplayed.

(The screen remains erased.)
- Select the behavior using bit 2 (NFU) of
parameter No. 3209.
Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209
When a function key is pressed to erase or
display the screen for the screen erasure or
automatic screen erasure function, the
screen change using a function key is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
- Set the value in parameter No.3123.
The value range is 1 to 255 (minutes).

None.
- 360 -
The screen is redisplayed.

-
Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 is

not available.
set in bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No.
3209.
The value range is 1 to 127 (minutes).
B-64304EN-2/01
B.29
RESET AND REWIND
B.29.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Modal data when
reset during the
execution of a block
Series 0i-D
If reset occurs during the execution of a block, the states of the modal G codes and
modal addresses (N, F, S, T, M, etc.) specified in that block are handled as follows.
Maintained.
Not maintained. The states return to
those of the modal data specified in the
preceding blocks.
(The modal data is updated after the
specified block is fully executed.)
Example) If reset occurs before
positioning is completed in the N2 block in
the program shown below, the T code and
offset return to the data of the preceding
tool (T0101) data.
Information in a block
that is pre-read when
a reset is made during
an automatic
operation (contents of
the buffer)
B.29.2
The information in the block may or may

not be held depending on whether MDI
mode is in progress.
In MDI mode
The information in the block is held.
In modes other than MDI mode
The information in the block is not
held.

None.
- 361 -
N1 G00 X120. Z0. T0101 ;

;
N2 G00 X180. Z20. T0202 ;
;
- The information in the block is not held
regardless whether MDI mode is in
progress.
B.30
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF
B.30.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Absolute coordinates
during automatic tool
compensation change
B.30.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
If tool compensation is automatically changed when the manual absolute signal

*ABSM(Gn006.2) is set to 1, absolute coordinates are handled as follows.
Absolute coordinates are not changed.
Absolute coordinates are changed
according to the amount of tool
compensation resulting from the coordinate
shift.

None.
- 362 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.31
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT
B.31.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Number of external
alarm messages and
message length
[Number of messages that can be set at

a time]
Up to 4 messages
[Length of a message]
Up to 32 characters
Series 0i-D
-
[Number of messages that can be set

at a time]
Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
Bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931

The maximum number of external alarm
messages or external operator messages
that can be displayed in connection with
external data input or external messages
is:
0: 4.
1: 16.
Display format of
external alarm
messages
Number of external
operator messages
and message length
[Alarm numbers that can be sent]

0 to 999
[How to distinguish these numbers from
general alarm numbers]
Add 1000 to the number sent
Depends on bit 0 (OM4) of parameter

No. 3207.
Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207

The external operator message screen can
display:
0: Up to 256 characters in up to 1
message.
1: Up to 64 characters in up to 4
messages.
- 363 -
Up to 32 characters
- Depends on bit 0 (EXA) of parameter
No. 6301.
Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301
Select the external alarm message
specification.
0: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 999. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with 1000
added to the number following the
character string "EX".
1: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 4095. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with the
character string "EX" added in front of
it.
- Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 is
not available.
[Number of messages that can be set
at a time]
Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
No. 11931. Select either up to 4 or 16
messages.
256 characters or less

Series 0i-C
Function
Display format of
external operator
messages
Data range of external

operator message
numbers
When an external
program number
search is done with 0
set as the program
number
Input of an external
tool offset for an
invalid function
compensation value
Number of history
messages for external
operator messages
and message length
B.31.2
B-64304EN-2/01
[Message numbers that can be sent]

0 to 999
[How to distinguish these numbers from
alarm and other numbers]
Messages from 0 to 99
The message is displayed on the
screen along with the number. The
CNC adds 2000 to this number for
distinction.
Messages from 100 to 999
Only the message is displayed on the
screen without the number.
Series 0i-D
-
Depends on bit 1 (EXM) of parameter

Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301

Select the external operator message
specification.
0: The message numbers that can be
sent range from 0 to 999.
A message from 0 to 99 is displayed on
the screen along with the number.
The CNC adds 2000 to this number for
distinction.
As for the messages from 100 to 999,
only the message is displayed on the
1: The message numbers that can be
sent range from 0 to 4095.
A message from 0 to 99 is displayed on
the screen along with the number.
The CNC adds the character string
"EX" in front of the number.
As for the messages from 100 to 4095,
only the message is displayed on the
Parameter No. 6310

The data range of external operator message numbers is as follows.
-
0 to 1000
An alarm is not issued; the search is not
done, either.
0 to 4096
The input is ignored without issuing an

alarm.
Make a selection using bit 7 (MS1) and

bit 6 (MS0) of parameter No. 3113 in
combination.
Bit 7 (MS1) and bit 6 (MS0) of

parameter No. 3113 are not available.
[Number of history messages]
Up to 32
[History message length of a message]
Up to 256 characters

None.
- 364 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.32
DATA SERVER FUNCTION
B.32.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Memory operation
mode
The memory operation mode is not

supported.
Series 0i-D
-
In the memory operation mode, the

following operations can be performed
for a program registered with the data
server:
1. Select the program on the data
server as the main program and run
it in the memory mode.
2. Call a subprogram or custom
macro in the same directory as the
main program on the data server.
3. Edit the program, including
inserting, deleting, and replacing
words.
B.32.2

None.
- 365 -
B.33
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER
B.33.1
Series 0i-C
Function
4-slave display
function
By setting 1 in bit 0 (SLV) of parameter

No. 0960, it is possible to split the
screen into four windows, enabling up
to four slaves to be displayed.
Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960

When Power Mate CNC Manager is
selected, the screen:
0: Displays one slave.
1: Is split into four windows, enabling up to
four slaves to be displayed.
B.33.2
B-64304EN-2/01

None.
- 366 -
Series 0i-D
-
Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 is

not available.
One slave is always displayed.
When there is more than one slave,
you switch the active slave by using the
relevant soft key.
B-64304EN-2/01
B.34

COMPENSATION
B.34.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation
Corner circular
interpolation (G39)
In Series 0i-D, the cutter compensation C (M series) and tool-nose radius

compensation (T series) functions of Series 0i-C are collectively referred to as cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation.
Enabled by setting 1 in bit 2 (G39) of

parameter No. 5008.
Cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation in MDI
operation
Single block stop
position during the
cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
Neither cutter compensation C nor tool

nose radius compensation is available
in MDI operation.
The single block stop position differs as shown below.
Available.
It is included in cutter
compensation/tool nose radius
compensation.
Since corner circular interpolation
(G39) is always enabled, bit 2 (G39) of
parameter No. 5008 is not available.
Cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation is also available in MDI
operation.
Workpiece
Programmed path
Cutter/tool nose radius
center path
r
L
L
L
Series 0i-D single block stop
Series 0i-C single block stop
Function to change
the compensation
direction intentionally
(IJ type vector, KI type
vector, and JK type
vector)
Not available.
- 367 -
At the start of or during the cutter

compensation mode, specify I, J, or K
in a G00 or G01 block. This makes
the compensation vector at the end
point of the block perpendicular to the
direction specified by I, J, or K. This
way, you can change the compensation
direction intentionally.

Function
Stop position upon an
overcutting alarm
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
-
Series 0i-D
If the specified radius value for circular interpolation is smaller than that for cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation, as in the example below, performing
compensation inwardly through cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation
causes overcutting, generating an alarm and stopping the tool. The stop position
differs.
N1
Cutter/tool nose radius

center path
P1
P2
Programmed path
Workpiece
N2
P3
N3
Cutting as
programmed causes
Single block stop in a

block created
internally for cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation
[When single block stop occurs in the preceding block in Series 0i-C]
Since the tool moves until it reaches the end point of the block (P3 in the figure),
overcutting may result.
[When single block stop does not occur in the preceding block in Series 0i-C]
The tool stops immediately after executing the block (P2 in the figure).
[In the case of Series 0i-D]
Since the tool stops at the start point of the block (P1 in the figure), regardless of the
single block state, overcutting can be prevented.
- Not available.
- Depends on bit 0 (SBK) of parameter
No. 5000.
Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000
In a block created internally for cutter
compensation, single block stop is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
This parameter is used to check a program
including cutter compensation/tool nose
radius compensation.
- 368 -
B-64304EN-2/01
Function
Setting to disable
interference checking
and to delete
interfering vectors
Series 0i-C
-
Series 0i-D
Set 1 in bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No.

5008.
In the example below, an interference
check is made on the vectors inside V1
and V4, and the interfering vectors are
deleted. As a result, the tool center
path is from V1 to V4.
Not available.
(Bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. 5008 is
not available.)
To prevent overcutting, the interference
check avoidance function (bit 5 (CAV)
of parameter No. 19607) is used.
In the example below, interference
occurs between V1 and V4 and between
V2 and V3. Therefore, vectors VA and
VB are created. The tool center path
is from VA to VB.
[In the case of Series 0i-C]

Tool center path
Programmed path
V1
V4
V3
V2
[In the case of Series 0i-D]

Tool center path
Programmed path
VB
VA
V1
V4
V3
- 369 -
V2
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Number of blocks to
be read in the cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
Always 3 blocks
When circular
interpolation is
specified that causes
the center to coincide
with the start or end
point during the cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
Alarm PS0038 is issued, and the tool

stops at the end point of the block
preceding the circular interpolation
block.
- 370 -
The number can be set in parameter

No. 19625. The specifiable range is 3
to 8 blocks.
If the parameter is not set (0 is set), the
same number as Series 0i-C (3 blocks)
is assumed.
Alarm PS0041 is issued, and the tool
stops at the start point of the block
preceding the circular interpolation
block.
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-C
Function
Behavior when
automatic reference
position return is
specified during the
cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
Series 0i-D
Depends on bit 2 (CCN) of parameter

No. 5003.
Bit 2 (CCN) of parameter No. 5003 is

not available. The tool always
behaves as when CCN is set to 1.
[When CCN = 0]
The offset vector is canceled when the tool moves to the middle point.
Also, the start-up operation is performed from the reference position.
Intermediate
point
S
G28
G01
r
G00
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
[When CCN = 1 or for Series 0i-D]

The offset vector is not canceled when the tool moves to the middle point; it is
canceled when the tool moves to the reference position.
Also, the tool moves from the reference position to the next intersection point.
Intermediate
point
S
G28
G00
G01
r
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
- 371 -
Series 0i-C
Function
Travel distance
judgment method for
circular interpolation in
cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation
Series 0i-D
Depends on bit 5 (QCR) of parameter

No. 5008.
[When QCR = 0]
B
End
point
Bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008 is

not available. The tool always
behaves as when QCR is set to 1.
[When QCR = 1 or for Series 0i-D]
B
L
Start point
Center
B.34.2
Start point
D
Compensation vector
connection method
when the tool travels
around an external
corner during the
cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
B-64304EN-2/01
End
point
Center
If the end point is on side A when viewed

from the start point, the travel distance is
small. If it is on side B, C, or D, the tool
has traveled almost one round.
- Connected by linear interpolation.
If the end point is on side A of line L

connecting the start point and center, the
travel distance is small. If it is on side B,
the tool has traveled almost one round.
- Depends on bit 2 (CCC) of parameter
No. 19607.
[When CCC = 0 or for Series 0i-C]
[When CCC = 1]
Connect vectors by circular
interpolation
Connect vectors by linear

interpolation

None.
- 372 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.35
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING
B.35.1
Series 0i-C
Function
M05 output in a
tapping cycle
Behavior when K0 is
specified for the
number of repetitions
K
Behavior of the first

positioning command
(G00) for a Cs contour
control axis in a
canned cycle
Forward/retraction
feedrate for the
small-hole peck
drilling cycle (G83)
Tool retraction
direction in a fine
boring cycle (G76) or
back boring cycle
(G87)
Make a selection using bit 6 (M5T) of

parameter No. 5101.
Bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101

When the rotation direction of the spindle is
changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward
rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with
the M series, or G84/G88 with the T
series):
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or
M03.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04
or M03.
- Drilling operation is not performed, and
only drilling data is stored.
The behavior can be selected using bit

1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700.
Series 0i-D
-
Make a selection using bit 3 (M5T) of

parameter No. 5105.
Bit 3 (M5T) of parameter No. 5105

When the rotation direction of the spindle is
changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward
rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with
the M series, or G84/G88 with the T
series):
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or
M03.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04
or M03.
- Make a selection using bit 4 (K0D) of
parameter No. 5105.
Bit 4 (K0D) of parameter No. 5105
When K0 is specified in a drilling canned
cycle (G80 to G89):
0: Drilling operation is not performed, and
only drilling data is stored.
1: One drilling operation is performed.
- While bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No.
3700 exists, the normal positioning
operation is performed in a canned
cycle, regardless of the setting of this
parameter bit.
Bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700

After a serial spindle is changed to a Cs
contour control axis, the first move
command:
0: Performs the normal positioning
operation after executing the reference
position return operation.
operation.
- When the I command (forward/retraction feedrate) is omitted and 0 is set in parameter
Nos. 5172 and 5173, the forward/retraction feedrate is as follows.
0
Same feedrate as that specified by the F
command
- Bit 5 (RD2) and bit 4 (RD1) of
- Set the direction using bit 5 (RD2) and
parameter No. 5101 is not available.
bit 4 (RD1) of parameter No. 5101 in
Set the direction in axis-type parameter
combination.
No. 5148.
- 373 -

Series 0i-C
Function
Address Q command
in a high-speed peck
drilling cycle (G73),
peck drilling cycle
(G83), or small-hole
peck drilling cycle
(G83)
Tool length
compensation (G43 or
G44) in a canned
cycle when tool length
compensation type C
is selected (1 is set in
bit 0 (TLC) of
parameter No. 5001)
B.35.2
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73), peck drilling cycle (G83), and small-hole
peck drilling cycle (G83), when the address Q (amount of each-time cutting)
command is not specified or Q0 is specified:
Select the operation using bit 1 (QZA) of
Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103 is not
parameter No. 5103.
available.
The tool always behaves as when 1 is set
Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103
in bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103.
(Alarm PS0045 is issued.)
0: The tool repeats the upward and
downward movement at the same
position without cutting.
1: P/S alarm No. 045 is issued.
- Select the axis for which to enable tool
- Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006 is
length compensation, by using bit 4
not available.
(TCE) of parameter No. 5006.
set in bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No.
Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006
5006.
When tool length compensation (G43 or
G44) is specified in a canned cycle, tool
length compensation is enabled for:
0: Axis selected according to tool length
compensation type C.
1: Drilling axis.

None.
- 374 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.36
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE
B.36.1
Series 0i-C
Function
Series 0i-D
Grinding axis
specification
The grinding axis is the X or Z axis.
Behavior of the first

positioning command
(G00) for a Cs contour
control axis in a
canned cycle
The behavior can be selected using bit

1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700.
Dressing axis
specification
B.36.2
Bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700

After a serial spindle is changed to a Cs
contour control axis, the first move
command:
operation after executing the reference
position return operation.
operation.
- The dressing axis is always the fourth
axis.

None.
- 375 -
Set the grinding axes for the individual

canned grinding cycles in parameter
Nos. 5176 to 5179.
If the same axis number as the cutting
axis is specified in any of these
parameters, or if a canned grinding
cycle is executed when 0 is set, alarm
PS0456 is issued.
While bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No.
3700 exists, the normal positioning
operation is performed in a canned
cycle, regardless of the setting of this
parameter bit.
Set the dressing axes for the individual

canned grinding cycles in parameter
Nos. 5180 to 5183.
If the same axis number as the cutting
axis or grinding axis is specified in any
of these parameters, or if a canned
grinding cycle is executed when 0 is
set, alarm PS0456 is issued.
B.37
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING
B.37.1
Function
Behavior when linear
interpolation type
positioning is used
with mirror image
B.37.2
Series 0i-C
B-64304EN-2/01
Series 0i-D
If positioning of linear interpolation type is used (1 is set in bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.
1401), and if the state of mirror image when a single direction positioning block is looked
ahead differs from the state of mirror image when the execution of the block is started,
the following alarms are issued, respectively.
- Alarm PS5254
- Alarm DS0025

None.
- 376 -
B-64304EN-2/01
B.38

ROUNDING
B.38.1
Function
Optional angle
chamfering and corner
rounding commands
for a plane including a
parallel axis
Single block operation
Negative value
specified in a ,C_
or ,R_ command
Number of dwells to
be inserted between
two blocks for which
to perform optional
angle chamfering or
corner rounding
DNC operation
B.38.2
Series 0i-C
Not available.
Alarm PS0212 is issued.
Single block stop is not performed at

the start point of an inserted optional
angle chamfering or corner rounding
block.
Series 0i-D
-
Available.
Whether to perform single block stop at

the start point of an inserted block
depends on bit 0 (SBC) of parameter
No. 5105.
The value is regarded as positive.
Bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105

In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer
cycle/corner rounding (T series) or optional
angle chamfering/corner rounding cycle (M
series):
0: Single block stop is not performed.
1: Single block stop is performed.
- Alarm PS0006 is issued.
Not limited.
Only one block can be inserted.

Inserting more than one block causes
alarm PS0051.
Optional angle chamfering and corner

rounding are not available in DNC
operation.
Optional angle chamfering and corner

rounding are also available in DNC
operation.

None.
- 377 -
INDEX
B-64304EN-2/01
INDEX
DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION................153
<A>
DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C ..........................314
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL /
Direct Constant-Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle
AI CONTOUR CONTROL........................................... 338
(G77) .............................................................................107
ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL.............. 347
Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle (G82) ...................47
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT
Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling (G81) ................................45
(G37) ............................................................................. 137
<E>
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET .................................... 316

AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS .................................. 239
Electronic Gear Box ......................................................240
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ........................... 342
ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81

(G80.4, G81.4)) .............................................................240
<B>
Example for Using Canned Cycles for Drilling ..............72
Back Boring Cycle (G87)................................................ 64
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT .........................................363
Boring Cycle (G85)......................................................... 60
EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) .............355
Boring Cycle (G86)......................................................... 62
Extraction override..........................................................87
Boring Cycle (G88)......................................................... 67
<F>
Boring Cycle (G89)......................................................... 69
Fine Boring Cycle (G76).................................................43
<C>
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ..........28
Canned Cycle Cancel (G80)............................................ 86
<G>
Canned Cycle Cancel for Drilling (G80) ........................ 71

CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING....................... 29,373
G53, G28, and G30 Commands in Tool Length
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................... 375
Compensation Mode .....................................................125
CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING
GENERAL ...................................................................3,11
MACHINE)................................................................... 101
GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION .................................. 318
MACHINE TOOL.............................................................7
COMPENSATION FUNCTION................................... 118
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................ s-3
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL .............. 330
<H>
Continuous-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78) ........... 111
HELICAL INTERPOLATION .....................................319
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69).... 224
High-Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)...........................34
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION................ 24
<I>
CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G39)....... 210

Cs CONTOUR CONTROL........................................... 328
INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION .....................94
CUSTOM MACRO....................................................... 333
IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) ..97
Cutter Compensation for Input from MDI .................... 208
Interference Check ........................................................196
Interference check alarm function .................................200
COMPENSATION........................................................ 367
Interference check avoidance function..........................202

Intermittent-feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79)...........115
<D>
INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ....................................18
DATA SERVER FUNCTION ...................................... 365
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO ..............336
DATA TYPE................................................................. 311
<L>
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND

NOTE............................................................................. s-2
Left-Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74)........................79
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS............................ 264
Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (G74) .................................36
i-1
INDEX
B-64304EN-2/01
RIGID TAPPING............................................................74
LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................. 326
Rigid Tapping (G84) .......................................................75
<M>
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ...........348
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION
<S>
FUNCTION .................................................................. 341

MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF ....................... 362
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................ s-1
MANUAL HANDLE FEED ......................................... 349
SCALING (G50, G51) ..................................................215
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.......... 322
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND
MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 10/11
AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION.......360
PROGRAM FORMAT.................................................. 238
Miscellaneous................................................................ 335
............................................................................254
<N>
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ...............................356
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL
SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ..................329
(G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) .................................................... 231
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA ........................253
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL ........................8
Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value..255
NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA......................8
SETTING UNIT............................................................315
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ........................376
<O>
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60)................19
Operation to be performed if an interference is judged
SKIP FUNCTION .........................................................320
to occur.......................................................................... 200
Small-Hole Peck Drilling Cycle (G83) ...........................51
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES.......312
ROUNDING ................................................................. 377
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION.............359
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AND CORNER R ........... 90
STORED STROKE CHECK ........................................357
Override during Rigid Tapping ....................................... 87
<T>
Override signal ................................................................ 89

Overview................................................................ 119,153
Tapping Cycle (G84).......................................................57
OVERVIEW OF CUTTER COMPENSATION
THREADING (G33) .......................................................22
(G40-G42)..................................................................... 146
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY .........................332

<P>
COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING
PARAMETERS ............................................................ 263
VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ...................212
Peck Drilling Cycle (G83) .............................................. 49
TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY
Peck Rigid Tapping Cycle (G84 or G74) ........................ 83
PROGRAM .....................................................................12
Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75) ....................................... 103
TOOL FUNCTIONS.....................................................331
PMC AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 350
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44,
POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16)........ 25
G49) ..............................................................................119
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER .............................. 366
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION SHIFT TYPES ..127
PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)........... 13
Tool Length Measurement ............................................258
Prevention of Overcutting Due to Cutter
Tool Movement in Offset Mode....................................163
Compensation................................................................ 192
Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel........................184
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1,
Tool Movement in Start-up ...........................................157
G51.1) ........................................................................... 236
TOOL OFFSET (G45 - G48) ........................................141
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..... 337
<R>
RESET AND REWIND ................................................ 361
i-2
INDEX
B-64304EN-2/01
<W>
HANDLING................................................................... s-8
PROGRAMMING ......................................................... s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
MAINTENANCE ........................................................ s-11
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................... 325
i-3
Jun., 2008
Date
01
Edition
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL D/Series 0i Mate-MODEL D USERS MANUAL (For Machining Center System)
(B-64304EN-2)
Revision Record

FANUC Machining Center

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Machining Center

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Machining Center

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

*

FANUC Series 0 * Mate-MODEL D

For Machining Center System

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC MACHINE TOOL ................... 7

TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM................................. 12

PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ..................................... 13

INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .............................................................. 18

COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION ........................................... 24

SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) ................................................ 19

FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ..................................... 28

CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING............................................................... 29

High-Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)..................................................................34

RIGID TAPPING .......................................................................................... 74

Rigid Tapping (G84) ..............................................................................................75

Left-Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74)...............................................................79

OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AND CORNER R ............................................. 90

Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75)...............................................................................103

COMPENSATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 118

TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49)................................ 119

TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION SHIFT TYPES ................................... 127

Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to occur ............... 200

Cutter Compensation for Input from MDI ...........................................................208

CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G39) ........................................ 210

MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 10/11 PROGRAM FORMAT 238

AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS............................................................ 239

ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81 (G80.4, G81.4)) ............................ 240

Electronic Gear Box .............................................................................................240

SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA................................................... 253

SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY

Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ........................................255

DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS........................................................... 264

DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C.................................................. 314

SETTING UNIT.......................................................................................... 315

AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET.................................................................... 316

SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................... 329

Cs CONTOUR CONTROL......................................................................... 328

LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................................. 326

WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................... 325

MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 322

SKIP FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 320

HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 319

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 318

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 330

TOOL FUNCTIONS ................................................................................... 331

STORED STROKE CHECK....................................................................... 357

SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .............................................................. 356

EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................... 355

PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................... 350

MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 349

RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................ 348

ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 347

AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 342